specifications - Struct
Transkrypt
specifications - Struct
NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION PHASE THREE REVITALIZATIONS SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME 1 · DIVISIONS 1 TO 14 PLANT ARCHITECT INC. | PERKINS + WILL ARCHITECTS IN JOINT VENTURE BIKE STORAGE FACILITY · ISSUED FOR TENDER · 27 JUNE 2014 Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 TABLE OF CONTENTS Architectural Volume 1 Page 00001-1 No. of Pages INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 00000 00001 00005 00007 Project Title / Cover Table of Contents Consultants Seals 1 3 2 2 DIVISION 1 01001 01352 01355 01359 01611 01710 General Requirements General LEED Requirements (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014) Waste Management and Disposal (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014) Indoor Air Quality Management (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014) LEED Product Requirements (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014) Commissioning (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014) 27 3 8 22 11 9 DIVISION 2 02050 02060 02370 02513 02583 Demolition and Preparation for New Work Structural Alterations (Blackwell May 23, 2014) Erosion and Sedimentation Control (Enermodal Feb 7, 2014) Asphaltic Concrete Paving Exterior Concrete 7 2 9 6 6 Cast-in-place Concrete (Blackwell May 23, 2014) Sandblasting 8 2 DIVISION 3 03300 03353 DIVISION 4 04200 Masonry 12 Structural Steel (Blackwell May 23, 2014) Miscellaneous Metals (inc lockers) Steel Stairs, Handrails, Guards & Railings 11 11 8 Rough Carpentry Installation of Doors and Finish Hardware 6 4 DIVISION 5 05120 05500 05510 DIVISION 6 06100 06210 Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 TABLE OF CONTENTS Architectural Volume 1 Page 00001-2 No. of Pages DIVISION 7 07131 07180 07860 07900 Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing Thin Deck Coating (for curbs and other) Firestopping and Smoke Seals Sealants 6 4 4 6 Hollow Metal Doors, Frames, Panels and Screens Finish Hardware (Assa Abbloy June 27, 2014) Miscellaneous Glass and Glazing 7 16 4 Detectable Warning Surface Concrete Floor Sealing Painting and Finishing 4 2 12 Exterior Signage 6 DIVISION 8 08100 08710 08800 DIVISION 9 09365 09756 09900 DIVISION 10 10430 VOLUMES ISSUED SEPARATELY AND NOT INCLUDED HERE VOLUME 2 – MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL DIVISIONS Mechanical Divisions Crossey Eng dated May 23, 2014 318 Electrical Divisions Crossey Eng dated June 27, 2014 442 VOLUME 3 - REPORTS AND SCHEDULES See Volume 3 Table of Contents Project No. 0701-BS 1.1 SECTION 00005 CONSULTANTS Architects Perkins + Will Architects (previously Shore Tilbe Irwin & Partners) 672 Dupont Street, Suite 500 Toronto, Ontario M6G 1Z6 Tel: 416-971-6060 Fax. 416-971-6765 Contact: Vis Sankrithi Plant Architect Inc. 101 Spadina Avenue, Suite 208 Toronto, Ontario M5V 2K2 Tel: 416-979-2012 Fax. 416-979-1283 Contact: Lisa Dietrich 1.2 Structural Consultant Blackwell 19 Duncan Street, Suite 405 Toronto, Ontario M5H 3H1 Tel: 416-593-5300 Fax: 416-593-4840 Contact: Kenny Cryer 1.3 Mechanical Consultant Crossey Engineering Ltd. 2255 Sheppard Avenue East, Suite E331 Toronto, Ontario. M2J 4Y1 Tel: 416-497-3111 Fax. 416-497-7210 Contact: David Sinclair 1.4 Electrical Consultant Crossey Engineering Ltd. 2255 Sheppard Avenue East, Suite E331 Toronto, Ontario. M2J 4Y1 Tel: 416-497-3111 Fax: 416-497-7210 Contact: Leo Lee Page 00005 - 1 Project No. 0701-BS 1.5 SECTION 00005 CONSULTANTS Civil Consultant MMM Group Ltd. 701 Rossland Road East, Suite 201 Whitby, Ontario. L1N 8Y9 Grading: Stephen Wiley Tel: 905-668-3022 Ext. 1614 Storm Water Management: Amie Therrien Tel: 905-882-1100 Ext. 3024 1.6 Environmental Consultant Enermodel Engineering Ltd. 650 Riverbend Drive Kitchener, Ontario N2K 3S2 Tel: 519-743-8777 Fax: 416-260-3028 Contact: Mike Edwards 1.7 Code Consultant Randal Brown & Associates 6 Lansing Square North York, Ontario. M2J 1T5 Tel: 416-492-5886 Ext. 239 Fax: 416-492-1258 Contact: David Vickers * * * END OF SECTION Page 00005 - 2 Project No. 0701-3 SECTION 00007 SEALS Architects of Record Perkins + Will Architects (formerly Shore Tilbe Irwin & Partners) 672 Dupont Street, Suite 500 Toronto, Ontario M6G 1Z6 Tel: 416-971-6060 Fax. 416-971-6765 Contact: Linda Neumayer Andrew Frontini Plant Architect Inc. 101 Spadina Avenue, Suite 208 Toronto, Ontario M5V 2K2 Tel: 416-979-2012 Fax. 416-979-1283 Contact: Lisa Rapoport Landscape Consultant Hoerr Schaudt Landscape Architects 850 West Jackson Boulevard, Suite 800 Chicago, Illinois 60607 USA Tel: 312-492-6501 Fax: 312-492-7101 Contact: Jon Brooke Structural Consultant Blackwell Bowick 19 Duncan Street, Suite 405 Toronto, Ontario M5H 3H1 Tel: 416-593-5300 Fax: 416-593-4840 Contact: Christian Bellini Page 00007 - 1 Project No. 0701-3 SECTION 00007 SEALS Mechanical Consultants Crossey Engineering Ltd. 2255 Sheppard Avenue East, Suite E331 Toronto, Ontario. M2J 4Y1 Tel: 416-497-3111 Fax. 416-497-7210 Contact: Andrew Pratt Electrical Consultants Crossey Engineering Ltd. 2255 Sheppard Avenue East, Suite E331 Toronto, Ontario. M2J 4Y1 Tel: 416-497-3111 Fax: 416-497-7210 Contact: Adam Ryk Civil Consultants MMM Group Ltd. 701 Rossland Road East, Suite 201 Whitby, Ontario. L1N 8Y9 Grading: Stephen Wiley Tel: 905-668-3022 Ext. 1614 Storm Water Management: Amie Therrien Tel: 905-882-1100 Ext. 3024 * * * END OF SECTION Page 00007 - 2 Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Subdivision of Work 1.1.1 The Specifications have generally been divided into trade divisions, and the trade divisions into sections for the purpose of ready reference, but a section may consist of more than one Subcontractor or supplier. 1.1.2 The responsibility for determining which Subcontractor or Supplier provided labour, materials, products, equipment and services to complete the work rests solely with the Contractor. 1.2 Trade Contractors 1.2.1 All Trade Contractors must be approved by the Owner and the Contractor. The Owner may reject a Trade Contractor for any reason. 1.3 Discrepancies and/or Omissions 1.3.1 If the Contractor finds discrepancies in, or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications or other Contract Documents or has any doubt as to the meaning or intent of any part thereof the Consultant shall be notified at once. The Contractor will send written instructions or explanations. Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for oral instructions. 1.4 Acceptance of Existing Condition 1.4.1 Commencement of Work means acceptance of existing condition 1.5 Noise, Access, Events and Property Constraints 1.5.1 All Event dates listed in this section are to be verified with the City of Toronto at the start of the project. 1.5.2 The Noise Bylaw (Chapter 591, City of Toronto Municipal Code) permits operation of construction equipment ONLY during Monday to Friday 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Saturdays 9:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., and no construction noise on Sundays and statutory holidays (amending by-law 505-2006). 1.5.3 Continuous public access to the Square must be maintained at all times throughout construction. Contractor to provide a schedule for temporary alternate routing of public access routes throughout construction for the Owner and Architect’s review. 1.5.4 Continuous public access to the Square must be maintained throughout events that host extremely large numbers of people, including but not limited to the following events: Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 .1 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 2 Nuit Blanche (7pm to 7am) 2014 – Oct 4 & 5 (Project build to commence as early as Sep 23/14) 2015 – Oct 3 & 4 (Project build to commence as early as Sep 23/15) .2 .3 Cavalcade of Lights (6pm to 11pm) 2014 – Nov. 29 (Project build to commence as early as Nov 20/14) 2015 – Nov. 28 (Project build to commence as early as Nov 20/15) New Years Eve (all day) 2014 – Dec. 17 to Jan 7 2015 – Dec 16 to Jan 6th 1.5.5 The Owner may notify the Contractor, providing 2-weeks notice, of events on the site during which construction may need to stop or be limited. This notice may result in construction schedule extension at no cost to the Owner. 1.5.6 Ensure that construction does not result in closures / blockages along Queen Street. Queen Street serves as emergency access for the site and the only events access for the site. 1.5.7 Vehicles are not permitted onto the square during events activation and during the setup periods prior and after the events. Events by Toronto Special Events include the following: .1 Doors Open (10am to 6pm) 2014 – May 24 & 25 2015 – May 23 & 24 .2 Fresh Wednesdays (noon to 2pm) 2014 – Weekly from July 9 to Aug. 27 2015 – N/A .3 Tasty Thursdays (noon to 2pm) 2014 – Weekly from July 10 to Aug 28 2015 – N/A .4 Nuit Blanche (7pm to 7am) 2014 – Oct 4 & 5 Project build to commence as early as Sep 23/14 2015 – Oct 3 & 4 Project build to commence as early as Sep 23/15 Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 .5 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 3 Cavalcade of Lights (6pm to 11pm) 2014 – Nov. 29 Project build to commence as early as Nov 20/14 2015 – Nov 28 Project build to commence as early as Nov 19/15 .6 PanAm / ParaPan Games (all day) 2015 – Jul 9/15 – Aug 15/15 Project build to commence as early as Jul 2/15 .7 Khalsa Day (all day) 2014 – April 27 2015 – April 26 .8 Toronto Jazz Festival (all day) 2014 – June 18 – July3 2015 – tbc .9 IRIE Music Festival (all day) 2014 – August 1 -5 .10 Canada's Walk of Fame (all day) 2014 sep 18 -21 2015 tbc .11 Scotia Bank Toronto Waterfront Marathon (all day) 2014 – Oct 18 -19 2015 – Oct 17 -18 .12 New Years Eve (all day) 2014 – Dec 17 – Jan 7 2015 – Dec 16 – Jan 6 1.6 Examination of Existing Conditions 1.6.1 Be fully informed of site conditions and all matters affecting the site and work to be done thereon at the place of building. Ensure that construction proceeds without misunderstanding of site conditions as a result of neglect in the examination of existing conditions. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 4 1.6.2 Each trade shall inform the Contractor of defects in the Work on which further execution of work depends. 1.6.3 Verify dimensions of prepared work before fabrication of that work which is dependant on the prepared work. 1.7 Public Utilities and Services 1.7.1 The location of the utilities as shown on the Contract Drawings are approximate only and the Owner does not warrant the completeness or correctness of the information shown. The Contractor shall verify the completeness and correctness of utilities information in the field, by contacting utility companies, and shall exercise the necessary care in Work operations, to take such other precautions as may be necessary to safeguard the utilities from damages and to repair any utilities damaged during Work at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall notify any discrepancy of utility information to the Contractor forth with. 1.7.2 The Contractor shall request and obtain locates from all utility providers prior to any excavation. All excavations near the vicinity of any underground utilities shall be conducted in accordance with the policy/standards of the utility provider. 1.8 Building Dimensions and Coordination 1.8.1 Ensure that all necessary job dimensions are taken and all Subcontractors are coordinated for the proper execution of the work. Assume complete responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of such dimensions, and for coordination. 1.8.2 Verify that all work, as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions and positions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out by requirements of the drawings, and ensure that work installed in error is rectified before construction resumes. 1.8.3 Check and verify all dimensions referring to the work and the interfacing of all services. Verify with the Subcontractor concerned all dimensions, when pertaining to the work of other Subcontractors. Be responsible to see that Subcontractors for various Subcontractors cooperate for the proper performance of the Work. 1.8.4 Avoid scaling directly from the drawings. If there is ambiguity or lack of information, immediately inform the Contractor and Consultant. Be responsible for any change through the disregarding of this clause. 1.8.5 All details and measurements of any work which is to fit or to conform with work installed shall be taken at the building. 1.8.6 Advise Contractor and Consultant of discrepancies and if there are omissions on drawings, particularly those which affect aesthetics, or which interfere with services, equipment or surfaces. DO NOT PROCEED without direction from the Consultant. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 5 1.8.7 Ensure that each Subcontractor communicates requirements for site conditions and surfaces necessary for the execution of the Subcontractor's work, and that he provides setting drawings, templates and all other information necessary for the location and installation of material, holes, sleeves, insets, anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections and access panels. Inform other Subcontractors whose work is affected by these requirements and preparatory work. 1.8.8 Prepare interference drawings and submit to the Consultant for review. Revise drawings based on Consultants comments and to properly coordinate the work. 1.9 Labels and Nameplates 1.9.1 Do not install permanent or permanently-attached labels, trademarks, and nameplates in visible locations on materials and components, unless required for operating instructions or by Jurisdictional Authorities. 1.10 Use of Premises Before Substantial Performance 1.10.1 The Owner shall have the right to enter and occupy the building, in whole or in part, for the purpose of placing fittings and equipment, or for other use, before completion of the Contract if, in the opinion of the Contractor, such entry and occupancy does not prevent or interfere with the Contractor in the performance of the Contract. Such entry shall in no way be considered as an acceptance of the Work in whole, or in part, nor shall it imply acknowledgement that terms of the Agreement are fulfilled. 1.11 Lines, Levels, and Building Location 1.11.1 The Contractor shall establish all necessary lines and levels, and erect substantial batter boards and maintain their accurate position. 1.12 Regulatory Requirements 1.12.1 Minimum Standard: Unless reference is made in the Contract Documents to other standards, all work shall conform to or exceed the minimum applicable standards of The 2006 Ontario Building Code, and/or the governing Jurisdictional Authorities. 1.12.2 Laws and Regulations: Comply with all applicable statutes, laws, by-laws, regulations, ordinances and orders whether Federal, Provincial, Municipal or otherwise, at any time in effect during the duration of this Contract, and all rules and requirements of the Police and Fire departments, or other governmental authorities, and all C.S.A. approvals, where required. 1.13 Specification Reference to Standards and Codes 1.13.1 Where reference is made to published standards and codes, such references shall be considered to refer to the latest edition (revision) approved by the organization issuing that publication, which is current at the date of this Specification. 1.14 Temporary Works Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 1.14.1 1.14.3 .1 Provide protection for existing finishes, newly finished and partially finished building finishes and equipment. .2 Each trade shall provide necessary screens and covers as required. .3 Be responsible for all damage up to the take-over by the Owner. Field Offices 1.14.6 Provide and maintain site offices in locations as approved by the Contractor and the Owner. Temporary Utilities .1 1.14.5 Shall be provided by the Contractor. Temporary Protection .1 1.14.4 Page 01001 - 6 Temporary Hoarding and Enclosures .1 1.14.2 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Refer to Instructions to Bidders. Temporary Ladders, Stairs and Scaffolds .1 Each trade shall be responsible for providing their own ladders, stairs and scaffolds in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act. .2 Construct and maintain scaffolding in a rigid, secure and safe manner, independent of walls and in such a manner as to interfere as little as possible with other trades. .3 When not in use, move scaffolding as necessary to permit other work to proceed. .4 Remove scaffolding promptly when no longer required. Elevators: .1 Existing Carpark 36 elevators may not be used by construction personnel. 1.15 Sleeving 1.15.1 Assess requirements for sleeving the structural elements for passing of pipes, conduits and other mechanical or electrical components, and include all work required for approved interfacing between the structure, all mechanical and electrical work, and other components of the work. 1.16 Life and Fire Safety 1.16.1 Enforce all requirements established by Jurisdictional Authorities and Underwriters for life safety, fire prevention, and fire protection. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 7 1.17 Drainage 1.17.1 Ensure that positive drainage is provided to roof, floor, slabs, paving and site drains and catch basins, as set in their final positions, and at all other locations to prevent water infiltration into the buildings. Provide constant slopes for drained surfaces to drains and drainage courses. 1.17.2 Verify the extent of each area served by a drain, or drainage course, to eliminate possible undrained surfaces. Coordinate the work of involved Subcontractors before each of their work proceeds. 1.17.3 If water is found to be ponding on roof areas (24 hours or more) due to improperly placed drains, install additional drains to alleviate water ponding at no cost to the Owner. If extra drains are required coordinate the location of rainwater leaders with the Consultant. Note: Controlled flow drainage is required for this project. 1.18 Windload For Exterior Application 1.18.1 Design and install framing, hangers, fasteners, supports, and all accessories required to complete the work to withstand local windloads and/or uplifts. All members shall be of sizes and strength to carry all loads imposed and provide stiffness required. 1.19 Imperial/International System of Units 1.19.1 Where measurements are indicated in both Imperial and International System of Units (SI), the SI System of Units will apply. 1.20 Smoking Restrictions 1.20.1 Smoking will not be permitted anywhere in the building. Any smoking shall take place outside the premises. 1.21 Posters, Photos, Calendars, and Pin-ups 1.21.1 "Sunshine Girls" or similar material will not be allowed on site. 1.22 Cutting and Restoration 1.22.1 While every effort has been made to show or note the extent of the work both on the drawings and specifications, the Contractor must realize the complexities involved in a project of this size and type. 1.22.2 Typically the Contractor shall restore any and all existing surfaces disturbed by new construction operations whether or not such restoration is noted on drawings. "Restore" is defined herein as the provision of all work necessary for bringing a disturbed area, material, surface, assembly or system to its original finished condition or better. 1.22.3 It is therefore imperative that Contractor evaluates the drawings and specifications and visits the site to conduct a pre-tender survey of existing conditions upon which new work Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 8 will be dependent. No additional cost will be entertained by the Owner on account of the Contractor's failure to comply with the foregoing. 1.22.4 1.22.5 Execute cutting and remedial work required to: .1 Make several parts fit properly. .2 Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. .3 Remove and replace defective work. .4 Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. .5 Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing and mockups. .6 Install specified work in existing construction. In addition to Contract requirements, upon written instructions of Consultant: .1 Uncover work to provide for Consultant's observation of covered work. .2 Remove samples of installed materials for testing. .3 Remove work to provide for alteration of existing work. 1.22.6 Do not endanger any work by cutting or altering work or any part of it. 1.22.7 Do not cut or alter work of another Contractor without written consent of the Contractor. 1.22.8 Prior to cutting, boring, or sleeving load-bearing members, or items which affect structural safety of the project, or work of another Contractor, submit written notice to Contractor requesting consent to proceed with cutting, including information as to size, location, timing, Subcontractor and tools to be used. 1.22.9 Prior to cutting and remedial work done on instruction of Contractor or Consultant submit cost estimate. Do not proceed with cutting and remedial work until proposed extra costs are approved in writing. 1.22.10 Should conditions of work or schedule indicate change of materials or methods, submit written recommendation to Contractor and Consultant including conditions indicating change, recommendations for alternative methods or materials, and submittals as required for substitutions. 1.22.11 Submit written notice to Contractor and Consultant designating time work will be uncovered, to provide for observation. 1.22.12 All electrical and mechanical equipment and wiring which must be built into or interfaced with the building components, or pass through structure, walls, floors, etc., shall have their installation preplanned cooperatively with the respective Subcontractors involved. The Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 9 resultant need for cutting and patching shall, therefore, be reduced to an absolute minimum. 1.22.13 Subcontractors requiring cuts, holes, or sleeves for his work shall locate them. 1.22.14 Inspect existing conditions of work, including elements subject to movement or damage, during cutting and patching and excavating and backfilling. 1.22.15 After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new work. 1.22.16 Provide shoring, bracing, and support as required to maintain structural integrity of project. 1.22.17 Provide protection for other portions of the project. 1.22.18 Provide protection from the elements. 1.22.19 Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with specified tolerances and finishes. 1.22.20 Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new work. 1.22.21 Employ appropriate Subcontractors with skilled labour to perform cutting and patching of exposed surfaces. 1.22.22 Cut materials using proper equipment and methods. Pneumatic or impact tools are not allowed without prior approval of the Consultant. 1.22.23 Properly fit work to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. 1.22.24 At penetration of fire-rated ceilings, walls or floor constructions, completely seal voids with fire rated materials, to the full thickness of the construction element. 1.22.25 Make cuts with clean, true, smooth edges. Fit unit to tolerances established by best standard practice for applicable work. Make patches invisible in final assembly. 1.22.26 Tightly fit all construction to pipes, ducts, and conduits which pass through construction, to completely prevent the passage of air. 1.22.27 Restore work which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide completed work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.22.28 Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish. 1.23 .1 Continuous surfaces: to nearest intersections. .2 Assembly: entire refinishing. Project Meetings for Progress of Work Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 10 1.23.1 Contractor will conduct progress meetings in accordance with the schedule and/or decisions made at Preconstruction meeting. 1.23.2 Include in the agenda the following: .1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. .2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting. .3 Field observations, problems, conflicts. .4 Problems which impede construction schedule. .5 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules. .6 Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. .7 Revisions to construction schedule. .8 Progress during succeeding work period. .9 Review submittal schedules: expedite as required. .10 Maintenance of quality standards. .11 Pending changes and substitutions. .12 Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule and on completion date. .13 Other business. 1.24 Submittals Prior to Construction 1.24.1 Submit the following prior to commencement of construction: .1 Products List .1 Within thirty days after date of Contract, submit to Contractor and Consultant one reproducible transparency of complete list of all products which are proposed for installation. .2 Tabulate list by each specification section. .3 For products specified under reference standards, include with listing of each product: .1 Name and address of manufacturer. .2 Trade name. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 11 .3 Model or catalogue designation. .4 Manufacturer's data: .1 Performance and test data. .2 Reference standards. .5 Material safety data sheets. .2 Controlled Hazardous Materials list: The Contractor shall provide a list of all controlled hazardous materials or products containing hazardous materials, all physical agents or devices or equipment producing or omitting physical agent and any substance, compound, product or physical agent that is deemed to be or contans a designated substance in accordance with the Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) as defined under the Occupational Health and Safety Act and shall provide appropriate Material Health and Safety Data Sheets for these substances used for the performance of the required Work, all prior to the performance of said Work. .3 Safety plan / Rescue plan: The Contractor shall have a clearly defined safety plan/rescue plan for its Workers involved in hazardous activities. This plan shall include, but not be limited to, procedures for entering a confined space on the Work site. .4 Demolition Dust Control Plan: Submit demolition dust control plan for consultant review and approval. The Demolition Dust Control Plan should identify measures that will be taken to control dust during demolition, related soil excavation or during soil remediation/excavation activities and should include the following as applicable: .1 The daily, or more frequently if required, wetting of all soft and hard surfaces and any excavation face on the site, with the addition of approved dust repressant, if required. .2 The designation of truck loading points to avoid trucks tracking potentially contaminated demolition debris off the site. Such loading points should be on a gravel base to minimize tracking of the soil onto the sidewalk and the street. If the loading point becomes contaminated it should be cleaned and replaced. .3 All trucks and vans leaving the site should be cleaned of all loose soil and dust from demolition debris including the washing of tires and sweeping or washing of exteriors and tailgates by a designated labourer. A daily log of each truck leaving the site should be kept noting when the truck was cleaned and by whom. .4 Tarping all trucks leaving the site which have been loaded with indigenous soil or demolition debris. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 12 .5 An air monitoring program, if necessary, as determined through consultation with the Environmental Protection Offices of the City of Toronto. .6 Supervision of the dust control measures by a qualified environmental consultant if necessary, as determined by consultation with the Environmental Protection Offices of the City of Toronto. .5 Submittals for Concrete Formwork (refer to Section 03100 Concrete Formwork) .6 Steel Framework, Anchors and Brackets not in Contact with Stone: Certificate of Compliance. (refer to Section 04400 Building Stone) .7 Submittals for Structural Steel: Refer to section 05120 Structural Steel, item 1.6 SUBMITTALS 1.25 Submittals During Progress of Construction 1.25.1 Submit the following during the course of construction: .1 Construction Schedule updates. .2 Report on any damage, on conditions or problems arising out of receipt of Owner's equipment on site. .3 Samples .1 Submit samples where specified in each applicable trade section of the Specifications. Unless specified otherwise make samples of adequate size to represent the material intended for use on this project. .2 Where the degrees of marking or colour cannot be adequately shown in a single sample, submit a range of samples to show the extremes of colour and marking. Identify samples with project number, date, and name of Contractor. Materials used in building shall correspond to approved samples for quality, colour, texture, finish, and thickness. .3 Submit two samples of each item required unless specified otherwise. .4 Progress records and testing and inspection reports. .5 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified herein and in accordance with Mechanical and Electrical Divisions of the Specifications. .6 Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB): The Contractor shall submit to the Contractor, prior to the issuance of the Contractor's last payment, and at any other time when requested to do so, a statement from the Workers' Safety Insurance Board that all of the assessments the Contractor or any Sub Contractor is Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 13 liable to pay under the Worker's Safety Insurance Board Act or successor legislation have been paid. 1.26 Submittals When Project is Substantially Performed 1.26.1 Manufacturer’s Data Book and Shop Drawings 1.26.2 .1 Provide the Contractor with shop drawings and Manufacturer's Data Books at the completion of the Work. .2 Shop drawings shall consist of two complete sets of final "REVIEWED" and "Reviewed with Comments" shop drawings, on which corrections have been recorded of changes made during fabrication and installation of unforeseen conditions. Do not include drawings which were noted "REVISE AND RESUBMIT". .3 The Manufacturer's Data Book shall consist of two copies of soft, black, vinylcovered loose leaf binders, to accommodate 8-½" x 11" sheets. Binders shall match in all dimensions. A title sheet labelled "Manufacturer's Data Book" with project name, date and list of contents shall precede data. Organize required material into applicable sections of work. Each section shall be marked by labelled tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividers. .4 The Manufacturer's Data Book shall contain: .1 Equipment and operating instructions on all operable equipment and on all mechanical and electrical equipment, plumbing fixtures, and architectural hardware. Notes shall be typed. Drawings shall be neatly drafted and inked, or white-printed. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for additional requirements. .2 Maintenance instructions. .3 Original brochures on all equipment. .4 Parts lists on all equipment including a list of suppliers. .5 All additional material used in the project beyond that indicated by brochures listed under the various sections, showing manufacturers and sources of supply. .6 Names, addresses and telephone numbers of the designer(s) and major contractor(s) who worked on the building. .7 Commissioning data such as air and water flows and regulating valve positions. Record Drawings: Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 14 .1 Maintain, as the work progresses, until project duration, 1 set of project Record Drawings. The full size drawings shall be in white prints while the 8-1/2" x 11" detail drawing sheets shall be in photocopies. .2 Contractor shall return the marked up hard copies and provide as-built drawings digitally produced (CADD) on a computer. Transfer all as-built information to CD's using CD ROM of tender documents provided by the Consultant. ACAD 2009 shall be the acceptable data file platform. Diskettes shall be formatted in Autocad maintaining the layering standard used on the tendering drawings. Each CD shall be clearly labelled with the project name, drawing number (s), Contractor and/or Subcontractor names and the date submitted. Record accurately on the Record Drawings, all changes to the Contract Documents as constructed, such as Consultant/Engineer-originated changes, Contractor/Subcontractor-originated changes, Site Instructions, Supplementary Instructions, Addenda, instructions by correspondence and Jurisdictional Authority approvals. Carefully record location of concealed elements as required for future maintenance, alteration work, and building additions. Delete information made obsolete by changes, and accurately draw or duplicate instructions and indicate all changes listed herein. Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Specification Divisions for additional requirements. .3 Clearly mark each of the project Record Drawings "Project Record Copy". Maintain in good condition. Make the File Copy available at all times for inspection or use by the Consultant. .4 Keep the File Record Drawings current and do not record irrelevant information. Do not permanently conceal any work until the required information has been recorded. .5 Submit to the Consultant, the record drawings and 1 bound photocopy of the Drawing Detail Sheets with the application for Substantial Performance of the project. 1.26.3 Record Specifications: Submit updated Specifications with the application for Substantial Performance of the project. Specifications shall incorporate all changes listed in .2 herein. A copy of the modification(s) shall be electronically cut and pasted on the revised page where space permits, or a copy of the revision bound into and superimposed on the revised page. 1.26.4 Affidavits 1.26.5 .1 Submit to the Contractor and Consultant affidavits which are specified in other Sections of the Specifications. .2 Submit affidavits in duplicate, and signed by a responsible officer of the certifying company. Laboratory and Inspection Reports: Submit to the Contractor and Consultant, in accordance with the technical Sections of the Specifications. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 15 1.26.6 Extended Warranties: Provide the extended warranties specified. These extended warranties shall commence immediately after the expiration of the standard one-year warranty included in the Contract. The Contractor shall submit them on a standard Form of Warranty. 1.26.7 Extra Materials: Provide the Owner with extra materials for future maintenance use, as specified in the technical Sections of the Specifications. Place in storage location as directed by Owner. 1.26.8 Engineer's Certification: Where the documents require the seal of a registered Professional Engineer engaged by the Contractor, the Engineer(s) in question shall be responsible for providing certification as required by the Ontario Building Code or as required by the specifications, stating that the construction it designed is in conformity with that design. Submit one copy of the applicable certification to the Contractor and Consultant before Substantial Performance. 1.27 Construction Schedule 1.27.1 Submit construction schedule for work of this Contract in accordance with the requirements of the Construction Manager. 1.27.2 Each trade Contractor shall provide construction schedule for their entire Work. Revise schedule when it cannot readily be related to the actual stage of construction or when requested by the Contractor. 1.28 Shop and Interference Drawings 1.28.1 Where specified or where deemed to be required by the Contractor and Consultant, submit shop drawings to the Contractor in the following manner: 1.28.2 Submit 4 prints of each structural, mechanical and electrical and 3 prints of architectural shop drawings with title block appearing at lower right-hand corner. Shop drawings shall be submitted electronically whenever possible and uploaded to the project ftp Site. 1.28.3 The use of photographed Consultant's drawings for shop drawing purposes is not acceptable. 1.28.4 Prior to submission to the Consultant the Contractor and Trade Contractor shall review all shop drawings. By this review the Contractor and Trade Contractor represents that they have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalogue numbers, and similar data, or will do so, and that they have checked and coordinated each shop drawing with the requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. The Contractor and Trade Contractor's review of each shop drawing shall be indicated by stamp, date, and signature of a responsible person. The Shop Drawing shall clearly indicate whether it is for review or for record purposes. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 16 1.28.5 The Contractor (and Subcontractor(s) where appropriate), shall mark any information requested by the fabricator, confirm any matters in doubt, check and sign each Subcontractor shop drawing, and make any other notations he considers necessary before submitting to the Contractor and Consultant for review.Drawings requiring several or extensive changes will be marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT", otherwise one (1) white print will be returned marked "REVIEWED" or "REVIEWED WITH COMMENTS" and shall not be returned to the Consultant. Drawings marked "NOT REVIEWED" are either not required, or from an unacceptable supplier, or are seriously deficient. 1.28.6 Manufacturer's catalogue cuts will be acceptable, providing they are 8½" x 11" originals, and they indicate all choices including sizes, colours, model number, options, and other pertinent data. Only one copy need to be submitted to the Contractor and Consultant, except for colour sample sheets. 1.29 Shop and Interference Drawings shall include the following: 1.29.1 The name of the project. 1.29.2 Kinds of material and finishes. 1.29.3 Sections, arrangements and details which indicate complete construction, as well as all interconnections with other work. 1.29.4 Fabrication and erection dimensions, together with quantities and/or locations. 1.29.5 Weight of individual items and equipment which will affect the preparatory work of others and subsequent reinforcement required to support loads anticipated. 1.29.6 Assumed design loadings, all dimensions of elements and material specifications for all load-bearing members. 1.29.7 Data verifying that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance and safety of work shown on shop drawings, as well as other work interconnected. 1.29.8 Proposed chases, sleeves, cuts, and holes in structural members. 1.29.9 The time that the fabricator considers necessary from the date that he receives the Contractor's authority to proceed (and shop drawing is returned) until the fabricated work will be delivered to the site, and for installation, if appropriate. 1.29.10 A 4½" x 3" high block for Contractor and Consultant's review stamp, and another block of the same size for review stamp of Contractor's Engineer. 1.29.11 The review by the Consultant is for the sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. The review shall not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with the Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 17 dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation, and for coordination of the work of all Subcontractors. 1.29.12 The review of this drawing and/or any notes added to it, does not constitute authorization to proceed with any work which, in the Contractor's or Supplier's opinion, will involve extra cost to the Owner. 1.29.13 In the event of any conflict between the Contract Documents and a shop drawing, the Contract Documents shall govern. 1.30 Interference and Coordination Drawings 1.30.1 The Contractor shall prepare colour-coded interference drawings in order to properly coordinate the work of all Subcontractors, such as, but not restricted to, plumbing and fire protection, sheet metal and air conditioning, electrical and building structure. 1.30.2 Bear all costs involved for the preparation of these drawings and the changes necessitated due to interference discovered by their preparation. Advise all Subcontractors and the Consultant of any rerouting or relocation required. 1.30.3 If interferences are discovered advise Contractor and Consultant immediately and do not proceed until adjustments are approved. 1.30.4 Submit copies of drawings for the Contractor and Consultant's records. 1.30.5 Provide a line item in progress draws for interference drawings. 1.31 Review by Consultant 1.31.1 Give the Contractor and Consultant at least 24 hours advance notice of shop fabrication, field erection and other phases of the Work so as to afford him reasonable opportunity to inspect the Work for compliance with contract requirements. Failure to meet this requirement may be cause for the Consultant to classify the Work as defective. 1.31.2 Uncover any Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, have the inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work. 1.31.3 The Consultant may order any part of the Work to be examined if such Work is suspected to be not in accordance with the Contract Documents. If, upon examination such Work is found not in accordance with the Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay the cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner will pay the cost of examination and replacement. 1.31.4 If the Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have the inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 18 1.32 Inspection and Testing 1.32.1 Refer to the front end specifications Cash Allowance for complete Inspections and Testing. 1.32.2 Trade Sections Requiring Independent Inspection and/or Testing: It is anticipated that the following trades will require testing, and/or inspection by an independent qualified inspection/testing company. .1 Sound test existing concrete parking garage ceiling within area of new facility .2 Poured-in-place concrete .3 Structural Steel and Steel Deck .4 Pre-engineered Steel Stud .5 Waterproofing .6 Asphalt Paving .7 Concrete Paving .8 Concrete .9 Masonry .10 Insulation and Air/Vapour Barriers .11 Firestopping .12 Sprayed Fireproofing .13 Flashings .14 Windows and Curtain Wall .15 Signage .16 Independent Air and Water Balancing. 1.32.3 Prior to the installation of acoustic ceiling tiles and closing in of ceilings, determine an appropriate date for a site inspection and notify the Consultant and the Owner’s representative that the work in the ceiling space has been completed and is ready to be reviewed. 1.32.4 This Section is to be read together with individual trade sections where more specific requirements for inspection and testing will be identified. 1.32.5 Inspection and testing work may be performed by one or more Independent Inspection and Testing Companies at the discretion of the Consultant. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 19 1.32.6 Do not limit responsibility for ensuring that products and execution of the work meet Contract requirements, and inspection and testing required to this end, to specified inspection and testing. 1.32.7 Qualifications of Inspection and Testing Companies: .1 Testing or inspection company to be approved by Owner/Consultant .2 Inspection and testing companies to be certified by the Standards Council of Canada. .3 Companies engaged for inspection and testing shall provide equipment, methods of recoding and evaluation, and knowledgeable personnel to conduct tests precisely as specified in reference standards. .4 If requested, submit affidavits and copies of certificates of calibration made by an accredited calibrator to verify that testing equipment was calibrated and its accuracy ensured within the previous twelve months. 1.33 Non-Compliance With Inspections and Tests 1.33.1 If the initial inspections and tests required to establish compliance with the Contract Documents indicates non-compliance with the Contract Documents, subsequent testing or reinspection occasioned by non-compliance shall be performed by the same Inspector(s) and the cost thereof borne by the Contractor. 1.33.2 Where factual evidence exists that defective workmanship has occurred or that work has been carried out incorporating defective materials, the Contractor and Consultant may have tests, inspections or surveys performed, analytical calculation of structural strength made and the like in order to help determine whether the work must be replaced. Tests, inspections or surveys carried out under these circumstances will be made at the Contractor's expense, regardless of their results, which may be such that, in the Consultant's opinion, the work may be acceptable. 1.33.3 All testing shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code, except where this would in the Consultant's opinion cause undue delay or give results not representative of the rejected material in place. In this case, the tests shall be conducted in accordance with the standards given by the Consultant. 1.33.4 Materials or workmanship which fail to meet specified requirements may be rejected by the Consultant whenever found at any time prior to final acceptance of the work regardless of previous inspection. If rejected, defective materials or work incorporating defective materials or workmanship shall be promptly removed and replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Consultant, at no expense to the Owner. 1.33.5 Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements promptly. 1.33.6 If in the opinion of the Consultant it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may deduct from the Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 20 Contract Price the difference in value between the Work performed and that called for by the Contract Documents, the amount of which shall be determined by the Consultant. 1.34 Quality Control 1.34.1 Obtaining and payment of inspections, tests, or Engineer's stamps required by Code or Ordinances, or by a plan approval authority and made by a legally constituted authority, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, unless otherwise provided by the Contract Documents. 1.34.2 Be responsible for inspection or testing performed exclusively for own quality control and convenience, and testing, adjustment and balancing of mechanical and electrical systems, and pay all costs associated therewith. 1.34.3 Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax the responsibility of the Subcontractors to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.34.4 Mock Ups .1 Prior to proceeding with the Work, prepare mock-ups as requested in the individual sections of the specifications and in this section. Include for Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups. .2 Construct in specified locations or as selected by the Consultant. .3 Prepare mock-ups for Contractor and Consultant's review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in the Work. .4 Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. .5 Remove mock-ups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to Consultant. .6 Leave mock-up in place as part of finished work if approved by Owner / Consultant. 1.34.5 Provide test results and mix designs as may be requested. 1.34.6 The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in the Contract Documents or beyond those required by the law of the Place of Work shall be appraised by the Consultant and may be authorized as recoverable. 1.34.7 Unless more restrictive/demanding requirements are specified in other Sections, the following construction tolerances could be accepted: .1 "plumb and level" - 3 mm in 3 m. .2 “square" - 10 seconds more or less than 90 degrees. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .3 "straight" - 3 mm under a 3 m long straight edge. .4 Tolerances shall not be cumulative. Page 01001 - 21 1.34.8 Accommodate, by means of expansion and contraction provisions, any movement in the building envelope assemblies themselves and between the assemblies and the building structure. Allow for expansion and contraction of components caused by ambient temperature range, surface temperature variation of components, wind, seismic forces, structural deflection and racking; without causing misalignment of joints, breakage of joints and air/vapour barriers, water and air penetration through the assembly, glass breakage, or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 1.34.9 Method of attachment to the structure shall take into account site peculiarities so that site and air vibrations or normal temperature movements of the building do not loosen, weaken and/or fracture the connection between building envelope assembly components and the structure or between the components themselves. 1.35 Testing and Demonstration of Operable Equipment and Systems 1.35.1 Ensure that the Owner's representatives are adequately instructed in all aspects of operation and maintenance of manual and automated systems and/or equipment, and all tests and adjustments have been performed to ensure smooth, trouble free operation is achieved, in compliance with Contract Documents. 1.36 Prevention of Mould, Mildew, and Moisture Damage 1.36.1 Take all precautions necessary to eliminate the possibility of mould and mildew growth, and damage caused by moisture to cellulose containing materials and various other materials and finishes, including but not limited to gypsum board, glass fibre and mineral fibre insulation, lumber, carpet, paint and plywood. 1.36.2 Do not allow the installation of gypsum board or other products that would be affected by moisture until the chance of wetting is eliminated, and the temperatures are appropriate to control mould and mildew propagation. 1.36.3 Schedule work in such a manner that materials affected by moisture are protected as soon as possible. 1.36.4 Immediately remove and replace any materials damaged by moisture, at no cost to the Owner. 1.37 Contractor's Options 1.37.1 For products specified only by reference standards, select any product meeting standards, by any manufacturer. 1.37.2 In order to establish standards of quality, the Consultant has in the detailed Specifications, referred to certain products by name and catalogue number. Where the drawings have Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 22 shown specific detailing, dimensions, ratings, characteristics and other performance criteria the details are based on one specific manufacturer and not combinations of more than one. 1.37.3 For products specified by naming several products or manufacturer's, select any product and manufacturer named. 1.37.4 For products specified by naming one or more products, but indicating the phrase "or approved equivalent" after specified product, Contractor must submit request for substitution, for any product not specifically named. The Consultant may at his discretion reject products which in his opinion are not equivalent. 1.37.5 For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer and without the phrase "or approved equivalent", there is no option, and no substitution will be allowed. 1.38 Occupational Health and Safety 1.38.1 The Contractor shall perform the Work in a safe manner and shall comply with all applicable municipal, provincial, and federal legislation and any other regulation by authorities having jurisdiction of construction projects. In the event of conflict between any provisions on the above authorities, the most stringent provision shall apply. 1.38.2 The following requirements and conditions shall be included in all agreements with Contractors (and sub-Contractors) engaged by or on behalf of the Contractor and Owner. .1 Contractors acknowledge that they have read and understood the Occupational Health and Safety Act (OHS Act) and regulations, made under that statute. .2 The Contractor shall comply with all health and safety requirements established by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and regulations, the Owner and any applicable industry standards. The Contractor agrees to assume full responsibility for the enforcement of same. .3 The Contractor shall participate in a pre-project meeting to verify its full understanding of the major contractual requirements and expectations in the area of health and safety before the start of any Work. .4 The Contractor shall allow access to the Work site on demand to representatives of the Owner. .5 The Owner shall take all action necessary to support the Contractor and Trade Contractor’s health and safety efforts and to ensure that the Owner owned and controlled environments in the vicinity of the project are free from hazards. .6 The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any breach or breaches of health and safety requirements, whether by the Contractor or any of its sub-Contractors may invalidate the Contract. .7 The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any damages or fines that may be assessed against the Owner by reason of a breach or breaches of the OHS Act by Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 23 the Contractor or any of its sub-Contractors shall entitle the Owner to set off the damages so assessed against any monies that the Owner may from time to time owe the Contractor under this Contract or any other Contract what so ever. 1.38.3 Where hazardous materials, physical agents and/or designated substances are used in the performance of the required Work, the successful Contractor shall ensure that the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act and associated regulations are complied with. 1.38.4 The Contractor shall follow Workplace Hazardous Materials Information Systems (WHMIS) requirements and ensure all employees are given required training and support. 1.38.5 The Contractor agrees at all times to comply with Occupational Health and Safety Standards in the Workplace and further agrees to adhere to Health and Safety Standards set out in applicable statutes and regulations and to comply with written Health and Safety Policies of the Contractor and Owner . 1.39 Products and Workmanship 1.39.1 Do not substitute materials, equipment or methods different from that shown on Drawings and specified, without written approval of Consultant. Make application for approval of substitution to Consultant. 1.39.2 Use only materials, components and equipment which are in production. If so requested provide a precise model and shop drawings for viewing by Consultant. 1.39.3 Manufacture, pack, ship, deliver and store materials and equipment so that no damage occurs to structural and functional qualities and finished appearances. 1.39.4 Ensure that materials, while transported, stored, or installed, are not exposed to an environment which would increase their moisture content beyond the maximum specified, or in a manner detrimental to their function or appearance, or both. 1.40 Transportation and Handling of Materials 1.40.1 Schedule early deliveries of materials to enable work to be executed without delay. Before delivery, arrange for receiving at site. 1.40.2 Deliver packaged materials and equipment and store until use, with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. 1.40.3 Label packaged goods to describe contents, quantities, and other information as specified. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 24 1.41 Delivery, Storage and Protection of Materials 1.41.1 Schedule timely deliveries of materials to enable work to be executed without construction delay. Store all materials until use with all manufacturer’s seals and labels intact. 1.41.2 Store materials on site or in storage sheds with secure protection against all harmful environmental conditions. Prevent damage, adulterations, staining, and soiling of materials while stored. 1.41.3 Store manufactured materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.41.4 All damaged materials will be rejected for use and thereupon shall be immediately removed from site. 1.41.5 Note: DO NOT store any material on roofing or waterproofing which will cause damage to membrane. This applies to lumber, steel, wood cases, pipes, conduits, ductwork, insulation, concrete block or any other materials. 1.42 Anchoring Devices, and Accessories 1.42.1 In addition to requirements for fastening devices specified in the technical Sections of the Specifications, include for all fastenings, inserts, caps, closures, anchors, and accessories required for execution of work, and be entirely responsible for their installation. 1.42.2 Unless specified otherwise in the technical sections of the Specifications, use metal fastenings of same material as the metal component they are anchoring, of metal which will not set up electrolytic action which could cause damage to fastenings or components under moist conditions. In general, use watertight, non-corrosive or hot-dipped galvanized steel as exterior anchors with waterproof washers for windows, roofing, sheet metal, and anchors occurring on or in an exterior wall or slab or interior wet areas such as showers, janitors, garbage rooms or similar spaces where moisture will be present. 1.42.3 If exposed fastenings and accessories are allowed by the Documents in finished areas, use fastenings and accessories of same texture, colour and finish as base metal on which they occur. Keep such exposed fastenings and accessories to a minimum, spaced and laid out evenly and neatly and cut off to make them as inconspicuous as possible, but still provide necessary securement. 1.42.4 Install anchoring devices in such a manner as to provide positive, permanent anchorage of unit to be anchored in position. Space anchors within limits of their capacities. Select all anchoring devices to have a safety factor of 4 against failure for their design load. Anchors used at exterior walls shall be selected to resist leaks and prevent water penetration wherever possible. 1.42.5 Install fastenings of permanent type. Do not install wood plugs. 1.42.6 Fastenings which cause spelling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not permitted. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 25 1.42.7 The use of explosive power tools will not be permitted under any circumstances unless equipped with a device which positively prevents free flight of the stud. 1.43 Manufacturer’s Requirements and Instructions, Workmanship and Qualifications of Workers 1.43.1 Use competent experienced workers, thoroughly skilled in the trade in which they are performing work. 1.43.2 Obtain and follow manufacturer's written instructions, directions and specifications prior to performing the work, and follow them strictly. If instructions are not available, obtain directions from the manufacturer in writing before proceeding. The proceeding of work without this direction is the Contractor's responsibility. It is the Contractor's responsibility to conform to Code requirements in the event that manufacturer's instructions and directions conflict with the Ontario Building Code. Improper installation or erection of products, due to failure in complying with manufacturer's requirements will require removal and re-installation at no cost to Owner. 1.43.3 Be responsible for obtaining up-to-date changes in manufacturer's application procedures. 1.43.4 In the event that products specified have been discontinued advise Consultant. 1.44 Product Upgrades 1.44.1 Where upgraded or newer versions or models, of products, components and systems in this Specification, become available during the construction, the Contractor shall provide the Contractor and Consultant with a proposal to change to such upgraded or newer versions or models. Such proposals shall fully identify the effect on Contract Price, schedule, and space requirements. 1.45 Final Inspections and Close Out 1.45.1 Arrange for, conduct and document final inspections, close-out and take-over at Completion of the Contract in accordance with procedures described in OAA/OGCA TAKE-OVER PROCEDURES, Document No. 100. 1.45.2 Forty-five days prior to Substantial Performance, set up a meeting with Subcontractors and Suppliers to go over their various disciplines with the Contractor. Prior to Substantial Performance and as scheduled with the Consultant, provide instructional sessions for HVAC and refrigeration, for plumbing and drains and for electrical. At this time, one copy of the approved brochures and operating manuals and video recordings shall be given to the Owner. Instructional period shall be in as many sessions as required to properly disseminate information to Owner's technical staff. 1.46 Cleaning Requirements 1.46.1 Standards: Maintain project in accordance with the latest edition of The Occupational Health and Safety Act. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 1.46.2 1.46.3 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 26 Hazards and Dust Control .1 Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily. .2 Prevent accumulation of wastes which create hazardous conditions. .3 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and antipollution laws: .1 Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on project site. .2 Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. .3 Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. 1.46.4 Obtain from each Subcontractor, instructions which designate proper methods and materials to be use in final cleaning, and submit such instructions to Contractor. 1.46.5 Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw materials from heights. 1.46.6 Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces. 1.47 System Demonstrations 1.47.1 Demonstrate operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Performance. 1.47.2 When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems, instruct Owner's personnel, and provide written report that demonstration and instructions have been completed. 1.47.3 Submittals: 1.47.4 .1 Submit schedule of time and date for demonstration of each item of equipment and each system two weeks prior to designated dates, for Owner's approval. .2 Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstration, that demonstration and instructions have been satisfactorily completed. .3 Give time and date of each demonstration, with a list of persons present. Prior to demonstrations ensure the following has occurred: .1 Equipment has been inspected and put into operation. Project No. 0701-BS Revised and re-issued Tender June 27, 2014 SECTION 01001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 01001 - 27 .2 Testing, adjust, and balance has been performed and equipment and systems are fully operational. .3 Provide copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals for use in demonstrations and instructions. 1.47.5 Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, and maintenance of each item of equipment at agreed upon times, at the designated location. 1.47.6 Instruct personnel in all phases of operation and maintenance using operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. 1.47.7 Review contents of manual in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 1.47.8 Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions. 1.47.9 The Contractor shall record all demonstrations and instructions by means of a camcorder/digital camera. Identify each tape/digital file separately for each function. Hand tapes/digital files to Owner with printed maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 SECTION 01352 GENERAL LEED® REQUIREMENTS Page 01352 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Section includes 1.1.1 Overview of LEED requirements and procedures. 1.2 Related Sections 1.2.1 The Contractor shall assist in achieving the following LEED prerequisites and credits: Prerequisite / Credit Related Specification Section(s) SSp1: Erosion & Sedimentation Control 02370 Erosion & Sedimentation Control EAp1: Fundamental Building Systems Commissioning 01910 Commissioning EAc3: Best Practice Commissioning 01910 Commissioning MRc2: Construction Waste Management 01355 Waste Management and Disposal MRc4: Recycled Content 01611 LEED Product Requirements MRc5: Regional Materials 01611 LEED Product Requirements MRc7: Certified Wood 01611 LEED Product Requirements EQc3: Construction Indoor Air Quality Management Plan 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management EQc4: Low-Emitting Materials 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management EQc5: Indoor Chemical & Pollutant Source Control 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management 1.3 Definitions 1.3.1 LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design is a voluntary, consensus-based, marketresponsive set of criteria that evaluate project performance from a whole-building perspective. 1.3.2 CaGBC: Canada Green Building Council is a broad-based inclusive coalition of representatives from different segments of the design and building industry. The Council works to change industry standards, develop best design practices and guidelines; advocate for green buildings, and develop educational tools to support its members in implementing sustainable design and construction practices. 1.4 References 1.4.1 Canada Green Building Council. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Package: For New Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004. 1.4.2 Canada Green Building Council. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Guide Addendum: LEED Canada for New Construction & Major Renovations Version 1.0, September 2007. 1.5 Objectives Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 SECTION 01352 GENERAL LEED® REQUIREMENTS Page 01352 - 2 1.5.1 Construct a building that uses land, water, energy and material resources appropriately and efficiently and provides a safe, comfortable and productive indoor environment for building occupants in accordance with the LEED requirements. 1.5.2 To achieve certification under the LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Green Building Rating System (as amended in September 2007) administered by the Canada Green Building Council by meeting the requirements of the LEED prerequisites and credits listed in paragraph 1.2 ‘Related Sections’. .1 No single manufacturer, fabricator, or subcontractor can fulfill the total requirements for LEED certification for the project. LEED certification requires the cooperation and diligence of all project participants for a successful application and acceptance for LEED certification. .2 Failure to provide products or methods of construction contributing towards LEED prerequisites will result in the Owner achieving a Certification less than that specified or none at all. The Owner reserves the right to seek compensation where failure to achieve Certification is a result of direct neglect or misrepresentation of any material or construction method. 1.6 Description of Work 1.6.1 The site superintendent (or other individual designated by the Contractor) shall be responsible for coordinating all construction activities associated with LEED certification. 1.6.2 LEED construction activities shall include: 1.6.3 .1 Coordinating with subcontractors and ensuring the successful implementation of LEED strategies, programs and plans .2 Reporting construction activity progress to the Consultant as it relates to the LEED aspects of the Project .3 Supplying the LEED documentation and submittals outlined within this specification and related sections to the Consultant to demonstrate that LEED requirements have been met .4 Other duties as detailed in the related Sections listed in paragraph 1.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, 01710 and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.7 LEED Kick-Off Meeting 1.7.1 Prior to mobilization on-site, the Contractor shall hold a kick-off meeting with the Consultant to review the LEED requirements. This meeting shall include a review of: .1 LEED certification and performance objectives .2 LEED requirements and procedures .3 LEED documentation and submittals 1.8 LEED Coordination Meeting 1.8.1 Prior to start of construction, the Contractor (in conjunction with the Consultant) shall hold a coordination meeting with the construction team to explain the LEED requirements to the SubContractors. This meeting shall include a review of: .1 LEED certification and performance objectives .2 LEED requirements and procedures .3 LEED documentation and submittals Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 SECTION 01352 GENERAL LEED® REQUIREMENTS Page 01352 - 3 1.8.2 The Contractor shall ensure that the appropriate Sub-Contractors attend the LEED Coordination Meeting. If Sub-Contractors are unable to attend this meeting, the Contractor shall make arrangements to host additional LEED Coordination Meetings to suit. 1.9 Submittals 1.9.1 Photographs shall be provided as specified in the Sections listed in paragraph 1.2. All photos taken for LEED documentation purposes shall conform to the following requirements: .1 Resolution: High resolution digital images (1280 x 1024 or higher) .2 Date Stamp: Standard indicating YYYY-MM-DD 1.9.2 Provide all submittals required in the Sections listed in paragraph 1.2. Submittals shall be presented to the Consultant for approval. 1.9.3 The Consultant will complete all LEED Letter Templates required to document the successful completion of the prerequisites and credits listed in paragraph 1.2. The Contractor shall review, sign and submit these Templates to the Consultant as an accurate indication of the construction performance. 1.9.4 The Contractor shall ensure that all shop drawings, cut-sheets, and other product literature for all equipment deemed necessary by the Consultant, is provided to the Consultant prior to ordering. 1.9.5 The Contractor shall ensure that all Schedules are submitted complete and on time to the Consultant throughout the project. 1.9.6 The Owner reserves the right to withhold Progress Payments pending the submission of documentation or completion of actions required in the Sections listed in paragraph 1.2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1.1 Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 1.1 Not Used END OF SECTION Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 01355 Feb 07, 2014 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 01355 - 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes 1.1.1 Overview of waste management and disposal requirements and procedures. 1.2 Related Sections 1.2.1 01352 General LEED® Requirements 1.3 Definitions 1.3.1 Solid Waste: Any waste material (including land-clearing debris) that is sent from the project site to another location for disposal. 1.3.2 Land-Clearing Debris: Waste materials resulting from land-clearing that include preexisting development materials and plant matter, but do not include soil. 1.3.3 Reused Waste: Waste materials that are sent to a location off-site (e.g. another construction project or product supplier) where they are used in their original form (i.e. without additional processing). 1.3.4 Recycled Waste: Waste materials that are sent off-site to a recycling facility where they are used to displace virgin materials as feedstock for manufacturing processes that create new products. 1.3.5 Landfill Waste: Waste materials that are sent to a landfill site for disposal. 1.4 References 1.4.1 Ontario. Environmental Protection Act. Ontario Regulation 102/94: Waste Audits and Waste Reduction Workplans. 1.4.2 Ontario. Ministry of the Environment (MOE). A Guide to Waste Audits and Reduction Workplans for Construction and Demolition Projects as Required Under Ontario Regulation 102/94. 1.4.3 Ontario. Environmental Protection Act. Ontario Regulation 103/94: Industrial, Commercial and Institutional Source Separation Programs. 1.4.4 Ontario. Ministry of the Environment (MOE). A Guide to Source Separation of Recyclable Materials for Industrial, Commercial and Institutional Sectors and Multi-Unit Residential Buildings as Required Under Ontario Regulation 103/94. 1.4.5 Canadian Construction Association. Standard Construction Document CCA 27-1997: A Guide on Construction Environmental Management Planning. 1.4.6 Canadian Construction Association. Standard Construction Document CCA 81-2001: A Best Practices Guide to Solid Waste Reduction. 1.4.7 Canada. Public Works and Government Services Canada. 2002 National Construction Renovation and Demolition Non-Hazardous Solid Waste Management Protocol. 1.4.8 Canada Green Building Council. “Materials & Resources Credit 2: Construction Waste Management”. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Package: For New Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 01355 Feb 07, 2014 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 01355 - 2 1.4.9 Canada Green Building Council. “Materials & Resources Credit 2: Construction Waste Management”. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Guide Addendum: LEED Canada for New Construction & Major Renovations Version 1.0, September 2007. 1.5 Objectives 1.5.1 Minimize the amount of solid waste (including land-clearing debris) generated by construction, renovation and demolition (CRD) activities. 1.5.2 Of the inevitable solid waste (including land-clearing debris) that is generated by CRD activities, divert more than 75% from landfill (through reuse and recycling) to achieve LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 credits MRc2.1 and MRc2.2 “Construction Waste Management”. 1.5.3 Comply with all applicable Environmental Protection Act of Ontario regulations relating to construction waste management including Ontario Regulation 102/94 and Ontario Regulation 103/94. 1.5.4 Comply with Canadian Construction Association’s “Code of Practice” outlined in Standard Construction Document CCA 27-1997 to encourage improved waste management practices. 1.6 Description of Work 1.6.1 The site superintendent (or other person designated by the Contractor) shall be responsible for all aspects Waste Management and Disposal. 1.6.2 Identify, implement and document measures to achieve the waste management objectives listed above. 1.6.3 Follow a strategy based on the 3R’s hierarchy: Reduce the generation of waste materials at the project site, Reuse waste materials on other construction sites (when feasible) and Recycle waste materials as feedstock for manufacturing processes that create new products. 1.6.4 Waste Management and Disposal activities shall include: .1 Arranging waste management service agreements with waste haulers and waste receiving facilities .2 Supervising on-site waste management activities on a daily basis .3 Coordinating waste management tasks with subcontractors to ensure timely and orderly progress of the work .4 Preparing waste management documentation and submittals to summarize all shipments of waste materials from the project site .5 Reporting waste management progress to the Consultant 1.7 LEED KICK-OFF MEETING 1.7.1 Prior to mobilization on-site, the Contractor shall hold a kick-off meeting with the Consultant to review the Waste Management and Disposal requirements. This meeting shall include a review of: .1 Waste Management and Disposal objectives .2 Waste Management and Disposal requirements and procedures Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 01355 Feb 07, 2014 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .3 Page 01355 - 3 Waste Management and Disposal documentation and submittals 1.8 LEED Coordination Meeting 1.8.1 Prior to start of construction, the Contractor (in conjunction with the Consultant) shall hold a coordination meeting with the construction team to explain the Waste Management and Disposal requirements to the Sub-Contractors. This meeting shall include a review of: .1 Waste Management and Disposal objectives .2 Waste Management and Disposal requirements and procedures .3 Waste Management and Disposal documentation and submittals 1.9 Submittals 1.9.1 Schedule W1 – Proposed Receiving Facilities 1.9.2 1.9.3 .1 List the proposed receiving facilities for each material identified in paragraph Part 31.1.2.1 in additional to material sent to landfill. Indicate the material(s) that will be accepted by each facility and whether the material(s) will be reused, recycled or sent to landfill. .2 Submit completed schedule to the Consultant within 14 days after site mobilization. Schedule W2 - Waste Tracking Worksheet .1 Obtain waybills, invoices, letters and other documentation that clearly indicates the receiving facility, end use (reused, recycled or landfill) and quantity of waste for each shipment of waste generated on the project site. Record each shipment using the Waste Tracking Worksheet. .2 Submit an up-to-date copy of the Waste Tracking Worksheet and waybills, invoices, letters and other documentation to the Consultant on a monthly basis. Final Waste Diversion Report .1 Submit a final report to the Consultant (after substantial completion and prior to demobilization) that contains the final versions of the following: a. Waste Tracking Worksheet(s) b. Waybills, invoices, letters and other documentation supporting each shipment listed in the Waste Tracking Worksheet clearly indicating the types of waste, quantities of waste, end use of waste and receiving facilities. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.1 Not Used Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 01355 Feb 07, 2014 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 01355 - 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 1.1 Procedures 1.1.1 Waste Reduction .1 Encourage suppliers and subcontractors to retrieve/retain packaging (e.g. skids, plastic wrap, etc.) for reuse. a. Suppliers and sub-contractors must provide a letter stating the item(s) will be reused and documenting the quantity removed from the site. 1.1.2 .2 Prevent damage of materials due to mishandling, improper storage, and contamination. .3 Where possible, use prefabricated assemblies built at a central facility to avoid waste generation at the site. Waste Diversion .1 Contact local salvaging/recycling facilities and arrange for recycling/reuse services. At a minimum, the proposed facilities must recycle/reuse the following waste materials that will be generated throughout construction: a. Land clearing debris b. Asphalt c. Concrete / masonry / stone d. Steel and other metals e. Wood (see note below) f. Gypsum g. Cardboard h. Plastic i. “Blue Box” waste Note: Use of material as landfill cover is not considered as recycling or reuse. Material used for this purpose will have a negative impact on the LEED Construction Waste Management credit. Incineration of wood waste on or off site is not considered as a waste diversion measure. Material used for this purpose will have a negative impact on the LEED Construction Waste Management credit. Please note that burning of clean wood to generate district or industrial process heat and/or electricity is considered appropriate diversion methodology from the landfill. Recommended measures for recycling/reusing wood include encouraging suppliers to reuse wood pallets, sending wood pallets to pallet recycling companies and converting waste wood into landscaping mulch. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 01355 Feb 07, 2014 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 01355 - 5 .2 Provide the Consultant with a list of the proposed receiving facilities within 14 days after site mobilization using Schedule W1 – Proposed Receiving Facilities (as per Part 11.9.1). .3 Designate a central Waste Collection Area onsite that is dedicated to the separation and storage of all waste generated during construction. .4 Provide containers in the Waste Collection Area that are sized to accommodate the separation and storage of expected waste types and quantities. Provide separate containers for each of the following material types: a. Land clearing debris b. Asphalt c. Concrete / masonry / stone d. Steel and other metals e. Wood f. Gypsum g. Cardboard h. Plastic i. “Blue Box” waste (as per Part 31.1.2.9 ) j. Mixed waste k. Other types (as required by salvaging/ recycling facilities) .5 Clearly indicate the material type being stored in each container using appropriate signage. .6 All subcontractors shall use the containers provided in Waste Collection Area. .7 In the event that a sub-contractor is unable to use these containers, or wishes to use a waste material on future projects (e.g. rubble for road base), the subcontractor must provide waybills, invoices, letters and other documentation that clearly indicates the receiving facility, end use (reused, recycled or landfill) and quantity of waste in each shipment. .8 Follow the salvaging/recycling facilities’ material acceptance requirements to ensure materials are properly sorted, grouped, and packaged for collection. .9 Provide “Blue Box” recycling bins near the construction trailer for recycling waste generated by site workers and visitors. Waste deposited in these bins shall include the following, or adhere to the local recycling program: a. Aluminum food or beverage cans b. Glass bottles and jars for food or beverage c. PET bottles for food or beverages d. Steel food or beverage cans e. Cardboard and paper products Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 01355 Feb 07, 2014 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 1.1.3 Page 01355 - 6 Waste Tracking .1 Coordinate delivery of separated materials to approved salvage or recycling facilities. .2 Record all waste shipments using Schedule W2 - Waste Tracking Worksheet as per Part 11.9.2. .3 Retain waybills, invoices, letters and other documentation for inclusion in Final Waste Diversion Report (as per Part 11.9.3). 1.2 Inspections and Maintenance 1.2.1 Conduct daily inspections of containers to check for and remedy cross-contamination. 1.2.2 Promptly transport containers to receiving facilities when containers are full. 1.2.3 Ensure the material type is clearly labeled on each container. END OF SECTION Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 01355 Feb 07, 2014 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 01355 - 7 SCHEDULE W1 – PROPOSED RECEIVING FACILITIES (Submit to the Consultant within 14 days after site mobilization) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: At a minimum, the proposed facilities must recycle/reuse the waste materials identified in paragraph 1.1.2.1 . Proposed Receiving Facility Material Type Name Wood Formwork Wood Recycling Inc. (Waterloo, Ontario) Material End Use Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Phone Number 519-743-8697 Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Recycled/Reused Sent to Landfill Signature of Authorized Official Position Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Date Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 01355 Feb 07, 2014 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 01355 - 8 SCHEDULE W2 - WASTE TRACKING WORKSHEET (Submit most recent copy to the Consultant on a monthly basis) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: Material Type Legend Land Clearing Debris Steel and Other Metals Cardboard Mixed Waste Asphalt Wood Plastic Other (specify) # Shipment Date Material Type Ex. 2006-09-12 Gypsum Concrete / Masonry / Stone Gypsum “Blue Box” Waste Amount of Material (metric tonnes) Reused or Landfill Recycled 4.0 0.0 Receiving Facility Name Waybill Number Acme Recycling Inc. 05-1234 I hereby certify that the information provided is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Date Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 1 of 22 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.02 Overview of indoor air quality management (including product/material selection) requirements and procedures RELATED SECTIONS A. 01352 General LEED® Requirements B. 15855 Filters 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs): Organic chemicals that produce vapors readily at room temperature and normal atmospheric pressure (e.g. gasoline, solvents, etc.). VOCs react with sunlight and nitrogen to form ground-level ozone, a chemical that has detrimental effect on human health, agricultural crops, forests, soil, groundwater and ecosystems. B. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green Label: a program established by the national trade association representing the carpet and rug industry to identify carpet products that have been tested by an independent laboratory and have met the criteria for low VOC emissions. C. Urea-Formaldehyde (UF): A combination of urea and formaldehyde the readily decomposes at room temperature. It is found in some glues/resins used to manufacture furniture, composite woods (e.g. particle board), agrifiber products and laminated assemblies. UF has detrimental effect on human health and may include symptoms such as eye, nose, and throat irritation, wheezing and coughing, fatigue, skin rash and severe allergic reaction. D. Agrifiber: recovered agricultural waste fiber, from sources including but not limited to cereal straw, sugarcane bagasse, sunflower husk, walnut shells, coconut husks and agricultural prunings, that are processed and mixed with resins to produce products with characteristics similar to those derived from wood fiber. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA). IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction. First Edition, 1995 B. ASHRAE. ANSI/ASHRAE 52.2-1999: Method of Testing General Ventilation AirCleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. C. EPA. EPA Protocol for Environmental Requirements, Testing for Indoor Air Quality Baseline IAQ. D. State of California. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rules 1168. As amended June 9, 2006. E. State of California. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rules 1113. As amended January 1, 2006. F. Green Seal. Paints (GS-11). January 1997. May 20, 1993. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 2 of 22 G. Green Seal. Anti-Corrosive Paints (GC-03). January 7, 1997. H. Canada Green Building Council. “Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 3: Construction IAQ Management Plan and Credit 4: Low-Emitting Materials”. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Package: For New Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004. I. Canada Green Building Council. “Indoor Environmental Quality Credit 3: Construction IAQ Management Plan and Credit 4: Low-Emitting Materials”. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Guide Addendum: LEED Canada for New Construction & Major Renovations Version 1.0, September 2007. 1.05 OBJECTIVES A. Meet or exceed the recommended Design Approaches of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3. B. Protect construction workers and future building occupants from indoor air quality problems resulting from construction activities and building materials. C. Reduce the production and circulation of pollutants during construction. D. Protect equipment and absorptive materials stored and installed on-site from moisture, dust and dirt accumulation during construction. E. Prepare the building for occupancy following construction and prior to occupancy. 1.06 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The site superintendent (or other person designated by the Contractor) shall be responsible for all aspects of LEED coordination (during construction) related to indoor air quality management. B. Indoor air quality management activities shall include: 1. Identifying, implementing and documenting measures to achieve the indoor air quality management objectives 2. Supervising on-site indoor air quality management activities on a daily basis 3. Coordinating indoor air quality management tasks with subcontractors to ensure timely and orderly progress of the work 4. Conducting indoor air quality management inspections and making necessary repairs 5. Maintaining an indoor air quality inspection log to document observations, deficiencies and corrective actions 6. Preparing indoor air quality management documentation and submittals as detailed herein 7. Selecting products/materials that meet the requirements specified herein Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 1.07 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 3 of 22 8. Providing product and material documentation and submittals to the Consultant as detailed herein prior to ordering a product or material 9. Reporting indoor air quality management progress to the Consultant LEED KICK-OFF MEETING A. 1.08 Prior to mobilization on-site, the Contractor shall hold a kick-off meeting with the Consultant to review indoor air quality management requirements. This meeting shall include a review of: 1. Indoor air quality management objectives 2. Indoor air quality management requirements and procedures 3. Indoor air quality management documentation and submittals LEED COORDINATION MEETING A. 1.09 Prior to start of construction, the Contractor (in conjunction with the Consultant) shall hold a coordination meeting with the construction team to explain the indoor air quality management requirements to the SubContractors. This meeting shall include a review of: 1. Indoor air quality management objectives 2. Indoor air quality management requirements and procedures 3. Indoor air quality management documentation and submittals SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Schedule Q1 - Product VOC Identification 1. Complete schedule and collect supporting documentation (MSDSs, product data sheets, letter from manufacturers, etc.) to document VOC emission rates for all adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather barrier. 2. Complete schedule to document the quantities of all adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather barrier. 3. Submit completed schedules and supporting product literature to the Consultant for review at least 14 days prior to ordering. Schedule Q2 - CRI Green Label Carpet 1. Complete schedule and collect supporting documentation (letters from manufacturers, product literature, etc.) for all carpet products used in the building. 2. Submit completed schedules and supporting product literature to the Consultant for review at least 14 days prior to ordering. Schedule Q3 - No-Added Urea-Formaldehyde Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 D. Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 4 of 22 1. Complete schedule and collect supporting documentation (letters from manufacturers, product literature, etc.) for all composite wood and agrifibre products used in the building. 2. Submit completed schedules and supporting product literature to the Consultant for review at least 14 days prior to ordering. Schedule Q4 – IAQ Management Inspection Log 1. Complete the log on a weekly basis. The log shall commence when the building is enclosed and carry through to building turnover. 2. The inspection log shall be completed for each weekly inspection and must document: a. Indoor air quality management measures implemented onsite b. Deficiencies related to those measures and, c. Corrective actions taken to remedy the deficiencies E. 3. Each deficiency must be initialed and each log signed after all corrective measures have been completed and documented. 4. Submit an up-to-date copy of the IAQ Management Inspection Log to the Consultant on a monthly basis. 5. Submit a compilation of the completed logs to the Consultant after construction and prior to Contractor demobilization. Schedule Q5 - Photo Documentation Checklist 1. Provide photographs as specified in the checklist. 2. Photographs must be taken on three different occasions during construction to prove continuous compliance. 3. Photographs must be accompanied by the date taken and a description of the indoor air quality management measure depicted. 4. Coordinate with photo requirements of General LEED Requirements 01352 1.09A 5. Submit the completed checklist and accompanying photos to the Consultant after construction and prior to Contractor demobilization. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS A. All adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and fall inside the building weatherproofing system must have a VOC content less than the limits of the State of California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168. 1. The VOC content limits of SCAQMD Rule 1168 are as follows: Note: The VOC content limits listed below may be amended from time to time by their governing bodies; Green Seal and the State of California. In the event that the VOC limits listed in the tables below are higher than the VOC limits in Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 5 of 22 effect at the date of application for building permit, the VOC limits in effect at the date of application for building permit shall but used. Architectural Adhesives Category VOC Limit (grams/litre) Indoor Carpet Adhesive 50 Carpet Pad Adhesive 50 Wood Flooring Adhesive 100 Rubber Floor Adhesive 60 Subfloor Adhesive 50 Ceramic Tile Adhesive 65 VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesive 50 Drywall and Panel Adhesive 50 Cove Base Adhesive 50 Multipurpose Construction Adhesive 70 Structural Glazing Adhesive 100 Single Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive 250 Specialty Adhesives Category VOC Limit (grams/litre) PVC Welding 510 CPVC Welding 490 ABS Welding 325 Plastic Cement Welding Adhesive 250 Adhesive Primer for Plastic 550 Contact Adhesive 80 Special Purpose Contact Adhesive 250 Adhesive for Traffic Marking Tape 150 Structural Wood Member Adhesive 140 Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 6 of 22 Substrate Specific Adhesives VOC Limit Category (grams/litre) Metal to Metal Adhesive 30 Plastic Foam Adhesive 50 Porous Material (except wood) Adhesive 50 Wood Adhesive 30 Fibreglass Adhesive 80 Sealants Category VOC Limit (grams/litre) Architectural Sealant 250 Non-membrane Roof Sealant 300 Roadway Sealant 250 Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealant 450 Other Sealant 420 Sealant Primers Category B. 2.02 VOC Limit (grams/litre) Architectural, Non-Porous Sealant Primer 250 Architectural, Porous Sealant Primer 775 Modified Bituminous Sealant Primer 500 Other Sealant Primer 750 Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09A for all adhesives and sealants that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather barrier. PAINTS AND COATINGS A. All paints and coatings that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather barrier must have a VOC content less than the limits of Green Seal Standards GS-11 and GC-03 and the State of California’s South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 1. Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 7 of 22 The VOC content limits of Green Seal Standard GS-11 are as follows: Paints VOC Limit Category (grams/litre) Interior Coatings, Non-Flat 150 Interior Coatings, Flat 2. 50 The VOC content limits of Green Seal Standard GC-03 are as follows: Anti-Corrosive Paints VOC Limit Category (grams/litre) Anti-Corrosive Paint, Gloss 250 Anti-Corrosive Paint, Semi-Gloss 250 Anti-Corrosive Paint, Flat 250 3. The VOC content limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113 are as follows: Coatings Category VOC Limit (grams/litre) Bond Breaker 350 Clear Wood Finish, Varnish 275 Clear Wood Finish, Sanding Sealer 275 Clear Wood Finish, Lacquer 275 Clear Brushing Lacquer 275 Concrete-Curing Compound 100 Dry-Fog 150 Flat Coating 100 Floor Coating 50 Graphic Arts (sign) Coating 500 Industrial Maintenance Coating 100 High Temperature Industrial Maintenance Coating 420 Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Coating 100 Japans/Faux Finishing Coating 350 Magnesite Cement Coating 450 Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Mastic Coating 300 Metallic Pigmented Coating 500 Multi-Colour Coating 250 Non-Flat Coating 50 Pigmented Lacquer 275 Pre-Treatment Wash Primers 420 Primer, Sealer and Undercoating 100 Quick-Dry Enamel 50 Quick-Dry Primer, Sealer and Undercoating 100 Recycled Coating 250 Roof Coating B. Page 8 of 22 50 Roof Coating, Aluminum 100 Roof Primer, Bituminous 350 Rust Preventative Coating 100 Shellac, Clear 730 Shellac, Pigmented 550 Specialty Primer 100 Stains 100 Stains, Interior 250 Swimming Pool Coating, Repair 340 Swimming Pool Coating, Other 340 Traffic Coating 100 Waterproofing Sealer 100 Waterproofing Concrete/Masonry Sealer 100 Wood Preservative, Below-Ground 350 Wood Preservative, Other 350 Low-Solids Coating 120 Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09A for all paints and coatings that are applied onsite and fall within the building weather barrier. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 2.03 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 9 of 22 CARPET A. All carpet systems must meet or exceed the requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute’s (CRI) Green Label Indoor Air Quality Test Program. B. The maximum allowable carpet emissions of the CRI Green Label program are as follows: 1. Carpet Criteria Maximum Emission Factor (measured in mg/m²·h) Total Volatile Organic Compounds 0.50 4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene) 0.05 Formaldehyde (to prove that none is used) 0.05 Styrene 0.40 2. Cushion Criteria Maximum Emission Factor (measured in mg/m²·h) Total Volatile Organic Compounds 1.00 BHT (butylated hydroxytoluene) 0.30 Formaldehyde 0.05 4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene) 0.05 3. Adhesive Criteria Maximum Emission Factor (measured in mg/m²·h) Total Volatile Organic Compounds C. 2.04 10.00 Formaldehyde 0.05 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol 3.00 Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09B for all carpet systems used in the building. COMPOSITE WOOD AND AGRIFIBRE A. All composite wood and/or agrifibre products (including core materials) used in the building must not contain added urea-formaldehyde. B. Composite wood products used as or to construct products listed in Section 01611, Paragraph 2.03 must also be FSC Certified. C. Adhesives used to fabricate laminated assemblies used in the building that contain composite wood and/or agrifibre products must not contain added urea-formaldehyde. D. The requirements of paragraph A and C apply to all products/materials used in the building regardless of whether they are manufactured on or off site. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 E. 2.05 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 10 of 22 Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09C for all composite wood and agrifibre products used in the building. FILTRATION MEDIA REQUIREMENTS A. Air filter MERV (minimum efficiency reporting value) ratings shall be determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999. B. Air handling equipment not used during construction: C. 1. Filters in 100% outdoor air and recirculating systems with flow rates more than 283 L/s (600 cfm) must have a MERV-13 rating. 2. Filters in 100% outdoor air and recirculating systems with flow rates less than 283 L/s (600 cfm) must have the highest supply air filtration level commercially available for the specific equipment. 3. Fan units that provide no outdoor air or serve only a single zone are exempt from filtration requirements above. Air handling equipment used during construction: 1. Filters in 100% outdoor air and recirculating systems with flow rates more than 283 L/s (600 cfm) must have a MERV-13 rating. 2. Filters in 100% outdoor air and recirculating systems with flow rates less than 283 L/s (600 cfm) must have the highest supply air filtration level commercially available for the specific equipment. 3. Fan units that provide no outdoor air or serve only a single zone are exempt from filtration requirements above. 4. Install new filters with a MERV = 8 (or higher) at all return/exhaust grilles/inlets before any HVAC system is operated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 POLLUTANT SOURCE IDENTIFICATION A. Identify potential sources of indoor air pollutants on the construction site. 1. Any construction activity or material that produces odour and/or dust is considered a source of air pollutants. Pollutant sources include, but are not limited to: a. Materials that produce detectable odour: paints coatings grouts stains adhesives epoxy flooring sealants caulking solvents pesticides fuels cleaning products Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 11 of 22 b. Materials that create dust: concrete products drywall wood products acoustic ceiling tile insulation ceramic tile c. Equipment that emit products of combustion or create odour and/or dust: generators compressors cutting tools/saws torches/welders vehicles portable heaters d. Construction activities that disrupt pollutants: demolition repair renovation standing water tobacco smoke e. Other: exterior site work 3.02 MINIMIZE POLLUTANTS A. Minimize pollutants generated inside the building from the sources identified under article 3.01 using the following measures: 1. Prohibiting smoking inside the building at all times during construction 2. Fuelling up equipment outside the building 3. Storing gasoline or solvents outside the building 4. Restricting outdoor vehicular/equipment traffic and operation where emissions can enter the building 5. Reducing on-site emissions by using equipment that burns propane/natural gas or is powered by electricity 6. Exhausting pollutant sources directly outside using temporary or permanent ventilation equipment. Where exhaust is not feasible, locally re-circulate air through a portable air cleaner. 7. Collecting and bagging sawdust from woodworking tools 8. Covering and/or sealing all indoor sources of odour and dust 9. Using painting techniques that minimize odour (e.g roller instead of spraying) 10. Using cleaning practices that minimize dust (e.g. vacuum instead of sweeping) 11. Using cleaning products that minimize pollution, fumes, VOC’s, etc. 12. Prohibiting the burning of garbage Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 3.03 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 12 of 22 POLLUTANT CONTAINMENT MEASURES A. Prevent the movement of pollutants from the sources identified under article 3.01 to other areas in the building using the following measures: 1. When possible, perform pollutant generating activities outside the building. 2. Move equipment, work and other pollutant sources to locations where they will have the minimum impact on indoor air quality. 3. Setup small, contained, designated work areas to contain pollutants: a. Avoid open areas and areas with high drafts b. Erect dust curtains and barriers c. Depressurize areas using temporary or permanent ventilation equipment 3.04 4. Use portable fans to exhaust pollutants (e.g. gas engine exhaust) to the exterior through windows, doors, etc. Ensure that adjacent windows, doors, etc. will not allow pollutants to re-enter the building. 5. Close windows and doors adjacent to pollutant sources (e.g. dust, vehicle emissions, etc.) outside of the building. If windows and doors have not been installed, temporarily seal exterior openings with plastic, wood, etc. 6. Pressurize occupied or completed areas of the building using temporary or permanent ventilation equipment. HOUSEKEEPING MEASURES A. Prevent the accumulation of moisture, dust and dirt in the building from the sources identified under article 3.01 using the following measures: 1. Frequently cleaning interior surfaces to minimize dust and dirt accumulation by: a. Dusting with damp rags b. Wet mopping c. Sweeping using wetting agents and sweeping compounds d. Vacuuming with equipment that contains HEPA filtration and/or a wet scrubber Note: Localized cleaning should occur immediately after a construction activity is completed and/or at the end of each day. A full building cleanup must be performed at least once a week. 2. Close exterior windows and doors or create temporary enclosures using plastic or wood to prevent moisture accumulation indoors. 3. Immediately remove any water accumulated indoors to protect interior surfaces and materials. 4. Cover, seal and protect materials stored and installed on-site from moisture, dust and dirt accumulation. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 3.05 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 13 of 22 5. Elevate materials stored on-site off the ground to protect from moisture and dirt accumulation. 6. Do not install materials with evidence of moisture damage or excessive moisture accumulation. 7. If necessary, use ventilation/dehumidification to control humidity levels within the building. 8. Promptly clean all spills (fuels, lubricants, paints, adhesives, etc.). 9. Clean or remove excess application of solvent-containing products. HVAC PROTECTION MEASURES A. B. During/Before Installation 1. Cover (with plastic) and elevate (off ground) all ductwork, fittings, insulation, acoustic lining and equipment stored on site during construction. 2. Seal all supply, return and exhaust openings as well as all temporary ductwork openings not under immediate work (e.g. open ends in ductwork runs) with plastic. Openings must be sealed immediately after installation in areas that will no longer be under work. 3. Close/cover all hatches and access doors in HVAC equipment that will not be under work. 4. Seal all HVAC equipment openings (e.g. inlets/outlets of air handlers, fans, VAV boxes, etc.) with plastic until ductwork is connected. 5. Do not use mechanical rooms to store or collect construction waste materials. 6. Install ceiling tiles and seal all openings into the plenum with plastic prior to final cleaning. After Installation (select Option 1 or Option 2 for each HVAC system) 1. Do not use mechanical rooms to store or collect construction waste materials. 2. Option 1: HVAC Equipment Not Used During Construction (Recommended) a. Do not operate any permanent HVAC equipment or systems during construction. b. Seal all openings in HVAC systems, ductwork and plenums as described in paragraph 3.05A above. c. If an HVAC system protection measures are not implemented, or if the system is operated during construction, the Contractor must provide duct cleaning services, plus all necessary access doors, at no extra cost to the contract. d. After all construction and final cleaning work is complete the Contractor shall: 1) Remove all HVAC protection measures Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 3. Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 14 of 22 2) Install new filters in all air handling equipment as per paragraph 2.05 3) Start-up systems 4) Prepare systems for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor and Commissioning Agent. Option 2: HVAC Equipment Used During Construction a. Install new filters in all air handling equipment as per paragraph 2.05 before any HVAC system is operated. Provide a duct-mounted filter (external to equipment) if necessary. b. Install new filters with a MERV = 8 (or higher) as per 2.05A at all return/exhaust grilles/inlets before any HVAC system is operated. c. Temporarily shut down the return/exhaust side of HVAC systems during heavy construction/demolition. d. Permanently close off the return/exhaust side of HVAC systems in areas with high dust levels. Cover duct openings with plastic in these areas. e. If an HVAC system is operated without the above protection measures in place, the Contractor must provide duct cleaning services, plus all necessary access doors, at no extra cost to the contract. f. 3.06 After all construction and final cleaning work is complete the Contractor shall: 1) Remove all temporary filters installed on return all grilles. 2) Install new filters in all air handling equipment as per paragraph 2.05 3) Prepare systems for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Contractor and Commissioning Agent. INDOOR AIR QUALITY PRIOR TO OCCUPANCY One of the following options (A. Building Flush-Out Prior to Occupancy, B. Building Flush-Out Overlapping with Occupancy, C. IAQ Testing Prior to Occupancy) shall be completed prior to Occupancy. 1. After all construction, final cleaning and Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work is complete, and prior to building occupancy, conduct a building flush-out by: a. Supplying a total air volume of 4,300 m3 of outdoor air per m2 (or 14,100 ft3 per ft2) of floor area, b. Maintaining a temperature of at least 16oC (60oF) and, c. Where mechanical cooling is operated, maintaining a relative humidity no higher than 60%. Note: The estimated time required to carry-out the building flush-out is 14-21 days. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 B. Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 15 of 22 2. Perform all corrective work related to general deficiencies, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, and Commissioning prior to commencing the building flush-out. 3. Install new filters in all air handling equipment as per paragraph 2.05 prior to commencing the building flush-out. 4. Replace all filtration media in air handling equipment with new filters as per paragraph 2.05 after the building flush-out and immediately prior to occupancy. Filtration media is to be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. Building Flush-Out Overlapping with Occupancy 1. After all construction, final cleaning and Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work is complete, and prior to building occupancy, conduct a building flush-out by: a. Supplying a total air volume of 1,075 m3 of outdoor air per m2 (or 3,530 ft3 per ft2) of floor area, b. Maintaining a temperature of at least 16oC (60oF) and, c. Where mechanical cooling is operated, maintaining a relative humidity no higher than 60%. Note: The time required to carry-out the building flush-out is to be confirmed by the Consultant. 2. After the building is occupied, continue the building flush-out by: a. Supplying outside air at a minimum rate of 0.76 L/s/m2 (0.15 cfm/ft2) for at least 3 hours prior to each time the building is occupied, b. Supplying outside air at the greater of 0.76 L/s/m2 (0.15 cfm/ft2) or the design minimum outside air supply during times when the building is occupied and, c. Continuing the flush-out process described in the subparagraphs 1 and 2 until 3,225 m3 of outdoor air per m2 (or 10,570 ft3 per ft2) has been supplied to the building. 3. Perform all corrective work related to general deficiencies, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, and Commissioning prior to commencing the building flush-out. 4. Install new filters in all air handling equipment as per paragraph 2.05 prior to commencing the building flush-out. 5. Replace all filtration media in air handling equipment with new filters as per paragraph 2.05 after the building flush-out and immediately prior to occupancy. Filtration media is to be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 C. Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 16 of 22 IAQ Testing Prior to Occupancy 1. Indoor air quality testing will be carried out by and at the expense of the Contractor. 2. The Contractor shall allow 3 days after all construction and final cleaning work is complete and prior to building occupancy for the Consultant to conduct indoor air quality testing. 3. The Contractor shall perform all corrective work related to general deficiencies, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, and Commissioning prior to indoor air quality testing. 4. In order for IAQ Testing to be deemed complete, the test results must demonstrate that the air samples taken at all required locations are not above the limits established in the table below: Contaminant Maximum Concentration Particulate Matter (PM10) 50 ug/m3 Formaldehyde 50 parts per billion Total Volatile Organic Compounds 500 ug/m3 Carbon Monoxide 9 PPM and no greater than 2 PPM above outdoors 4-Pheycyclohexene (4-PC)* 6.5 ug/m3 * Required only if carpets with Styrene Butadiene (SB) latex backing material are installed 3.07 5. All testing shall be carried out using the testing protocols consistent with the United States Environmental Protection Agency “Compendium of Methods of the Determination of Air Pollutants in Indoor Air”. 6. All testing shall be carried out according to the requirements published on pages 371 and 372 of the LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Package: For New Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004. 7. The number of test locations required shall be determined according to the requirements published on pages 371 and 372 of the LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Package: For New Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004. 8. In the event that the test results exceed the limits established in the table above, the Contractor is responsible for taking remedial actions as recommended by the Consultant or testing agent and for scheduling and retesting for any contaminant concentrations that were exceeded. This process shall be repeated until all requirements have been met. All addition work and re-testing is to be carried out at the expense of the Contractor. 9. Upon successful completion of IAQ testing, the Contractor must provide the Consultant with a copy of the IAQ testing results indicating the locations tested and the contaminant concentration readings at each location. SCHEDULING Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 17 of 22 A. Schedule construction activities to minimize the amount of VOC’s, odours and fumes absorbed by porous materials (e.g. ceiling tiles, carpet, etc.). B. Complete applications of wet and odorous materials such as paints, sealants, and coatings before installing absorbent “sink” materials such as ceiling tiles, carpets, and fabric-covered furnishings. C. Allow for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing to be carried out following construction and before occupancy (refer to HVAC Protection Measures). D. Allow for corrective work related to general deficiencies, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, and Commissioning to be carried out following construction and before occupancy. 3.08 INSPECTIONS AND MAINTENANCE A. B. 3.09 The Contractor shall inspect all indoor air quality management measures and remedy any deficiencies on a weekly basis. 1. Inspections shall be recorded in the IAQ Management Inspection Log (see article 1.09D) and shall denote the measures implemented at the time of inspection, any deficiencies as well as corrective actions taken. 2. Provide photos as specified by article 1.09E at various occasions during construction to prove continuous compliance. All Pollutant Containment, Housekeeping and HVAC protection measures will be reviewed by the Consultant during each site visit. 1. All deficiencies identified by the Consultant must be remedied and documented in the IAQ Management Inspection Log within 48 hours of notification. 2. The Contractor shall clean or replace any equipment or materials that is incorrectly stored or improperly protected at no extra cost to the contract. REMOVAL OF PROTECTION MEASURES A. All products/materials installed as a part of indoor air quality management measures shall be removed prior to building turnover. Any remedial work required as a result of removing the measures is the responsibility of the Contractor. END OF SECTION Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 18 of 22 SCHEDULE Q1 - PRODUCT VOC IDENTIFICATION (Submit to Consultant 14 days prior to ordering product/material) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to certify the following information: (Complete the following table for adhesives, sealants, paints and coatings that are applied onsite and that fall within the building weather barrier) Product & Manufacturer Ex. Duct Master by Caulk Canada Description Mastic Duct Sealant VOC Content Quantity Used (grams/litre) (litres) 35 50 Attached Supporting Documentation MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter I hereby certify that the information provided above is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Date Volatile Organic Compound (VOC): Organic chemicals that produce vapors readily at room temperature and normal atmospheric pressure (e.g. gasoline, solvents, etc.). VOCs react with sunlight and nitrogen to form groundlevel ozone, a chemical that has detrimental effect on human health, agricultural crops, forests, soil, groundwater and ecosystems. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 19 of 22 SCHEDULE Q2 - CRI GREEN LABEL CARPET (Submit to Consultant 14 days prior to ordering carpet) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to certify that the following carpet products meet or exceed the CRI Green Label requirements: Product Ex. Greenline Modular Tile Manufacturer "Green Label" Product Identification Number Attached Supporting Documentation Canada Carpet Ltd. 13795278 Product Literature Manufacturer Letter Product Literature Manufacturer Letter Product Literature Manufacturer Letter Product Literature Manufacturer Letter Product Literature Manufacturer Letter Product Literature Manufacturer Letter I hereby certify that the information provided above is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Date Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green Label: a program established by the national trade association representing the carpet and rug industry to identify carpet products that have been tested by an independent laboratory and have met the criteria for low VOC emissions. (www.carpet-rug.org) Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 20 of 22 SCHEDULE Q3 - NO-ADDED UREA-FORMALDEHYDE (Submit to Consultant 14 days prior to ordering product/material) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to certify that the following composite wood and agrifibre products do not contain added urea-formaldehyde: Product Ex. EnviroBoard Attached Supporting Documentation Manufacturer EcoForest Canada MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter MSDS Product Data Sheet Manufacturer Letter I hereby certify that the information provided above is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Date Urea-Formaldehyde (UF): A combination of urea and formaldehyde the readily decomposes at room temperature. It is found in some glues/resins used to manufacture furniture, composite woods (e.g. particle board), agrifiber products and laminated assemblies. UF has detrimental effect on human health and may include symptoms such as eye, nose, and throat irritation, wheezing and coughing, fatigue, skin rash and severe allergic reaction. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 21 of 22 SCHEDULE Q4 – IAQ MANAGEMENT INSPECTION LOG (Complete Weekly. Submit most recent copy to the Consultant on a monthly basis) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: IAQ Management Measures Date Ex. Currently Implemented Sept 17/06 Dust curtain and HVAC pressurization protecting finished offices on 2nd floor. Corrective Action Taken Deficiencies Standing water present adjacent to sprinkler room in basement Water removed. Adjacent materials were not damaged Initials G.L. I hereby certify that the information provided is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Date Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01359 Indoor Air Quality Management Page 22 of 22 SCHEDULE Q5 - PHOTO DOCUMENTATION CHECKLIST (Submit with photos to Consultant after construction and prior to demobilization) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: Indoor Air Quality Management Measure Date of Photo #1 #2 #3 N/A Tobacco smoke prohibited inside the building (signage) Gasoline and solvents stored outside the building Outdoor equipment restricted around building (signage) Electric, propane or natural gas powered equipment Pollutant sources exhausted to outside Portable air cleaner used to filter air in work areas Sawdust from wood working tools collected and bagged Indoor sources of odour and dust covered/sealed Painting techniques used to minimize odour Temporary dust curtains and barriers Designated cutting and work areas Materials covered, sealed and protected Materials stored elevated off the ground Building sealed from the exterior environment Wetting agents, sweeping compounds, wet rags/mops Vacuuming with HEPA filtration and/or wet scrubber Ventilation/dehumidification to remove moisture Protecting stored ductwork, lining, insulation & fittings Scheduled construction activities Openings in ducts sealed w/ plastic Openings & hatches in HVAC equip. sealed w/ plastic Supply, return and exhaust openings sealed w/ plastic Ceiling plenum openings sealed w/ plastic Ceiling tiles installed prior to final cleaning I hereby certify that the information provided is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Date Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Page 1 of 11 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.02 Overview of product/material selection requirements and procedures. RELATED SECTIONS A. 01352 General LEED Requirements B. Division 2 – Sitework C. Division 3 – Concrete D. Division 4 – Masonry E. Division 5 – Steel and Metals F. Division 6 – Carpentry G. Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection H. Division 8 – Windows and Doors I. Division 9 – Interior Finishes J. Division 10 – Specialty Items 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Recycled Content: the percentage (by mass) of constituents that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either after the manufacturing process (post-industrial) or after consumer use (postconsumer) and as further defined as follows: 1. Post-Consumer Recycled Content: the percentage (by mass) of recycled material that is derived from previously used consumer products (e.g., aluminum and steel cans, glass and plastic bottles, asphalt from parking lots, gypsum from drywall etc.). 2. Pre-Consumer Recycled Content: the percentage (by mass) of recycled material that is derived from outside industrial sources (i.e., in-house process recycling of production scrap is not included). Examples include sawmill dust used in MDF board, blast furnace slag used in mineral wool insulation, and coal fly ash used in concrete mixes. Pre-Consumer Recycled Content is also referred to as Post-Industrial Recycled Content. 3. In-House Process Recycled Content: the percentage (by mass) of in-house material (i.e. trimmings, cutoffs, and scrap) that is returned to the production process as a part of internal housekeeping. B. Manufacturing Location: the last point that a product or material is processed or assembled (e.g., a sawmill that turns harvested trees into framing lumber which is then used on-site). C. Extraction Location: the point(s) of origin (e.g. quarry, recycling plant, etc.) for ≥80% (by mass) of the material transported to the Manufacturing Location to create a product or material (e.g., if 80% of the mass of a concrete batch is aggregate, the extraction location for the concrete is the gravel pit where the aggregate was obtained). Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Page 2 of 11 D. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC): FSC is an international not-for-profit membership-based organization geared to find solutions to the problems created by bad forestry practices and to reward good forest management. E. Rapidly Renewable: materials that grow or regenerate in less than 10 years, (e.g., wheat, straw, cork, some softwood lumber, cotton, etc.) 1.04 REFERENCES A. Canada Green Building Council. “Materials & Resources” credits. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Package: For New Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004. B. Canada Green Building Council. “Materials & Resources” credits. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Guide Addendum: LEED Canada for New Construction & Major Renovations Version 1.0, September 2007. 1.05 OBJECTIVES A. To minimize the ecological footprint of the building by specifically selecting materials that conserve raw and non-renewable resources. B. To minimize the amount of energy expended in the transportation of materials to the site through intentional sourcing of regional materials. C. To document the Materials and Resources Credits under the LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Green Building Rating System administered by the Canada Green Building Council for the purpose of LEED Certification. 1.06 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The site superintendent (or other person designated by the Contractor) shall be responsible for all aspects of LEED coordination (during construction) related to the selection and sourcing of products/materials. B. Product/material selection activities shall include: 1.07 1. Preparing an itemized list of all materials that will be used in Divisions 2 through 10 2. Coordinating with the subcontractors to select products and materials that meet the requirements specified herein 3. Providing product and material documentation and submittals to the Consultant as detailed herein prior to ordering a product or material 4. Providing material costs (sub-contractor cost excluding labour and equipment) to the Consultant for LEED material credit calculations 5. Reporting product/material selection progress to the Consultant LEED KICK-OFF MEETING A. Prior to mobilization on-site, the Contractor shall hold a kick-off meeting with the Consultant to review the product/material selection and documentation requirements. This meeting shall include a review of: 1. Product/material selection objectives 2. Product/material selection requirements and procedures 3. Product/material selection documentation and submittals Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 1.08 Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Page 3 of 11 LEED COORDINATION MEETING A. 1.09 Prior to start of construction, the Contractor (in conjunction with the Consultant) shall hold a coordination meeting with the construction team to explain the product/material selection and documentation requirements to the Sub-Contractors. This meeting shall include a review of: 1. Product/material selection objectives 2. Product/material selection requirements and procedures 3. Product/material selection documentation and submittals SUBMITTALS A. B. Schedule P1 - Recycled and Regional Content 1. Complete schedule and collect supporting documentation (letters from suppliers, product literature, etc.) for all products/materials listed in articles 2.01 and 0 of this Section and requested by the Consultant. 2. Submit completed schedules and supporting product literature to the Consultant for review at least 14 days prior to ordering. Schedule P2 – Concrete Mix Design 1. Complete schedule listing all concrete mix designs as well as indicating concrete strengths after 28 days, amount of Portland cement used, and whether the mix is air entrained. 2. Submit completed schedules to the Consultant for all concrete mix designs after the Structural Engineer has approved the designs, and prior to delivery of any concrete to the site. Note: As an alternative to completing Schedule P2, a letter signed by the concrete supplier/manufacturer will be accepted that states the reduction in Portland cement. This can be provided as a total reduction in Portland cement for all concrete used on the project. If this compliance path is used, the documentation must be produced in accordance with The Ready Mix Concrete Association Ontario Technical Bulletin T-030. C. D. E. Schedule P3 - Material Cost 1. Complete schedule by providing individual material costs (excluding labour and equipment) for all products/materials in divisions 2 through 10 (and 11 through 14 if deemed necessary by the Consultant) that contribute to meeting LEED requirements specified in Part 2 of this Section. 2. Submit completed schedules to the Consultant after all of the materials have been purchased and prior to Subcontractor demobilization. Schedule P4 - Concrete Cost 1. Complete schedule by listing all concrete mix designs, amount of concrete by mix, cost of the concrete and cost of formwork. 2. Submit completed schedules to the Consultant after all concrete has been delivered to site and prior to Contractor demobilization. Schedule P5 - FSC Certified Wood Content Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 F. Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Page 4 of 11 1. Complete schedule and collect supporting documentation (vendor invoices, letters from suppliers, product literature, etc.) for the products/materials listed in clause 2.03 of this Section to clearly demonstrate they meet FSC certification requirements. 2. Submit completed schedules and supporting product literature to the Consultant for review at least 14 days prior to ordering. Total Construction Cost 1. Submit the total construction cost associated with divisions 2 through 10 (and 11 through 14 if deemed necessary by the Consultant) to the Consultant upon project completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RECYCLED CONTENT A. Select products/materials that contain recycled content and that fall within divisions 2 through 10 (and 11 through 14 if deemed necessary by the Consultant). B. At a minimum, the following materials shall include recycled content: Target Recycled Content Values (by mass) Min. PostMin. PreCombined* Consumer Consumer Material Engineered Fill 25% 10% 30.0% Asphalt 20% 0% 20.0% 0% 25% N/A 0% 25% N/A 30% 65% 62.5% 0% 25% N/A 0% 80% N/A Structural Steel 25% 40% 45.0% Steel Deck, Roofing and Siding 20% 25% 32.5% 25% 5% 27.5% 0% 90% 45.0% 60% 0% 60.0% Mineral Wool Insulation 0% 40% 20.0% Gypsum (interior) 5% 90% 50.0% Concrete (% SCM Content in Cement) Precast Concrete Products (% SCM Content in Cement) Concrete Reinforcement Masonry (% SCM Content in Cement) Masonry - Light Weight or Acoustic (% slag content in aggregate) Light Steel Framing (Steel Studs) Composite Wood (MDF, Particle Board) Fiberglass Insulation Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Page 5 of 11 Ceramic Tile (Wall) 0% 35% 17.5% Ceramic Tile (Floor) 0% 30% 15.0% Acoustic Ceiling Tile 5% 40% 25.0% 90% 0% 90.0% 0% 25% 12.5% 60% 5% 62.5% Linoleum 0% 35% 17.5% Carpet 5% 30% 20.0% Suspended Ceiling T-Grid (Aluminum) Suspended Ceiling T-Grid (Steel) Rubber Flooring *If the minimum Post-Consumer and Pre-Consumer recycled content values cannot both be met for a product or material, the Combined recycled content value can be used. The Combined recycled content for a product can be calculated using the equation: Combined Recycled Content (%) C. 2.02 = 1.0 x Post-Consumer Recycled Content (%) + 0.5 x Pre-Consumer Recycled Content (%) Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09A and Error! Reference source not found. for each product/material listed above. REGIONAL CONTENT A. B. Select products/materials that are extracted and manufactured locally and that fall within divisions 2 through 10 (and 11 through 14 if deemed necessary by the Consultant). 1. Products/materials transported by truck: To qualify as a regional product/material, at least 80% (by mass) must be manufactured and/or extracted within 800 km of the site (straight-line distance). 2. Products/materials transported by rail or water: To qualify as a regional product/material, at least 80% (by mass) must be manufactured and/or extracted within 2,400 km of the site (straight-line distance). At a minimum, the following materials shall be of regional content: 1. Landscaping Material 2. Asphalt 3. Concrete 4. Granular Material 5. Concrete Reinforcement 6. Masonry 7. Structural Steel 8. Steel Deck, Roofing and Siding 9. Light Steel Framing (Steel Studs) Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Page 6 of 11 10. Light Steel Framing 11. Fiberglass Insulation 12. Mineral Wool Insulation 13. Gypsum 14. Acoustic Ceiling Tile 15. Carpet C. 2.03 Submit supporting documentation as per 1.09A and Error! Reference source not found. for each product/material listed above. FSC CERTIFIED WOOD A. At least 50% (by cost) of all permanent wood based products/materials used for the project must be FSC Certified. Temporary construction applications such as bracing, concrete formwork, and pedestrian barriers are excluded from this requirement. B. In addition to the above requirement, all composite wood products (e.g. plywood, particleboard, MDF, OSB) must not contain added ureaformaldehyde. Refer to Section 01359, Paragraph 2.04. C. Products/materials to target include: D. 2.04 1. Framing (e.g. trusses, decking, beams, studs, joists, etc.) 2. Panel products (e.g. plywood, particle board, etc.) 3. Millwork (e.g. cabinetry, trim, baseboards, etc.) 4. Doors (including cores, rails, and stiles) 5. Hardwood flooring 6. Furniture 7. Elevator Finishes (i.e. panels) Submit supporting documentation as per1.09E for each FSC Certified wood product/material. SUBSTITUTIONS/ALTERNATES A. Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED Material credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. B. When proposing a substitution/alternate, the Contractor must submit the applicable schedules described in article 1.09. PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Page 7 of 11 SCHEDULE P1 - RECYCLED AND REGIONAL CONTENT (Submit to Consultant 14 days prior to ordering product/material) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to certify the following information: % Recycled Content (by mass) Product & Manufacturer Ex. Tegular ACT by Ceiling Tile Ltd. Description PostConsumer PreConsumer In-House 5% 50% 0% Mineral Fibre Lay-in Acoustic Ceiling Tile This product was manufactured and extracted at the following locations: Manufacturing Location City Ex. Kitchener Prov. /State Postal Code ON N2K 3S2 Extraction Location Mode of Transport Truck Rail Ship Truck Rail Ship City Prov. /State Postal Code Hamilton ON N3M 6K4 Mode of Transport Truck Rail Ship Truck Rail Ship I hereby certify that the information provided above is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Date Post-Consumer Recycled Content: % (by mass) of recycled material derived from previously used consumer products (e.g., aluminum cans, glass and plastic bottles, asphalt from parking lots, gypsum from drywall, etc.) Pre-Consumer Recycled Content: % (by mass) of recycled material derived from outside industrial sources (e.g., sawmill dust in MDF board, blast furnace slag in mineral wool insulation, coal fly ash in concrete mixes, etc.) In-House Process Recycled Content: % (by mass) of in-house material (i.e. trimmings, cutoffs, and scrap) that is returned to the production process as a part of internal housekeeping Manufacturing Location: the last point that a product or material is processed or assembled (e.g., a sawmill that turns harvested trees into framing lumber) Extraction Location: point(s) of origin (e.g. quarry, recycling facility, etc.) for ≥80% (by mass) of the material transported to the Manufacturing Location to create a product or material (e.g., if 80% of the mass of a concrete batch is aggregate, the extraction location for the concrete is the gravel pit where the aggregate was obtained) Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Page 8 of 11 Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Page 9 of 11 Schedule P3 – Material Cost (Submit to Consultant after purchasing materials and prior to demobilization) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to provide the following material costs for the products/materials listed below: Product Ex. Tegular ACT Description Manufacturer Material Cost (excluding labour and equipment) Mineral Fibre Lay-in Acoustic Ceiling Tile Ceiling Tile Ltd. $50,000 I hereby certify that the information provided above is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Date Note: Material costs will be used to complete calculations required to achieve the Materials Credits under LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0. All costs provided in this schedule will be kept in strict confidence by the Consultant and the Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC) and will in no way be made available to the public. To submit this schedule directly to the Consultant, please send a fax to (519) 743-8778. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Page 10 of 11 SCHEDULE P4 - CONCRETE COST (Submit to Consultant after concrete is delivered to site and prior to demobilization) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to certify the following information for the concrete mixes used on this project: Mix Number Volume Used (m3) Concrete Supply Cost Cost of All Forming Materials I hereby certify that the information provided above is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Date Note: Concrete costs will be used to complete calculations required to achieve the Materials Credits under LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0. All costs provided in this schedule will be kept in strict confidence by the Consultant and the Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC) and will in no way be made available to the public. To submit this schedule directly to the Consultant, please send a fax to (519) 743-8778. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01611 LEED® Product Requirements Page 11 of 11 SCHEDULE P5 - FSC CERTIFIED WOOD CONTENT (Submit to Consultant 14 days prior to ordering product/material) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: For the purposes of LEED documentation, I am pleased to certify the following information: Product & Manufacturer Ex. EcoDor by Doors’R’Us Description FSC Chain-ofCustody Certification Number % FSC Wood Content (by volume) % PostConsumer Recycled Wood Fiber Content (by cost) Man door w/ FSC stave-core and veneer SCS-COC12345 75% 0% These wood products meet the requirements for the Forest Stewardship Councils (FSC) Principals and Criteria and FSC Cain-of-Custody Standard (FSC-STD-40-004), and comply with the documentation requirements included within those standards. I hereby certify that the information provided above is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Date Post-Consumer Recycled Content: % (by mass) of recycled material derived from previously used consumer products (e.g., aluminum cans, glass and plastic bottles, asphalt from parking lots, gypsum from drywall, etc.) Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01710 COMMISSIONING Page 1 of 9 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Applicability .1 1.2 The work in this section lays out the responsibilities and the work required of the: .1 General contractor or Construction Manager .2 Mechanical contractor .3 Electrical Contractor .4 Controls contractor .5 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor .6 Other contractors providing services under the requirements of this contract as may be noted in this or other related parts of the specifications DESCRIPTION .1 Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems installed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, manufacturer’s requirements and good industry practice. Commissioning also ensures that equipment operates and performs, in and of itself as well as in the system, as was intended by the designers in response to the owner’s requirements. Finally commissioning ensures the owner has the documentation and training required to operate the equipment and systems in a safe, efficient and long lasting manner. .1 During the construction phase, commissioning will include the following specific activities: .1 Review of shop drawings for commissionable mechanical and electrical equipment and systems at the same time as the design engineers. Comments from the Commissioning Agent (CxA) will be given to the design engineers to incorporate into their review as appropriate. Contractors will respond to the comments from the engineer of record. .2 Verify equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and industry accepted standards including review of completed manufacturers’ start-up sheets, supplemented where required with commissioning installation verification checklists provided by the CxA. Contractor shall complete check sheets as required by the CxA .3 Verify equipment is set-up, adjusted and balanced to perform as specified. This will include review of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) procedures, review of TAB reports and spot checking measurements on site. The TAB contractor shall cooperate with the CxA providing information requested and tools and manpower for spot checking measurements as required by the CxA. .4 Functional Performance Testing (FPT) of mechanical and electrical equipment and systems to ensure proper, complete and efficient operation under the range of conditions they are expected to encounter. Contractors shall provide manpower, tools and other services as required by the CxA to perform the FPT .5 CxA will review O&M documentation provided to the owner to ensure it is complete and acceptable for ongoing operation and maintenance of the equipment. The review shall be sent to the consultant for incorporation with Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01710 COMMISSIONING Page 2 of 9 his comments. The Contractors shall provide changes as required by the Engineer. .6 .2 1.3 The CxA will witness the Owner’s operating personnel training to verify it was adequate and complete to ensure they fully understand the requirements of operating and maintaining the equipment. Contractors shall ensure training meets the approval of the CxA and provide additional training if requested. Commissioning does not take away from, reduce responsibility of or in any way diminish the requirement for system designers and installing contractors to provide a complete, finished and fully functioning product. COORDINATION .1 Commissioning Team. The following contractors will be required to participate in commissioning and to assist the commissioning team with verification, testing and documentation preparation: .2 .1 General Contractor (GC or Contractor) .2 Construction Manager (CM) .3 Mechanical Contractor (MC) .4 Electrical Contractor (EC) .5 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing contractor (TAB) .6 Controls Contractor (CC) .7 Contractors installing insulation, windows and doors, air barrier or other building shell components. .8 Any other installing Subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. Other members of the commissioning team include: .1 Commissioning Agent (CxA) .2 Owner’s Project Manager (PM) .3 Designated representative of the owner’s Operations and Maintenance personnel (O&M) .4 Architect and Design Engineers - particularly the mechanical and electrical engineers (A/M/E) .2 Management: Contractors shall cooperate fully with the CxA who will be the Owner’s representative for commissioning during all commissioning activities. Contractors shall work together and with the other members of the commissioning team as required to fulfil their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of commissioning. .3 Scheduling: The GC/CM will work with the CxA to schedule the commissioning activities required of contractors and subcontractors. All parties will address scheduling problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning process. The CxA will provide the initial schedule of primary commissioning events at the commissioning scoping meeting. As construction progresses more detailed schedules may be developed by the GC/CM. The GC/CM shall be responsible for ensuring that the mechanical, electrical, and controls sub-contractors will return to the building approximately 10 months after the start of the warrantee period to review system operation and to address operational issues. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 1.4 1.5 Section 01710 COMMISSIONING Page 3 of 9 RELATED SECTIONS .1 Mechanical – General Provisions Section 15010 .2 Mechanical – Energy Management Control System Section 15900 .3 Mechanical – Testing, Adjusting & Balancing Section 15950 .4 Electrical – General Provisions Section 16010 .5 Electrical – Luminaire Construction and Installation Section 16504 RESPONSIBILITIES .1 .2 Mechanical Contractor: .1 Attend initial commissioning coordination meeting. .2 Provide a complete set of all submittals for mechanical equipment for the CxA .3 Provide complete equipment and systems start-up including personnel and tools, as required for safe, proper and complete start-up of all mechanical equipment. .4 Perform installation verification, start-up and complete required documentation as directed by CxA. .5 Correct all deficiencies found during installation verification, start-up and TAB to ensure that all equipment and systems are fully functional and ready for functional performance testing. .6 Prepare O&M manuals and supplementary information on all equipment as directed by CxA and assemble in binders tabbed and indexed. Supplementary information may include, but is not limited to, such items as power/control field wiring diagrams, equipment maintenance schedule, vendor and maintenance contact lists. Submit to CxA when requested. .7 Prepare preliminary schedule for O&M manuals submission, owner training, pipe and duct system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, and TAB for use by the CxA. Update schedule throughout the construction period. .8 Notify CxA a minimum of two weeks in advance of equipment and system start-up and/or installation verification testing. .9 Set-up and schedule vendors and contractors required to participate in the owner training sessions for all equipment and systems. .10 Provide a complete set of as-built record drawings and schematics, include a copy to the CxA. .11 Return to site with the GC/CM, O&M and CxA approximately 10 months after the start of the warrantee period to review system operation and to address operational issues. TAB Contractor(s) .1 Attend initial commissioning coordination meeting. .2 Submit TAB procedures to CxA and Mechanical Consultant for review and acceptance. .3 Provide a preliminary TAB report showing that the system is complete and capable of being balanced. Provide an additional copy of the preliminary report labelled “For CxA”. .4 Attend TAB review meeting scheduled by the CxA. Be prepared to discuss procedures that shall be followed in TAB and findings of preliminary TAB. .5 Submittal of final TAB report showing all flows, pressures, motor speeds, voltages and amperages etc., as required for a full and complete balancing report on all Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01710 COMMISSIONING Page 4 of 9 systems. Provide an additional copy of the TAB final report labelled “For CxA”, and include as-built distribution systems schematics. .6 .3 .4 Participate in verification of the TAB report, which includes of repeating selected measurement contained in the TAB report where required by the CxA for verification or diagnostic purposes. Building Controls and Automation System Contractor(s) .1 Attend initial commissioning coordination meeting. .2 Attend Sequence of Operation and Graphics review meeting scheduled by the CxA. Be prepared to discuss all sequences including all changes, and provide a schematic for each proposed graphic. .3 Provide the following submittals to the CxA at time of FPT. (Note: The following shall be updated to as-built conditions). .1 Hardware and software submittals and shop drawings. .2 Narrative description of each control sequence for each piece of equipment or system controlled. .3 Point-to-point and sensor calibration verification checklists .4 As-built diagrams showing all control points, sensor locations, point names, actuators, controllers and, where necessary, points of access, superimposed on diagrams of the physical equipment. .5 Printout of panel layouts including all analog input, analog output, digital input, and digital output connections. Provide a separate list for each stand alone control unit. .6 Printout of final control programming algorithms, include current values of all parameters for each system point. .7 Owners operation and maintenance manuals. .4 Provide complete training to operating personnel on hardware, operation and programming, and the application program for the system. .5 Demonstrate system performance to CxA. including all modes of system operation. (e.g. normal, abnormal, emergency). .6 Provide control system technician to operate systems as required by and under the direction of the CxA during system verification and functional performance testing. .7 Provide support and coordination with TAB contractor on all interfaces between their scopes of work. Provide all devices, such as portable operators’ terminals, for TAB use in completing TAB procedures. .8 Provide any trend logs as may be required by the CxA. .9 Return to site with the GC/CM, O&M and CxA approximately 10 months after the start of the warrantee period to review system operation and to address operational issues. Electrical Contractor .1 Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA. .2 Provide a complete set of all submittals for electrical equipment to the CxA .3 Provide a copy of the electrical Coordination Study. .4 Correct all deficiencies found during Installation Verification Inspection (IVI), startup, TAB and FPT to ensure all equipment and systems are fully functional and in complete and proper working order. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 1.6 Section 01710 COMMISSIONING Page 5 of 9 .5 Prior to occupancy, but following the completion of all changes, certify that all protection devices have been checked and reset to conform to the Coordination Study settings. .6 Participate in the verification of all protective device settings. .7 Prepare O&M manuals and supplementary information on all equipment as directed by CxA and assemble in binders tabbed and indexed. Supplementary information may include, but is not limited to, such items as power/control field wiring diagrams, equipment maintenance schedule, vendor and maintenance contact lists. Submit to CxA when requested. .8 Provide electrical system technicians to assist during system verification and functional performance testing as required by the CxA. .9 Provide a complete set of as-built record drawings and schematics with a copy to the CxA. .10 Return to site with the GC and CxA approximately 10 months after the start of the warrantee period to review system operation and to address operational issues. EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED .1 Systems to be commissioned under this part are primarily associated with HVAC for the building and central plant but do not include process or special purpose equipment such as: .1 life safety systems such as fire alarm, sprinkler, fire pumps .2 security systems such as card readers, automatic door locks, CC cameras .3 Communication systems such as data, paging and telephone systems .4 specialty equipment such as kitchen cooking and refrigeration equipment, medical gas, elevators, laboratory equipment, etc. but scope does include exhaust hoods and fans .5 Plumbing piping systems such as drainage and storm water management but scope does include booster pumps, hot water generation, cistern pumping and control systems for these .2 All major mechanical equipment and their controls will be commissioned using a series of installation verification and functional checks. Equipment to be commissioned during the course of this project includes but is not limited to: .1 Building Automation System (Controls System) .2 Domestic Water Heaters .3 Air Handling Units .4 Heat/Energy Recovery Ventilators .5 Pumps .6 Exhaust Fans .7 Unit Heaters, Cabinet Unit Heaters .8 Fan Coil Units .9 Range Hood .10 Lighting Control .11 Heat Exchangers .12 Piping Systems .13 Ducting Systems .14 VFDs Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 Section 01710 COMMISSIONING Page 6 of 9 Other major equipment as may be included in construction but may have been left off of this list will also be required to be included in commissioning. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT .1 All standard testing equipment required to perform start-up and installation verification and required functional performance testing shall be provided by the division contractor for the equipment being tested. .2 Special test equipment, tools or instruments required by the contract documents shall be provided for commissioning and shall be left on site. .3 All testing equipment shall have had a certified calibration, traceable to a national standard, performed within the past year. If not otherwise noted, temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have an accuracy of ± 0.1F, pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of ± 1.0% for each range available on the instrument (not the full range of the meter). All equipment shall be re-calibrated when dropped or damaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MEETINGS .1 Commissioning Meetings: Soon after construction commences, the CxA will conduct an initial commissioning scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team in attendance. Commissioning requirements, procedures, responsibilities and schedule will be reviewed. Other commissioning meetings will be conducted as required throughout construction. These meetings will cover coordination, deficiency resolution and planning issues with particular Contractors and Subs. 3.2 SUBMITTALS .1 Division 15 and 16 Contractors and Subs shall supply one (1) copy of all shop drawings marked “for CxA” to the CxA at the same time as provided to other designers for review, including all controls and shop drawings and narrative description of each control sequence for each piece of equipment or system controlled. .2 Contractors and Subs shall comply with specific requests for submittal documentation from the CxA in a timely fashion to ensure commissioning work continues as scheduled. At a minimum, the request will include the manufacturer’s printed installation and startup procedures, O&M data and manuals, final shop drawings, power and control field wiring drawings, sequences of operation, and results of required tests. .3 Final completion of the O&M manuals including all required submittals is the responsibility of the Contractor. The CxA will review and forward comments to the engineer of record for follow-up. .4 TAB contractor shall supply an extra copy of the preliminary and the final TAB report marked “for CxA” for review. The CxA will review and forward comments to the engineer of record for follow-up. .5 Contractor shall provide an extra set of O&M manuals, as built drawings and field power wiring diagrams to the CxA. The CxA will review and forward comments to the engineer of record for follow-up. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 3.3 3.5 Page 7 of 9 START-UP AND INSTALLATION VERIFICATION CHECKS .1 The installing Contractor or Sub-contractor shall be responsible for performing and documenting start-up based on manufacturer’s requirements and/or good industry practice. They shall perform all required procedures and checks and document the results. Start-up documents as requested by the CxA shall be provided. .2 Controls and Sensor Point-to-Point Checks. Control system point-to-point checks and calibration checks for all sensors shall be included as part of installation verification. The results shall be documented and provided to CxA. .3 Execution of Start-up and Installation Verification (IV/S-U). .4 3.4 Section 01710 COMMISSIONING .1 IV/S-U checklists shall be developed and provided by CxA. Where appropriate manufacturers checklists and procedures shall be combined or accepted in lieu of CxAs checklists. .2 The contractor, sub-contractor, manufacturer’s rep or supplier shall perform IV/SU. They shall complete the checklist on each piece of equipment. IV/S-U shall be successfully completed prior to any FPT. .3 At his sole discretion the CxA shall observe, recheck or verify the IV/S-U documentation of any or all equipment. The contractor shall cooperate with and provide support to the CxA as requested. .4 Only individuals with direct knowledge of and who personally witnessed any IV/SU shall sign off the checklists. .5 It will be the responsibility of the contractor to remedy all deficiencies found. Retesting by the contractor may be required to demonstrate corrections have been made. Deficiencies, Non-Conformance and Approval of IV/S-U Checklists. .1 Dates for remedy of deficiencies shall be provided to the CxA with the initial IV/SU documents. .2 The CxA will work with all parties as required to affect proper corrective measures, correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. .3 Items left incomplete or not properly corrected, causing delays or multiple callbacks for retest may result in back-charges to the party at fault. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING (TAB) .1 A preliminary TAB balancing shall be done prior to final balancing. System deficiencies requiring correction prior to final TAB shall be documented. .2 All deficiencies shall be corrected by the contractor prior to final balancing. .3 Participate in repeating selected measurement as required by the CxA for verification or diagnostic purposes. FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING (FPT) .1 In general, functional performance testing is conducted after IV/S-U have been satisfactorily completed, the control system is fully operational, and TAB is complete. .2 The installing Contractor or Sub-contractor, under the direction of the CA, shall execute all FPT and shall maintain responsibility for all equipment tested. .3 In general, each system shall be operated through all modes of operation (seasonal, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part-load, full-load). Proper responses to such modes and emergency conditions (e.g., power failure, freeze condition, no flow, equipment failure, etc.) shall be verified. Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 3.6 Section 01710 COMMISSIONING Page 8 of 9 .4 FPT verification may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system’s trend log capabilities or by stand-alone data loggers. The CxA will determine which method is most appropriate. .5 The CxA will schedule FPTs through the GC/CM and affected Contractors and Subs. .6 Corrections of minor deficiencies identified during FPT may be made by the Contractor or Sub during the tests. .7 Where a deficiency cannot be corrected immediately, the Contractor or Sub shall provide a reasonable timeline for correction. The CxA shall document the deficiency and reschedule the FPT. .8 Where there is a dispute regarding whether a problem is a deficiency or who is responsible, the deficiency shall be documented and resolution attempted by parties in attendance. Final acceptance of proposed resolution lies with the Owner or designated representative. .9 The burden of responsibility to solve and correct deficiencies lies with the A/M/E, manufacturers, vendors, GC/CM, Contractors, and Subs. The CxA may recommend solutions to problems in consultation with these parties. .10 Cost of Retesting: .1 If the Contractor or Sub is responsible for a deficiency then they shall carry the cost to rework the deficiency and complete the IV/S-U or FPT. .2 The CxA will direct the first retesting of the equipment at no charge. .3 If corrections of deficiencies have been reported to be successfully completed but are determined during testing to be faulty or otherwise incomplete, the time for the CxA to direct second or subsequent retests will be charged back. TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL .1 The contractor supplying each piece of equipment shall be responsible for providing complete and satisfactory training on that piece of equipment. Training may be performed by the contractor, supplier, manufacturer or others as the contractor may decide best able to provide that training. .2 Owner personnel shall be provided with completed O&M Manuals at least 1 week prior to training. In addition, up to five (5) copies of the related maintenance booklet and wiring as-builts shall be provided to owner personnel for the purpose of training. .3 The GC shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately for ensuring that training is completed. The CxA shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of training for all commissioned equipment. .4 Basic training for each piece of equipment shall include the following items at a minimum: .1 General description of the system and its operation (Design Intent) .2 Detailed itemization and identification of major components and access to same .3 Detailed itemization and identification of operating controls and safeties including normal and abnormal sensor readings .4 Review of the O&M manuals for identification of service requirements, procedures, wiring diagrams, parts identification, safety procedures, etc. .5 Review of system drawings and schematics .6 Review of control drawings and schematics .7 Operational review for Project No. 0701-BS Feb 07, 2014 3.7 .1 Start-up .2 Normal operation .3 Shut down .4 Unoccupied operation .5 Seasonal changeover .6 Manual operation .7 Controls set-up and programming .8 Troubleshooting and alarms Page 9 of 9 .8 Interactions with other systems .9 Adjustments and optimizing methods for energy conservation .10 Health and safety issues .11 Regular maintenance requirements including frequency, parts and equipment, and tools needed, replacement parts sources .12 Special maintenance needs .13 Tenant interaction issues .14 Discussion of environmentally responsible system features .15 Identification of contacts for service support and maintenance parts DEFERRED TESTING .1 3.8 Section 01710 COMMISSIONING If any check or test cannot be completed due to weather conditions, the building structure, required occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of IV/S-U and/or FPT may be delayed upon approval of the Owner. POST-OCCUPANCY REVIEW .1 The CxA, GC/CM, mechanical, electrical, and controls sub-contractors shall return to the building approximately 10 months after the start of the warranty period to review system operation, owner concerns, unresolved deficiencies or warranty issues and to address any outstanding operational issues. .2 The exact date and time of this meeting is to be coordinated by the CxA. .3 CxA will provide site report to the consultants and owner for review, acceptance and formal issue to the appropriate parties. END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION FOR NEW WORK Page 02050 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Work Included in Section 1.3.1 Various demolition and removals shown/noted on Drawings. 1.3.2 Restoration of damaged or disturbed work. 1.3.3 Removal of surplus materials from the site. 1.4 Referenced Standards 1.4.1 CSA S350-M1980 (R2003) 1.5 Existing Conditions 1.5.1 Take over structures to be demolished based on their condition on date that tender is accepted. 1.6 Survey of Existing Concrete Slabs and Drains 1.6.1 The elevation levels at the top of the existing Parking Garage at intervals of half of the typical grid (approximately 4250), and at the corners of all protrusions, upturned or raised slabs, roof drain locations, existing top and bottom of ramp walls on Bay Street (locations to be confirmed by Consultant) and elevations of the bases of all trees to remain shall be measured by the Contractor's surveyor, recorded and submitted to the Consultant for review. Do not set any building or paving levels until the Consultant has responded to the survey submission. Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION FOR NEW WORK Page 02050 - 2 1.7 Demolition Drawings 1.7.1 Where required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit for approval, drawings, diagrams or details showing sequence of disassembly work and supporting structures and underpinning. 1.7.2 Submissions to bear stamp of qualified professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. 1.8 Quality Assurance 1.8.1 Comply with all applicable municipal regulations, the Occupational Health and Safety Act 1991 and Regulations for Construction Projects and the Ontario Building Code. 1.8.2 Provide all shoring, bracing, or other measures necessary to prevent accidental collapse of any part of existing building, and take all necessary measures to prevent damage to adjacent areas including parking garage. 1.8.3 Complete all measures required by the authority having jurisdiction for the enclosure of the site and protection of the public before the work of demolition is commenced. 1.8.4 Conspicuously post danger signs around the property. Close off with barricades all doorways and thoroughfares giving access to the area of demolition. 1.8.5 Requirements specified herein shall be considered the minimum requirements; be responsible for providing and performing things required and necessary to complete the work, in a safe, proper and workmanlike manner. 1.8.6 A competent foreman shall be in charge of the work at all times while work is in progress. 1.9 Maintaining Traffic 1.9.1 Maintain and preserve Owner's access requirements to and from existing areas including parking garage where demolition and removal work is being carried out. 1.9.2 Do not close, obstruct, place or store material in Owner's driveways and passageways. Conduct operations with minimum interference with roads, streets, driveways and passageways. 1.10 Hauling Operations 1.10.1 Haul and move machines, vehicles and equipment over designated route and within work areas as designated by Consultant. 1.10.2 Maintain roadways and paving in the hauling areas clean on a daily basis and as required by Municipal authorities. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION FOR NEW WORK Page 02050 - 3 1.11 Interruptions To Owner's Operations 1.11.1 There will be absolutely no interruptions to Owners operations in adjoining areas permitted. Therefore, it is imperative that operations and machine and equipment movements, deliveries and removals are executed at time or times that will permit uninterrupted Owner's operations around building(s), including parking, deliveries and site access and egress. 1.11.2 There can be no noise or odour producing activity within the Parking Garage from lunch time 12:00 noon until 2:00 pm. 1.11.3 The Square and/or Parking Garage may be shut down with little warning for a few days in the event of an unscheduled major event, without penalty from the Contractor. 1.12 Protection 1.12.1 Protect work to remain against damage of any kind. Repair or replace damaged work at the discretion of Consultant, at no cost to Owner. 1.12.2 Protect existing duress stations against damage during the Work of this Section. Duress stations shall remain connected and in working order through duration of Work. Protect existing plaza pavers and garage roof waterproofing membrane against damage from operations under this Section, including lifting, moving, rolling, etc., of materials. Use 13 mm thick plywood covers with ends mechanically joined, over floor for any such handling. Over roof, provide 19 mm thick plywood underlaid with 25 mm thick polystyrene insulation board adhered to same. Be responsible for repairs to building floor (garage roof) for any damage caused. Execute such repairs to the satisfaction of, and at no cost to Owner. 1.12.3 Prevent movement, settlement or damage of adjacent structures, services, walks, paving, trees, landscaping, adjacent grades, parts of existing building to remain. Provide bracing, Take precautions to support affected structures and, if safety of building being demolished or adjacent structures or services appears to be endangered, cease operations and notify shoring and underpinning as required. Make good any damage caused by demolition beyond scope of Work. 1.12.4 Prevent debris from blocking surface drainage system, elevators, mechanical and electrical systems which must remain in operation. 1.12.5 Pay particular attention to prevention of fire and elimination of fire hazards that would endanger the work or adjacent buildings and premises. 1.12.6 Provide and maintain necessary fire extinguishers throughout the work at all times to the approval of the Fire Marshal, and located at convenient and accessible points. 1.12.7 Do work required to maintain such services, including preparation of sketches, detail scheduling of such work and coordinating and obtaining approval of Consultant. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION FOR NEW WORK Page 02050 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 Temporary Wood Studs: Construction Grade Spruce. 2.1.2 Polyethylene Sheet: 0.152 mm (6 mil.), thick, clear, stapled in place. 2.1.3 Plywood: Douglas Fir plywood. 13mm thick over floor., 19mm thick over roof. 2.1.4 Insulation: 25 mm thick polystyrene insulation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Temporary Partitions and Screens 3.1.1 Dustproof Partitions (At parking garage): Before any work proceeds in any particular area in the existing building, temporarily enclose the area and access thereto, with light stud and clean polyethylene sheet material, overlapped 100 mm and taped at floor, ceiling, walls or intersecting members, in a manner to prevent dust and dirt infiltration into the adjoining areas to the satisfaction of Consultant. Take every possible precaution to prevent dust and dirt resulting from the contract operations from entering Owner's operational areas. Adjust and relocate such partitions as required for the various operations under the contract. 3.1.2 Weather Protection .1 Provide weather protection screens similar to above in areas where existing building interior is exposed to the elements. .2 Provide protection in the form of tarpaulins, plywood or polyethylene for temporary roof and wall openings and other exposed areas such as during removal of windows, doors or parapets, equipment to be relocated, etc., before final construction is in place. 3.2 Demolition 3.2.1 Safety Code .1 3.2.2 Blasting operations are not permitted during demolition. Preparation .1 Disconnect and re-route electrical and telephone service lines entering buildings to be demolished in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. Post warning signs on electrical lines and equipment which must remain energized to serve other properties during period of demolition. Project No. 0701-BS .2 3.2.3 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION FOR NEW WORK Page 02050 - 5 Disconnect and cap designated mechanical services in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction. .1 Natural gas supply lines: to be removed by gas company. .2 Sewer and water lines: remove to property line. .3 Other underground services: remove and dispose of as indicated. .3 Do not disrupt active or energized utilities traversing premises or designated to remain undisturbed. .4 Employ rodent and vermin exterminators to comply with health regulations. Selective Demolition .1 Demolish existing items as indicated on drawings. .2 At end of each day's work, leave work in safe condition so that no part is in danger of toppling or falling. Protect interiors of parts not to be demolished from exterior elements at all times. .3 Demolish to minimize dusting. Keep materials wetted as directed by Consultant. .4 Demolish masonry and concrete walls in pieces not larger than 2 m2. .5 Remove structural framing. .6 Do not sell or burn materials on site. .7 Remove contaminated or dangerous materials as defined by authorities having jurisdiction, relating to environmental protection, from site and dispose of in safe manner to minimize danger at site or during disposal. 3.3 Materials To Be Reused 3.3.1 As listed below and where indicated on Drawings to be removed and stored for future use by Owner, or for later reuse by other trades of this Contract, remove, handle and transport such items to storage area designated on Drawings or to an area within the site designated by Consultant. Perform such work carefully and with diligence to prevent any damage to the items during removal and in storage. 3.3.2 Following is a listing and description of elements to be removed and stored or reused: .1 3.4 Cutting Items as requested by Owner. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION FOR NEW WORK Page 02050 - 6 3.4.1 Perform required cutting using power operated cutting devices. Chipping will not be allowed. Breaking out shall commence only after sawcutting of the cut-off points has been performed in order to prevent damage to remainder. 3.4.2 Demolish masonry and concrete in small sections. 3.4.3 Coordinate with mechanical trade and sawcut and breakout existing floor or wall to accommodate new mechanical piping or conduit. Have mechanical trade lay out and supervise work. 3.5 Disposal of Materials, Rubble and Debris 3.5.1 Surplus Materials 3.5.2 3.5.3 .1 Materials forming permanent part of the building that require removal become Contractor's property and must be removed from site daily, unless such materials are otherwise specified or shown on Drawings to be reused under this Contract or turned over to Consultant. Remove materials not suitable for reuse as specified or as shown on Drawings from site. .2 Stockpiling of surplus materials on site will not be permitted. Waste and Debris .1 Waste and debris resulting from execution of the work shall be cleaned up as they are generated. Dispose of same at end each day's work or place in waste disposal bins which must be emptied on a regular basis. Stockpiling of waste and debris will not be permitted. .2 Do not burn material on site. Demolition and Excavation Dust Control Plan: Submit demolition and excavation dust control plan for consultant review and approval. The Demolition and Excavation Dust Control Plan should identify measures that will be taken to control dust during demolition, related soil excavation or during soil remediation/excavation activities and should include the following as applicable: .1 The daily, or more frequently if required, wetting of all soft and hard surfaces and any excavation face on the site, with the addition of approved dust repressant, if required. .2 The daily cleaning of the road pavement and sidewalks for the entire frontage of the demolition area to a distance of 25 metres from the hoarding. .3 The designation of truck loading points to avoid trucks tracking potentially contaminated soil and demolition debris off the site. Such loading points should be Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION FOR NEW WORK Page 02050 - 7 on a gravel base to minimize tracking of the soil onto the sidewalk and the street. If the loading point becomes contaminated it should be cleaned and replaced. .4 All trucks and vans leaving the site should be cleaned of all loose soil and dust from demolition debris including the washing of tires and sweeping or washing of exteriors and tailgates by a designated labourer. A daily log of each truck leaving the site should be kept noting when the truck was cleaned and by whom. .5 Tarping all trucks leaving the site which have been loaded with indigenous soil or demolition debris. .6 An air monitoring program, if necessary, as determined through consultation with the Environmental Protection Offices of the City of Toronto. .7 Supervision of the dust control measures by a qualified environmental consultant if necessary, as determined by consultation with the Environmental Protection Offices of the City of Toronto. 3.6 Cleaning-Up 3.6.1 Leave building in a "broom-clean" condition on completion of work to Consultant's satisfaction. * * * END OF SECTION Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 STRUCTURAL ALTERATIONS Section 02060 Page 1 of 2 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 WORK INCLUDED .1 Provide labour, materials and equipment necessary to perform structural alterations indicated or noted on the drawings or in the specifications including: i. Verification of field conditions and dimensions. ii. Design of shoring and needling and associated bracing along with necessary foundations thereto as required to safely install new structural members. iii. Temporary shoring, needling and associated bracing and, where necessary, jacking of existing work and removal thereof as required to safely install new structural members. 1.2 RESPONSIBILITY .1 Be responsible for all damage arising out of the work of the Contract and for all damage to adjacent private or public property. Make good damages caused in the performance of this contract to the satisfaction of the Consultant. .2 Review of shoring and needling design drawings by the Consultant shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for carrying out the work in a manner which ensures the complete safety of the existing work, persons and adjacent property and also ensures that no damage occurs thereto, during any period of the alterations. 1.3 GENERAL .1 The drawings governing alterations to existing structural work were prepared using the following assumptions: i. The existing structure is built in accordance with the original contract documents, significant details of which have been reproduced on the drawings. ii. The workmanship and materials employed on the existing buildings were of good quality and the building has not deteriorated significantly. iii. Bearing walls, structural steel, and structural concrete is reasonably true and plumb. EXAMINATION .1 Examine the site and buildings on it. Establish conditions under which the work is to be done, and accept the premises as found upon taking possession of the property. The Owner will make no allowance for conditions that were apparent at the time of submission of tender. Direct all inquiries to the Consultant. 1.4 1.5 .2 Before proceeding with alterations to structural members, verify that the assumptions described above are correct. Should the assumptions described above not be correct notify the Consultant immediately. The Consultant will determine revisions necessary to the work as shown. The Contractor shall provide the necessary assistance to enable the consultant to determine the extent of the revisions necessary. .3 Investigate the existing building to determine actual field conditions, take field dimensions, ascertain loads and forces to be supported or resisted, probe structural bearing members to determine soundness and perform other inspection necessary to carry out design of shoring, needling, bracing and the like, to schedule the sequence of operations, and prepare shop drawings and details. DESIGN .1 Design shoring, bracing, needling, scaffolding, and the like, along with the necessary foundations in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code, so that loads applied to them will be safely carried. Superimposed live loads, construction loads and wind loads shall be taken into account and the lateral stability of the elements supported and the shoring and needling shall be insured. Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 1.6 STRUCTURAL ALTERATIONS Section 02060 Page 2 of 2 .2 The members requiring shoring or needling, the elements to be altered, the general sequence of operations, and in some circumstances the type of needling and shoring, are shown. These general requirements shall govern the design. .3 The design of shoring, needling and foundations thereto and the sequence of their installation and the sequence of the work shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer registered in the province of Ontario. .4 Prepare design of shoring, and the like, in co-operation with other trades so that new work may be installed as required. .5 Prepare and submit to the Consultant sepia drawings fully describing the shoring, needling, bracing and scaffolding work, the sequence of their installation and removal and the sequence of alterations. Submit calculations to the Consultant if he so requires. .6 The Professional Engineer employed to design the shoring, bracing, needling and the like shall also be employed to fully supervise their installation and removal and shall submit weekly reports to the Consultant regarding these phases of the work. WORKMANSHIP .1 Concrete, grouting, formwork and reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of CAN/CSA-A23.1-04. .2 Structural steel shall conform to the requirements of CAN3-S16.1. .3 Structural timber framing shall conform to CSA Standard 086. .4 Carry out shoring and needling by means of jacking, wedging or by other suitable means so that load is transferred to the shoring and needling without damaging the work supported. Ensure that over-wedging does not damage the work. END OF SECTION 02060 Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 1 of 13 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.02 Overview of erosion and sedimentation control requirements and procedures. RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.03 01352 General LEED® Requirements REFERENCES A. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Water. “Chapter 3: Sediment and Erosion Control” and Chapter 4: Other Controls”. Document No. EPA 832R-92-005 Storm Water Management for Construction Activities. 1992. B. Canada Green Building Council. “Sustainable Sites Prerequisite 1: Erosion & Sedimentation Control”. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Package: For New Construction & Major Renovations LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0, December 2004. C. Canada Green Building Council. “Sustainable Sites Prerequisite 1: Erosion & Sedimentation Control”. LEED Green Building Rating System Reference Guide Addendum: LEED Canada for New Construction & Major Renovations Version 1.0, September 2007. 1.04 OBJECTIVES A. Prevent the loss of soil from the construction site resulting from storm water runoff, wind erosion, and construction activities. B. Prevent the sedimentation of storm sewers and receiving waters. C. Prevent air pollution caused by dust and particulate matter. D. Meet or exceed the requirements of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Sustainable Sites Prerequisite 1 “Erosion & Sedimentation Control” which specifies compliance with EPA832/R-92-005 (September 1992), Storm Water Management for Construction Activities, Chapter 3, or local erosion and sedimentation control standards and codes, whichever is more stringent. 1.05 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The site superintendent (or other person designated by the Contractor) shall be responsible for all aspects of LEED coordination (during construction) related to erosion and sedimentation control. B. Erosion and sedimentation control activities shall include: 1. Implementing erosion and sedimentation control measures shown on the drawings and described in this Section 2. Installing erosion and sedimentation control products in accordance with manufacturer instructions and the prescribed installation procedures in the referenced EPA document 3. Supervising on site erosion and sedimentation control activities on a daily basis Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 1.06 Page 2 of 13 4. Coordinating erosion and sedimentation control tasks with subcontractors to ensure timely and orderly progress of the work 5. Conducting erosion and sedimentation control inspections and making necessary repairs 6. Maintaining an erosion and sedimentation control inspection log to document observations, deficiencies and corrective actions 7. Preparing erosion and sedimentation control documentation and submittals as detailed herein 8. Reporting erosion and sedimentation control progress to the Consultant LEED KICK-OFF MEETING A. 1.07 Prior to mobilization on-site, the Contractor shall hold a kick-off meeting with the Consultant to review erosion and sedimentation control requirements. This meeting shall include a review of: 1. Erosion and sedimentation control objectives 2. Erosion and sedimentation control requirements and procedures 3. Erosion and sedimentation control documentation and submittals SUBMITTALS A. Schedule E1 – ESC Inspection and Photograph Checklist 1. Using the checklist for reference, conduct an inspection of all erosion and sedimentation control measures implemented onsite each week and following any significant storm event (0.5 inches of precipitation or greater). 2. Inspections shall commence when the site is “disturbed” (i.e. when site work begins) and carry through until final landscaping is complete. 3. Provide a minimum of 3 digital photographs of each ESC measure implemented on-site. Record the date each photograph was taken in the checklist. Photographs are required at the following occasions: a. Immediately following installation, b. In-situ and, c. At the end of construction or prior to removal, whichever comes first B. 4. Coordinate with photo requirements of General LEED Requirements 01352 1.09A 5. Submit the completed checklist and accompanying photos to the Consultant after construction and prior to Contractor demobilization. Schedule E2 – ESC Inspection Log 1. Complete the log on a weekly basis. The log shall commence when the site is “disturbed” (i.e. when site work begins) and carry through until final landscaping is complete. 2. The inspection log shall be completed for each inspection and must document: Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 3 of 13 a. Deficiencies related to the measures listed in Schedule E1 – ESC Inspection and Photograph Checklist and, b. Corrective actions taken to remedy the deficiencies 3. Each deficiency must be initialed and each log signed after all corrective measures have been completed and documented. 4. Submit an up-to-date copy of the ESC Inspection Log to the Consultant on a monthly basis. 5. Submit a compilation of the completed logs to the Consultant after construction and prior to Contractor demobilization. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROCEDURES A. B. Installation 1. Install erosion and sedimentation control products as per this Section. 2. Install erosion and sedimentation control products in accordance with manufacturer instructions and the prescribed installation procedures in the referenced EPA document. General Practices 1. Site Arrangement a. All construction trailers and equipment shall be positioned to reduce the disturbance of the site. They shall be located close to the current phase of construction to minimize traffic damage to the site. 2. Stabilized Construction Entrance (SCE) a. Construct a SCE before construction begins at every point where traffic leaves the site and enters onto a public road and/or any unpaved entrance/exit location where there is a risk of transporting mud or sediment onto paved roads. b. The SCE must be at least 3.65m wide, with room for two vehicles to pass at high traffic areas, and constructed of 50mm dia. clear stone, 150mm dia. rip rap, and filter fabric with the following characteristics: 1) Grab Tensile Strength: 220lbs; 2) Elongation Failure: 60%; 3) Mullen Burst Strength: 430lbs; 4) Puncture Strength: 125lbs; 5) Equivalent Opening: Size 40-80 (US std Sieve). Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 3. Page 4 of 13 Material Stockpiling a. If material that has been stockpiled and will not be used within 14 days, it must be stabilized using one of the following measures: C. 1) Temporary Seeding 2) Tarps 3) Compaction 4) Surface Roughening Stabilization Practices 1. Temporary Seeding a. Use temporary seeding to reduce soil erosion by stabilizing areas disturbed by construction that will not be brought to final grade within 30 days. b. Areas that may require temporary seeding include, but may not be limited to soil stock piles, dikes, dams and sides of sediment basins and traps. c. Species used for temporary seeding must be fast growing, native or adapted, not require permanent irrigation and not be invasive. d. Till/loosen compacted soil prior to planting seed. 2. Permanent Seeding a. Apply permanent seeding to any graded or cleared area as specified on the landscaping plan. b. Plant native grass, tree and shrub species in favourable growth conditions. For areas outside of construction activity, plant species within 3 weeks of construction start. c. Species shall not require permanent irrigation after the first two years or fertilizers containing phosphorus. Species must not be invasive. d. Use topsoil on areas where topsoil has been removed, where the soil is dense or impermeable, or where mulching and fertilizers alone cannot improve soil quality. Make topsoil layers at least 2 inches deep, or similar to the existing topsoil depth. 3. Mulching a. Hay, grass, woodchips, straw, and/or gravel shall be used in areas prone to erosion during construction and to facilitate the growth of permanent seeding. 4. Preservation of Natural Vegetation a. Establish construction boundaries to limit site disturbance to 40 feet beyond the building perimeter, 5 feet beyond primary roadway curbs, walkways and main utility branches, and 25 feet beyond parking areas. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 5 of 13 b. Stakes shall be used to indicate limits of construction, grading and disturbance. Trees shall be clearly marked to be preserved and protected from ground disturbances around the base. 5. Buffer Zones a. Incorporate vegetated strips of land on floodplains, next to wetlands, along stream banks, and on steep, unstable slopes to decrease the velocity of storm water runoff, preventing soil erosion. b. May be areas of vegetation left undisturbed during construction, or can be newly planted. New strips require establishment of permanent seeding and planting. 6. Stream Bank Stabilization a. Use riprap, gabion, reinforced concrete, log cribbing, grid pavers, or asphalt where vegetative stabilization practices are not practical and where the stream banks are subject to heavy erosion. b. Structures shall be planned and designed by a licensed professional engineer. 7. Soil Retaining Measures a. Use skeleton sheeting, continuous sheeting, or permanent retaining walls to hold in place loose or unstable soil where other soil retaining methods of soil retention are not practical. 8. Sod Stabilization a. Sod shall be applied in alternating strips or other patterns on graded or cleared areas that might erode. b. Roll or compact immediately after installation to ensure firm contact with topsoil. Add lime and phosphorus-free fertilizers to the soil to promote growth. If the soil is acidic, then add lime as directed by the Landscape Architect. c. Do not plant sod during very hot or wet weather or on slopes greater than 3:1 if they are to be mowed. 9. Rolled Erosion Control Products (RECP) a. Use RECPs on recently planted slopes to protect seedlings until they become established, on tidal or stream banks where moving water is likely to wash out new plantings, and/or alone on slopes to mitigate soil erosion. b. Installation shall follow manufacturer/consultant requirements. 10. Dust Control a. Apply vegetative cover, mulch, spray-on adhesives, calcium chloride, sprinkling, stone, or barriers on open dry areas of soil as specified on drawings. D. Structural Practices 1. Silt Fence Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 6 of 13 a. Construct posts with a filter fabric media to remove sediment from storm water volumes flowing through the fence. b. The lower edge of the fence is to be vertically trenched and covered by backfill. c. Filter fabric should be a pervious sheet of polypropylene, nylon, polyester, polyethylene, or equivalent and have the following characteristics: 2. 1) Filtering Efficiency: 75%-85% (minimum) 2) Tensile Strength at 20% (maximum) Elongation: Standard Strength = 30 lb/linear in. (min.), Extra Strength = 50 lb/linear in. (min.) 3) Slurry Flow Rate: 0.3 gal/ft2/min (min.) Outlet Protection a. Install stone, riprap, concrete aprons, paved sections, or settling basins at all pipe, interceptor dike, swale, or channel section outlets where the velocity of flow may cause erosion or pools at the outlet of an erosion and sedimentation control measure. 3. Inlet Protection a. Install straw bales, stone, concrete masonry units and stone, filter fabric, or silt fences around catch basins and manhole covers to prevent silting of inlets, storm drainage systems, or receiving channels. 4. Surface Roughening a. Create horizontal grooves, depressions, or steps that run parallel to the contour of the land. b. Use surface roughening on all slopes, as soon as possible after the vegetation has been removed. c. Methods of surface roughening are stair-step grading, grooving (using disks, spring harrows, or teeth on a front-end loader), and tracking (driving a crawler tractor up and down a slope, leaving the cleat imprints parallel to the slope contour). 5. Check Dams a. Install check dams in steeply sloped swales, or in swales where adequate vegetation cannot be established, and only in small open channels which will not overflow once dams are constructed. b. Construct a small, temporary or permanent dam of stone, straw bales, logs or pea gravel-filled sandbags across a drainage ditch, swale, or channel to slow water flow and allow suspended sediment to settle. 6. Drainage Swale a. Construct a channel with a lining of vegetation, riprap, asphalt, concrete, or other material to convey runoff from the bottom or top of a slope. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 7 of 13 b. Intercepted runoff shall be diverted to an appropriate outlet with sediment trap if required; swale shall have a positive grade with no dips to collect water. c. Swale shall be lined using geotextiles, grass, sod, riprap, asphalt, or concrete - based on the volume and velocity of the runoff. 7. Interceptor Dikes and Swales a. Construct ridges of compacted soil (dikes) and excavated depressions (swales) where upslope runoff has high risk of erosion. b. Construction shall occur before any major soil disturbing activity takes place. Outfall shall be stabilized or a structural sediment trapping practice. c. Temporary dikes and swales to remain in place longer than 15 days, must be stabilized and remain until area is permanently stabilized. d. Permanent controls shall be permanently stabilized and designed to handle runoff after construction is complete. 8. Gradient Terraces a. Use gradient terraces on long, steep slopes with high potential for water erosion. b. Construct earth embankments or ridge-and-channels along the face of a slope at regular intervals that drain to an outlet where erosion will not occur. c. Design and installation must be completed according to a plan determined by an engineering survey and layout. Design elevation of the water surface of the terrace shall not be lower than the design elevation of the water surface in the outlet at their junction at design flow. d. Provide vegetative cover at outlet where possible. 9. Earth Dike a. Construct a mound of stabilized soil to divert surface runoff volumes from disturbed areas or into sediment basins or sediment traps. b. Check for local design requirements. Ensure dike is properly compacted, has properly designed height and thicknesses, constructed along a positive grade, and has no low points for water to collect. c. Stabilize using vegetation or stone/riprap. 10. Gravel or Stone Filter Berm a. Construct a temporary ridge of loose gravel, stone, or crushed rock to slow filter flow and divert it from exposed traffic in areas with gentle slopes and traffic. 11. Sediment Trap a. Excavate a pond area or construct earthen embankments to allow for settling of sediment from storm water volumes. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 8 of 13 b. Incorporate temporary seeding, mulching, and/or earth dike per installation procedures to reduce erosion of banks. c. Use a sediment trap for small drainage areas, no more than 2 hectares (5 acres). 12. Temporary Sediment Basin a. Use sediment basins for areas larger than 2 hectares (5 acres). b. Construct a pond with a controlled water release structure to allow for settling of sediment from storm water volumes. c. Construction shall occur before any clearing and grading occurs, and must not be built on an embankment in an active stream. d. Incorporate temporary seeding, mulching, and/or earth dike per installation procedures to reduce erosion of banks. e. Design of outlet pipe and spill way shall be designed by an engineer based on an analysis of the expected runoff flow rates from the site. 13. Pipe Slope Drains a. Install pipes, sectional down drains, paved chutes, or clay tiles to carry concentrated runoff from the top to the bottom of a slope without causing erosion. b. Inlets and outlets of drain shall be stabilized, and inlet properly installed to ensure runoff does not bypass the inlet. 14. Subsurface Drains a. Place a perforated pipe or conduit beneath the surface of the ground at a designed depth and grade to drain an area with a high water table. b. Use relief drains in a gridiron, herringbone, or random pattern to dewater an area where the water table is high. c. Place interceptor drains, as single pipes, to remove water where sloping soils are excessively wet or subject to slippage. d. Backfill with open granular, highly permeable soil immediately after pipe is placed. e. Stabilize outlet and ensure sediment-laden storm water runoff is directed to a sediment trapping measure. 15. Temporary Stream Crossing a. Construct a bridge or culvert across a stream or watercourse for shortterm use by construction vehicles or heavy equipment. 16. Temporary Storm Drain Diversion a. Install a pipe to redirect an existing storm drain system or outfall channel to discharge into a sediment trap or basin. b. Measure shall remain in place while the area draining to the storm drain is disturbed. 3.02 INSPECTIONS & MAINTENANCE Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 9 of 13 A. Using Schedule E1 – ESC Inspection and Photograph Checklist for reference, inspect all erosion and sedimentation control measures at least once each week and following any significant storm event (0.5 inches of precipitation or greater). B. All erosion and sedimentation control measures must be maintained in good working order. If maintenance or repairs are identified they must be completed within 24 hours. C. Schedule E2 – ESC Inspection Log (1.07B) must be completed for each inspection. D. Inspection procedures specified below summarize the EPA document and shall be followed in conjunction with details, drawings, and manufacturer requirements. 1. Stabilized Construction Entrance: Apply additional gravel as required, remove sediments and other materials from all areas to minimize clogging. Keep adjacent public roadway(s) free of sediment. 2. Material Stockpile: Inspect for effective prevention of runoff and erosion. 3. Temporary Seeding: If plants do not grow quickly or thick enough to prevent erosion, reseed the area as soon as possible. Keep seeded areas adequately moist. If irrigation is required, over-watering shall be avoided. Phosphorus-containing fertilizers are not to be used. 4. Permanent Seeding: Inspect for sufficient growth and water conditions. Replant areas as per installation instructions (refer to 3.01C.2) if cover does not provide erosion control. 5. Mulching: Inspect to ensure mulching is not loose or removed. Apply additional mulch or reseed if necessary. If mulch binder is required, apply at rates specified by the manufacturer. Employ alternative controls if current measures are not effective. 6. Preservation of Natural Vegetation: Routine maintenance shall include mowing, fertilizing, liming, irrigating, pruning, and weed and pest control, depending on the specific species and environmental conditions. Remove any debris, and ensure area is protected from traffic. 7. Buffer Zones: Routine maintenance shall include mowing, fertilizing, liming, irrigating, pruning, and weed and pest control, depending on the specific species and environmental conditions. Remove any debris, and ensure area is protected from traffic. 8. Stream Bank Stabilization: Inspect for structural damage and repair as required. 9. Soil Retaining Measures: Inspect for structural damage and repair as required. 10. Sod Stabilization: Remove and replace dead sod. Ensure area receives sufficient water. If irrigation is required do not over-water. 11. Rolled Erosion Control Products (RECPs): Inspect for separation, cracks, tears, and breaches. Ensure matting is in continuous contact with the soil. Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 10 of 13 12. Silt Fence: Silt fence to be inspected for depth of sediment, tears, loose fabric attachment at the fence posts, channel erosion beneath fence, sagging or collapse and to ensure the fence posts are firmly in the ground. Built up sediment is to be removed from silt fence when it has reached one-third the height of the fence. Repair such that fence is in original installation condition. 13. Outlet Protection: Inspect outlet for erosion and pooling of water. Necessary repairs to be made as required to reduce exit velocity of runoff. If a riprap apron is used, inspect for riprap displacement and damage to filter fabric. 14. Inlet Protection: Inspect that measures are in original installed condition. Ensure measures are effectively trapping sediment. Remove accumulated sediment and debris when it reaches ½ the design depth of the trap. Repair protection measures as required. 15. Surface Roughening: Inspect for small eroded watercourses, as little as a few inches deep, or washout of roughened grading. Fill, regrade, and reseed immediately. 16. Check Dams: Inspect for sediment and debris accumulation and erosion of sides. Sediment should be removed when it reaches one half the original dam height. Repair dams as required. 17. Drainage Swale: Inspect for dips or low points along the swale where water is pooling and ensure that runoff is being directed to sedimenttrapping measure used onsite. 18. Interceptor Dikes and Swales: For swales inspect for dips or low points along the swale where water is pooling and ensure that runoff is being directed to sediment-trapping measure used onsite. For dikes ensure runoff is being directed to sediment-trapping measure used onsite and that it is compacted and free of low points for water collection. 19. Earth Dike: Ensure runoff is being directed to sediment-trapping measure used onsite and that it is compacted and free of low points for water collection. 20. Gravel or Stone Filter Berm: Inspect for breach in structure caused by vehicles and accumulated sediment. Replace filter material if needed, and remove and properly dispose of accumulated sediment. 21. Sediment Trap: Remove sediment when it reaches 300mm in depth. If outlet becomes clogged with sediment it must be cleaned to restore flow capacity. Maintain until site area is permanently stabilized and/or permanent structures are in place. Ensure bank is sufficiently compacted and stabilized such that erosion into the basin does not occur. 22. Temporary Sediment Basin: Remove sediment when it reaches 300mm in depth. If outlet becomes clogged with sediment it must be cleaned to restore flow capacity. Maintain until site area is permanently stabilized and/or permanent structures are in place. Ensure bank is sufficiently compacted and stabilized such that erosion into the basin does not occur. 23. Pipe Slope Drains: Ensure runoff does not bypass the inlet, undercutting the structure. Repair undercutting at inlet if needed. If required, install a Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 11 of 13 headwall, riprap, or sandbags around the inlet. Inspect pipes for leakage. Repair leaks and restore damaged slopes. If evidence exists of pipe movement, install additional anchor stakes to secure slope. 24. Subsurface Drains: Inspect for pipe breaks or clogging by sediment, debris, or tree roots. Remove blockage immediately, replace any broken sections, and re-stabilize the surface. Check inlets and outlets for sediment or debris, and remove and dispose of these materials properly. 25. Temporary Stream Crossing: Inspect for structural deficiencies. Ensure runoff is flowing through culvert, not between soil and outside edge of the pipe. 26. Temporary Storm Drain Diversion: Ensure flow is being properly directed towards sediment-trapping device. When construction is complete, move diversion, flush storm drain prior to removal of sediment trap/basin, stabilize outfall, and restore grade areas. 3.03 REMOVAL OF PRODUCTS A. Erosion and sedimentation control measures shall be maintained and inspected until final landscaping is complete. END OF SECTION Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 12 of 13 SCHEDULE E1 – ESC INSPECTION AND PHOTOGRAPH CHECKLIST (Submit checklist with photos to Consultant after construction and prior to demobilization) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: Conduct an inspection of all erosion and sedimentation control measures implemented onsite each week and following any significant storm event (0.5 inches of precipitation or greater). Record any maintenance or repair performed in Schedule E2 – ESC Inspection Log. Photographs of each measure must be taken immediately following installation, in-situ and at the end of construction. ESC Measure Date of Photo Location Onsite #1 #2 #3 I hereby certify that the information provided is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Date Project No. 0701-BS Section 02370 Feb 07, 2014 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Page 13 of 13 SCHEDULE E2 – ESC INSPECTION LOG (Complete weekly. Submit most recent copy to the Consultant on a monthly basis) Project Name: Completed By: Project Location: Company: Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures Date Ex. Observations Sept 17/06 Heavy rain night before. Measures in good condition. Corrective Action Taken Deficiencies Straw bale check dam in northeast swale deteriorated New straw bale installed in northeast swale. Initials G.L. I hereby certify that the information provided is complete and correct: Signature of Authorized Official Position Enermodal Engineering Ltd. Date Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING Page 02513 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Submittals 1.3.1 Samples: Submit two 300 x 300 mm coloured, textured asphalt samples to show colour and texture for Architects approval of each asphalt area. 1.3.2 Erect a sample installation where designated on site, approximately 1500 x 1500 mm in size. Mock-up to illustrate coloured and textured asphalt. Modify or replace mock-up to obtain approval. After acceptance, retain mock-up as standard of quality for installation. 1.4 Quality Assurance 1.4.1 Paving work shall be done only by a Subcontractor with an accredited experience of at least 10 years, and having skilled workmen, experienced foremen and suitable machinery. 1.5 Job Conditions 1.5.1 Environmental Temperature .1 Commence laying of asphalt binder courses only when base surfaces are at least 1C and the temperature is rising. .2 Commence laying of asphalt surface courses only when binder course surfaces are completely dry, at least 7C, and the temperature is rising. .3 Suspend paving operations if temperature drops below specified minimums. 1.6 Protection 1.6.1 Prevent vehicle or foot traffic over freshly-paved areas of asphalt for at least 24 hours following completion. Barricade as required. Project No. 0701-BS 1.6.2 SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING Page 02513 - 2 Pave only in areas where no project earthwork or trucking is taking place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 Asphaltic Concrete Paving: conforming to OPSS 1150, and consisting of a base course and a surface course, in "HL" types as specified herein. .1 Asphalt Cement: conforming to Specification Designation 85/100 in Table 1 of OPSS 1101. .2 Asphalt Primer: Liquid asphalt emulsion, slow drying for spray or brush application. 2.2 Textured Asphalt Pavement: to be applied with imprinter designed to produce custom texture as manufactured by IPC Integrated Paving Concepts or approved alternative. Texture: Allow for two custom textures selected by Consultant. 2.2.1 Coloured Asphalt Coating: Provide high performance cementitous, epoxy modified, acrylic based waterborne ‘StreetBond CemBase’ base coat and epoxy modified, acrylic waterborne ‘StreetBond 150’ top coat by IPC Integrated Paving Concepts or approved alternative. Colour: Allow for two custom colours selected by Consultant. 2.2.2 Granular Base and Subbase Courses: Conforming to OPSS Form 1010. 2.2.3 Filter Fabric: "Terrafix 270-R" by Terrafix Geosynthetics Inc., or approved equal. 2.2.4 Asphalt Sealer: Provide sealer to all new work in accordance with Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Inspection 3.1.1 Refer to Section 02200 of this Specification for subgrade conditions, field testing, and soil investigation specified for project. 3.1.2 Ensure that subgrade work has been completed in accordance with Section 02200 of this Specification, and that subgrade conditions are satisfactory for placing of pavements, before commencing work. 3.1.3 Verify that subgrade densities as specified in Section 02200 of this Specification have been attained under pavement locations. 3.2 Removals 3.2.1 Remove existing pavement or soil/granular and excavate subgrade as required to construct new pavement structure. 3.2.2 Proof roll exposed subgrade, subexcavate weak areas and backfill with clean, approved material capable of obtaining 100% Standard Maximum Dry density. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING Page 02513 - 3 3.2.3 Remove surplus materials from the site at the end of each day's work. 3.3 Placing of Subbase and Base Courses 3.3.1 Proof roll earth subgrade in the presence of the Consultant in order to identify inconsistencies or soft spots. Do not proceed with aggregate fill until inconsistencies or soft spots have been rectified as approved by the Consultant. 3.3.2 Prior to the placement of granular material, compact the subgrade surface uniformly to provide a minimum compaction of 98% Standard Proctor density. Compact top 300 mm to 98% Standard Proctor density. Grade the subsoil to catch basins and weeping tile in such a manner that water will not pond beneath the pavement, nor flow back toward building. 3.3.3 Spread aggregate in 75 to 100 mm layers and shape accurately, finish by blading, and roll to cross-section and profile required by drawings and specifications. Compact to 100% Standard Proctor maximum dry density. Sprinkle water on base course ahead of compacting machine to aid compaction or to reduce dust nuisance, or both. 3.3.4 Specified granular course thicknesses shall be the thickness after compaction to refusal. 3.3.5 Apply additional layers of aggregate to attain design depth. 3.3.6 Eliminate surface irregularities exceeding 13 mm under a 3000 mm long straight edge. 3.3.7 Shape base course at edges of asphalt pavement to form extended shoulder and to allow for thickened asphalt edge band. 3.4 Placing of Pavement 3.4.1 Provide asphalt paved surfaces formed to lines and compacted thicknesses shown on the Drawings. Preparation of the mix, transportation, methods of application and compaction shall be in accordance with OPSS 310. 3.4.2 Asphaltic concrete paving shall be laid in thicknesses to match existing. 3.4.3 Finish pavement surfaces to elevations indicated on drawings. 3.4.4 Maintain accuracy of elevations to within specified tolerances. 3.4.5 Ensure that drainage is effected from all areas, without formation of puddles. 3.4.6 Inform Consultant if slopes to drains are less than 1% before commencing work, in order that corrective methods may be considered. 3.4.7 Lay asphalt mixture only on dry bases from which foreign matter has been removed. 3.4.8 Deliver admixtures to site at minimum workable temperature. After spread, and before initial rolling, temperature of mixture shall be no less than 110C. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING Page 02513 - 4 3.4.9 Control spreader alignment by positive means, such as string lines set from grade stakes or alignment stakes, or both. Place these controls on each side of pavement, or utilize other approved methods so that spreader is not guided by edges of preceding courses. 3.4.10 Locate containers carrying fuel oil to clean shovels, rakes, or brooms, on pavers where they will not drip or splash oil on freshly-laid asphalt. 3.4.11 Adjust course widths so that centre joints of successive courses do not coincide. 3.5 Finishing Asphalt Surfaces 3.5.1 Compact asphalt in accordance with requirements of OPSS Form 310 to 96% Marshall density. 3.5.2 Smooth out surface irregularities to within a tolerance of 6 mm under a 3000 mm straight edge. 3.5.3 Roll asphalt to a smooth, dense, uniform surface with a heavy steel tandem roller. Manually tamp areas around manholes, walls and other inaccessible areas to produce surfaces matching rolled areas. Use a light roller for walks or other confined areas of lightduty pavement. 3.5.4 Roll asphalt across the direction it is spread. 3.6 Finishing Asphalt Pavement Edges 3.6.1 Trim exposed edges to neat, straight lines. 3.6.2 Correct alignment and grade irregularities at edges of pavement by addition or removal of asphalt mixture before rolling. 3.6.3 Form a thickened edge band of asphalt to strengthen exposed pavement edges. 3.7 Joints in Asphalt Pavement 3.7.1 Make transverse and longitudinal joints, and joints between new and old work precisely and carefully. Make sawcuts where services are installed under existing pavement. 3.7.2 Make joints by keying or butting, and bond them well. 3.7.3 Provide bond between new and old pavements, or between work of successive days by cutting through full depth of older course to expose a clean, vertical surface. Clean and remove loose or broken material and seal with asphalt emulsion. Paint all surfaces against which all joints are to be made with a thin, uniform, and continuous coat of joint painting material. Place hot admixture of new pavement against joint, and rake to required depth and grade. 3.7.4 Do not scatter excess material derived from joint making on freshly-laid asphalt. Remove it from site. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING Page 02513 - 5 3.8 Asphalt Pavement Topping 3.8.1 Provide 25 mm thick topping in locations as indicated on drawings, conforming to the requirements within this Section. 3.9 Textured Asphalt Pavement 3.9.1 Textured work shall be applied with imprinter designed to produce custom texture as indicated on drawings and as manufactured by IPC Integrated Paving Concepts or approved alternative. 3.9.2 Heat up asphalt surfaces to be textured to manufacturers recommended temperatures to a minimum depth of 12 mm without burning pavement surface. 3.9.3 Place templates in position and press into surface using vibratory plate compactors until top of template is flush with surrounding asphalt pavement and then shall be removed. 3.10 Coloured Asphalt Pavement Coating 3.10.1 Apply two coats of asphalt pavement base coat and two coats of asphalt pavement top coat to clean, dry pavement in thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer. 3.10.2 Provide first base coating to asphalt and broom coating into asphalt. 3.10.3 All remaining coating shall be applied than broomed or rolled, allowing each coating to dry prior to application of next coating. 3.10.4 Protect coating work from traffic until dry. 3.11 Work Outside The Property Line 3.11.1 Where the work of asphalt paving joins into municipal paving all work shall conform to local municipal standards. Unless detailed otherwise carry paving from the street to the new paving inside the property line. Obtain all pertinent details and specifications before the work begins and make arrangements for inspections by municipality field supervisors. Additionally, take 2 photographs each of the existing work and the completed work. Photos shall be in 8" x 10" size taken from 2 different angles. 3.12 Field Quality Control 3.12.1 An independent testing and inspection firm will carry out testing and inspection to verify conformance of work to the specifications. The testing and inspection firm will be chosen by the Consultant and paid from the Cash Allowance. 3.12.2 Notify the testing company when it is ready for tests. The testing and inspection firm will be responsible for all tests taken and will ensure that paving meets with its approval. 3.12.3 Testing and inspection will be in four stages as described herein, and in sufficient site visits to ensure satisfactory results but in no case less than four site visits. Additional visits to site due to faulty performance by the Contractor shall be made at no expense to the Owner. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING Page 02513 - 6 3.12.4 The testing company must be completely satisfied in the performance of the Contractor at each stage, before giving approval to that Contractor to proceed to the next stage. 3.12.5 The Owner expects the testing company to test within sixteen (16) hours from the time called to do so by the Contractor, since paving is a critical item at the end of the project. 3.13 Stages of Inspection .1 Stage 1: Visual inspection of site preparation and marking. .2 Stage 2: Inspection of subgrade. .3 Stage 3 .4 .5 3.13.2 .1 Inspection of granular subbase and base (after each layer is placed or after both layers are placed and compacted). .2 On-site density tests. .3 Checking of thickness of various levels. (Minimum of four (4) checks shall be done on thickness in a paved area of 232 sq.m. or less, and one (1) additional check for each additional 232 sq.m. or part thereof). .4 Laboratory tests re: moisture content and grading of materials. Stage 4 .1 Inspection of asphalt installation. .2 Checking of thickness and density of material and checking suitability of equipment used. .3 Further carry out grain size analysis and Marshall test if visual inspection is not satisfactory or, if there is reason to suspect that the materials supplied are not acceptable. The cost of these two tests shall be borne by the Contractor. .4 Do all laboratory tests according to ASTM methods, latest revisions. Grading Tables: Submit grading tables of the materials used to the Consultant for approval. The testing company shall ensure that the material delivered complies with the grading tables. Cooperate fully with the testing and inspection firm. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02583 EXTERIOR CONCRETE Page 02583 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.1.2 Refer to Contract Drawing GP-S-001 Structural General Notes, including items 010000 General, 010001 Design Notes, 030000 Concrete 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Work Included In This Section 1.3.1 Concrete sidewalks, curbs, concrete base for asphalt paving, and other poured-in-place work not connected to, and not forming part of the building structure unless noted or specified otherwise. Conform in general to requirements of Section 03300 unless otherwise called for in this section or noted on drawings. 1.3.2 1.3.3 Law Society of Upper Canada must be notified of any work being carried out adjacent to their buildings and must be coordinated with the Law Society of Upper Canada. 1.4 Referenced Standards 1.4.1 CAN/CSA-A5/A8/A362-M88 1.4.2 CAN/CSA-A23.1-04/A23.2-0-most recent issue Portland Cement/Masonry Cement/Blended Hydraulic Cement Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete 1.4.3 CAN3-A266.1-M78 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 1.4.4 CAN3-A266.2-M78 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 1.4.5 G30.1-18-M92 Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02583 EXTERIOR CONCRETE Page 02583 - 2 1.4.6 OPSS 1010 Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Aggregates-Granular A,B,M and Select Subgrade Material. 1.5 Submittals 1.5.1 Concrete Mix: Submit details of proposed concrete mix for review by Consultant, well in advance of first pour. 1.5.2 Inspection Laboratory Reports: Submit inspection laboratory reports specified under Field Quality Control herein. Submit a copy of reports for each test directly to Consultant. Include in reports all results and a statement as to whether or not the materials comply with the Specification. Submit concrete cylinder test reports on a form similar to Appendix ‘B’ of CAN/CSA-A23.2. 1.5.3 Mockup: Provide colour test samples, up to three in total, for areas of exposed concrete Samples are to be 1m x 1m and include sandblast range and saw cut joints. Sample paved section shall be approved in writing by the Consultant before concrete is installed in any permanent location. 1.6 Environmental Conditions 1.6.1 When concrete is placed while temperatures are lower than 4C, or are likely to go below 4C, the freshly-placed concrete must be protected from freezing by adequate coverings (i.e. tarpaulins) and the addition of heat. 1.6.2 Concrete when placed shall have a temperature of not less than 21C for the first three days, or 10C for five days. Concrete temperature at no time shall exceed 37C. No calcium chloride will be allowed in the mix. 1.6.3 Protect freshly laid concrete from damage by rain. Provide impermeable covering material to protect surfaces in case of rain. Extend protective coverings over edges of concrete and arrange so as not to bear on unprotected edges. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 In accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1 and the following: .1 Water: Verify that no salts are present which will cause efflorescence. .2 Cement: Type 10 Normal Portland cement, conforming to CAN/CSA-A5. .3 Aggregate: Natural sand, gravel, or crushed rock. CAN/CSA-A23.1 shall govern for approval and control of fine and coarse aggregates and their grading. Maximum coarse aggregate size of 20 mm. .4 Water-Reducing Admixture: Conforming to CAN3-A266.2, Type WN. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02583 EXTERIOR CONCRETE Page 02583 - 3 .5 Air-Entraining Admixture: Conforming to CAN3-A266.1. .6 Joint Filler: Non-asphaltic, premoulded fibre joint filler that is compatible with sealants, non-rotting, and with a 70% minimum recovery after compression. For expansion joints, use polyethylene backer rod (rope). .7 Sealer: "Euco-Guard 100" by Euclid Canada Inc. .8 Sealant: "Sealtight Pourthane" by W.R. Meadows or "Vulken 245" by Mameco. For joints to be covered with asphalt paving, use No. 158 cold applied sealant by W.R. Meadows or other approved manufacture. .9 Granular Base: Granular ‘A’ material conforming to OPSS 1010. .10 Reinforcing Bars: billet steel with a yield strength of 400 MPa conforming to CSA G30.18-M92. .11 Formwork: Steel or plywood to provide a smooth finish to concrete. .12 Bonding Agent: Sternson "ST-432" epoxy adhesive, for bonding new concrete to existing concrete. 2.1.2 Colour admixture: Pre-bagged colour additive consisting of pre-blended synthetic iron oxide pigments with dispersing agents. Colour: to be selected by Consultant. ‘Chromix’ by L. M. Scofield Company or approved alternative by Davis Colors or Elementis.Mixing 2.1.3 Mix concrete in accordance with reviewed mix design. 2.1.4 Incorporate the following in the mix in accordance with manufacturer's directions. .1 A water-reducing admixture. .2 An air-entraining admixture to provide 5% to 8% air, as determined by CAN/CSAA23.1, Table 8. Mix admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 2.1.5 All concrete shall be Type C2 as defined by Table 8 of CAN/CSA-A23.1 (32 MPa concrete). 2.1.6 Incorporate colour loading up to a maximum 5% based upon dry cementitious mix weight. Colour added to mix on job site 20 minutes prior to pour. Cement and aggregate to produce concrete matching reviewed sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Examination 3.1.1 Refer to Section 02200 of this Specification for grading, compaction and backfilling requirements, field testing, and soil investigation specified for project. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02583 EXTERIOR CONCRETE Page 02583 - 4 3.1.2 Ensure that grading and backfilling has been completed in accordance with Section 02200 of this Specification, and that subgrade conditions are satisfactory for placing of pavements, before commencing work. 3.1.3 Verify that subgrade densities as specified in Section 02200 of this Specification have been attained under pavement locations. 3.1.4 Ensure that no water is present on beds where concrete work is to be placed. Place concrete only on frost-free ground. Remove previously frozen bearing surfaces. 3.2 Placing of Subbase and Base Courses 3.2.1 Proof roll earth subgrade in the presence of the Consultant in order to identify inconsistencies or soft spots. Do not proceed with aggregate fill until inconsistencies or soft spots have been rectified as approved by the Consultant. 3.2.2 Prior to placing granular material, compact the subgrade surface uniformly to provide a minimum compaction of 95% Standard Proctor density. Compact top 300 mm to 98% Standard Proctor density. Grade and crown the subsoil grade in such a manner that water will not pond beneath the pavement. 3.2.3 Spread aggregate in 75 to 100 mm layers and shape accurately, finish by blading, and roll to cross-section and profile required by drawings and specifications. Compact to 100% Standard Proctor maximum dry density. Sprinkle water on base course ahead of compacting machine to aid compaction or to reduce dust nuisance, or both. 3.2.4 Specified granular course thicknesses shall be the thickness after compaction to refusal. 3.2.5 Apply additional layers of aggregate to attain design depth. 3.2.6 Eliminate surface irregularities exceeding 13 mm under a 3000 mm long straight edge. 3.2.7 Unless detailed otherwise granular layer under sidewalks shall be 200 mm thick. 3.3 Bonding Agent 3.3.1 Where new concrete toppings are applied over existing concrete, prepare surfaces and apply bonding agent in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 Placing of Concrete 3.4.1 Place concrete in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1. 3.4.2 Do not place concrete when it is raining, or likely to rain. If rain begins after concrete is placed, and before it is set, protect with waterproof covers until set. 3.4.3 Use only tools and handling equipment that are absolutely clean of rust, salts, and other harmful materials to avoid efflorescence and staining. 3.4.4 Unless detailed otherwise sidewalks shall be minimum 125 mm thick. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 02583 EXTERIOR CONCRETE Page 02583 - 5 3.5 Joints 3.5.1 Provide joints in concrete as indicated on drawings, providing the following as a minimum: expansion joints at 6000 mm maximum o.c., and control joints midway between expansion joints. 3.5.2 In sidewalk slabs and curbs, provide dummy joints between the 1200 mm control joints. Provide temporary rope in-fill to control joints until after sealant has been applied. 3.5.3 Provide 13 mm wide expansion joint filler where concrete abuts any part of a vertical surface. Seal top of joint filler with caulking compound tooled flush with concrete. 3.5.4 When sidewalk is adjacent to curb, make joints of curb, gutters and sidewalk coincide. 3.6 Finish 3.6.1 Finish concrete sidewalk slabs and curbs with sandblasted finish. Refer to Section 03353 for sandblasting of concrete. 3.7 Curing and Sealing 3.7.1 Moist cure concrete for 7 consecutive days minimum and allow to dry. Seal the entire surface of concrete with two coats of sealer in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 3.7.2 Remove temporary rope in-fill in expansion joints, or alternatively, push into joint allowing 13 mm depth of joint to be caulked. Apply sealant to joints per manufacturer's directions. Prime sides as required. Ensure that rope in-fill is of the bond breaker type, otherwise, provide separate bond breaker type to prevent 3-point adhesion of sealant. 3.7.3 Fill control joints in concrete slab to receive asphalt paving using specified cold applied sealant. 3.8 Field Quality Control 3.8.1 Engage an inspection and testing laboratory, to be chosen at a later date by the Consultant, to conduct the following tests in accordance with the noted CSA standards. Payment for inspection and testing will be made from a cash allowance. 3.8.2 Take three control cylinders from each pour and not less than three from each 100 cubic metres of concrete. Make, handle, and store cylinders in accordance with the "Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test Specimens" of CAN/CSA-A23.2. The inspection laboratory shall take the actual concrete samples on the site. Make air-entraining tests in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.2 for each pour of exterior work specified under Article "Mixing". 3.8.3 For the purpose of determining consistency of concrete in the field, provide a metal mould in the form described in CAN/CSA-A23.2 and make slump tests in the manner described in CAN/CSA-A23.2 for each set of compression test cylinders. Project No. 0701-BS 3.8.4 SECTION 02583 EXTERIOR CONCRETE Page 02583 - 6 Additional cylinders, or other methods required by the Contractor to validate early stripping, will be paid for by the Contractor. * * * END OF SECTION Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 PART 1: 1.1 GENERAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 The General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary General Conditions, and the General Requirements of Division 1, form part of this section, and must be read in conjunction with the requirements of this section, and all related sections. .2 The work of this section, and related work specified in other sections shall comply with all requirements of Division 1 – General Requirements. .3 Provide all material and labour required for the completion of the Contract. Breakdown of Work by Section is for guidance only and is not necessarily complete. .4 Work Furnished and Installed: i. 1.2 .2 1.4 All cast-in-place concrete. STANDARDS, CODES AND ACTS .1 1.3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 1 of 8 Conform with the Ontario Building Code 2006 under O. Reg. 403/97, and amendments O. Reg. 22,102 and 122/98, O. Reg. 152,278,593 and 597/99, O. Reg. 205/00, O. Reg. 283/01, O. Reg. 220/02, O. Reg. 304 and 305/03, O. Reg. 23 and 245/04 and O. Reg. 145, 146, 236 and 389/05 and any other applicable acts of any authority having jurisdiction and the following: i. CAN/CSA-A23.1-04, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction, Canadian Standards Association. ii. CSA-A23.3-04, Design of Concrete Structures for Buildings, Canadian Standards Association. iii. ASTM C260-01, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete, ASTM International. iv. CAN/CSA-S269.3-M92 (R2003) - Concrete Formwork, Canadian Standards Association. Where there are differences between the specifications, drawings, codes, standards or acts, the most stringent shall govern. TOLERANCES .1 Perform placing operations so that completed work will be within the tolerances set out in CAN/CSA-A23.1. .2 These tolerances are acceptable with regard to visual and structural requirements. Interfacing tolerances may not be compatible with the above. Review and coordinate interfacing tolerances so that the various elements come together properly. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN .1 Design of Mix Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 1.5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 2 of 8 i. Design the mix in accordance with CSA – A23.1 so that concrete will be homogeneous, uniformly workable, and readily placeable into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on the work, but without permitting materials to segregate or excessive free water to collect on the surface. The concrete, when hardened, shall have the qualities specified. ii. Cement Type: 10 Normal. iii. Specified Strength: As called for on drawings. iv. Water Cement Ratio, Slump and Air Content: As called for on the Drawings. These requirements are for concrete at the point of placing. v. Nominal Size of Coarse Aggregate: 20 mm. vi. Admixtures: Type WN water reducing admixture. vii. Fly Ash: Except as noted above, cementing materials for concrete shall contain 40% fly ash by mass. Do not use fly ash in concrete that will be exposed to view and in concrete that will be exposed to freeze-thaw cycles or de-icing chemicals. viii. Do not use recycled concrete aggregate in slabs or in concrete exposed to view. Except as noted, recycled concrete shall constitute up to 100% of the coarse aggregate for concrete. ix. Use of calcium chloride is not permitted. x. Each type of architectural concrete may have a custom tint to be specified by the Consultant. xi. Concrete mix for cast-in-place curbs to be designed to meet the requirements in this section, as well as to match the colour, mix and finish of the precast concrete curbs & caps. xii. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout. ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE .1 All concrete exposed to view is to be considered architectural concrete. .2 Quality of Finish: i. The quality of finish shall be such that when the forms are stripped, it meets the standards set out below, without further finishing work other than treatment of tie holes and clean-up. ii. Dense, even concrete free of major defects such as deep or extreme honeycombing, inconsistencies in plane, severe cold joint lines and major loss of fines. Minor imperfections may be acceptable. Major defects will necessitate replacement. The judgement as to what constitutes major or minor defects will be the Consultant's. Patching will not be permitted and if used, will constitute a major defect. Repairs, i.e. removal of sections of a member, may be carried out if Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 3 of 8 approved by the Consultant, but the repair shall match the colour and texture of the surrounding concrete. 1.6 iii. Concrete members of generally uniform colour. iv. Concrete members with sharp, accurate definition at corners, arrises, reglets and the like, generally free of chipped or spalled areas and within dimensional tolerances set out in CAN/CSA-S269.3. Members shall be visually straight. v. Plane surfaces without protuberances, indentations, ridges or bulges. vi. Under no circumstances shall repair to any architectural concrete be undertaken without the consultant's consent will be classified as defective Work and the consultant may require their removal and replacement. SAMPLES AND ASSISTANCE .1 .2 Concrete Test Cylinders i. Cooperate in the execution of the concrete cylinder testing program. Furnish concrete required, protect specimens against injury and loss, and assist in the sampling and storage of specimens. ii. Sample concrete and cast cylinders in accordance with CAN/CSA-A.23.1 where directed by the Consultant. iii. In accordance with requirements of CAN/CSA-A.23.1, provide storage facilities for the initial 24 hours of site storage of all cylinders and the subsequent site storage of field cured cylinders. Suitably equip the 24 hour storage facility with humidity and temperature control equipment and maximum/minimum thermometers. It shall be sufficiently large to handle the maximum number of cylinders required at any one time. iv. Provide sufficient field curing storage facilities so that cylinders representing the various areas can be safely stored in locations representing the curing conditions for those areas. Move the field-cured cylinder storage facilities from area to area as the work progresses. Cold Weather Concreting Plan i. Submit for review a plan for cold weather concreting. Included as a minimum: • Curing period for concrete selected if accelerators are to be used to reduce the length of time winter heat is required. • Method of application of winter heat to the concrete for the initial curing period, be it through construction of a heated enclosure or other means. • Method of protection of the concrete for the balance of the curing period, be it through the use of insulating blankets, straw, fill or other methods. • Method of pre-heating of embedded elements such as reinforcing steel and cast-in inserts. Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 1.7 SUBMITTALS .1 Submit the following for review by the Consultant: .2 Certificates i. 1.8 Prior to beginning work and when any change in materials or source of supply is proposed, provide the following certificates prepared by an approved inspection company. The cost of this work shall be borne by the Contractor. • Certification that aggregates and cements proposed for the work comply with requirements of specifications and CSA-A.23.3. • Certification that compressive strength, water-cement ratio, slump, entrained air content and other specified properties will be met, using the proposed mixes. • Give proportions by dry weight of cement, coarse and fine aggregate, type and amount of admixture or air entraining agents, and water-cement ratio, for the mix proposed for each class of concrete. • State for each mix if fly ash is used in lieu of cement. • Verification that air entraining admixtures is compatible with water reducing admixtures. WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .1 Separate and recycle waste material sin accordance with Section 01740 Cleaning and Waste Management. .2 Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses. .3 Designate a cleaning area for tools to limit water use and runoff. Cleaning area should be a portion of the site which is be paved at a later date. .4 Carefully coordinate the specified concrete work with weather conditions. .5 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from people. .6 Prevent plasticizers, water-reducing agents and air-entraining agents from entering drinking water supplies or streams. Using appropriate safety precautions collect liquid or solidify liquid with an inert, non-combustible material and remove for disposal. Dispose of all waste in accordance with applicable local, provincial and national regulations. .7 Choose least harmful, appropriate cleaning method which will perform adequately. PART 2: 2.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 4 of 8 PRODUCTS MATERIALS Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 .1 Concrete i. Conform to CAN/CSA-A.23.1. ii. Comply with section 01611 LEED Product Requirements (minimum 25% SCM where applicable). iii. Concrete supplier should provide RMCAO LEED letter based on Technical Bulletin T-030. .2 Coarse Aggregate: from locally quarried non-alkali reactive rock, Mineral or Air-cooled Blast Furnace Slag .3 Recycled Concrete Coarse Aggregate: Clean, hard, strong, durable particles, free of absorbed chemicals, coatings and other fine materials, crushed from aggregate having a compressive strength not less than 35 MPa .4 Supplementary Cementing Materials: Type F Fly Ash to CAN/CSA-A23.5 .5 Cementitious Hydraulic Slag: to CAN/CSA-A363 .6 Water: to CAN/CSA-A23.1 .7 Admixtures: Air entraining agents or water reducing admixtures conforming to CSA CAN3-A266.1. .8 Chemical admixtures: to ASTM C494. Consultant to approve accelerating or set retarding admixtures during cold and hot weather placing. .9 Concrete retarders: to ASTM C494 water based, low VOC, solvent free. Do not allow moisture of any kind to come in contact with the retarder film. .10 Curing Compound: Water based curing compound conforming to CSA-A.23.1. such as Cure & Seal 30 EF by Dayton/Richmond. .11 Corrosion Inhibitor: DCI Corrosion Inhibitor, Type S, at a concentration of 11 litres/cubic metre of concrete, as manufactured by W.R Grace and Co., Cambridge, MA, USA or approved equivalent. .12 Expansion Joint Filler: Asphalt impregnated fibre board, ½” thick unless noted otherwise; ASTM D1751. .13 Additional criteria for Architectural concrete: i. PART 3: 3.1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 5 of 8 Colour pigment: Chromix Admixture by L.M. Scofield or by Davis or by Elementis or approved alternate. Finished concrete colour at curbs to match precast curbs. Colour at planter to match historic precast spandrel panels/guard rail. Finished concrete colour at paving to match adjacent paver units. Finished concrete colour at furniture bases to be selected. EXECUTION CONSTRUCTION AND CONTROL JOINTS Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 3.2 3.3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 6 of 8 .1 Obtain approval from the Consultant for location and details of construction joints not shown. .2 Place joint filler vertical in position in straight lines. Secure to formwork during placement of concrete. Recess top of filler 6mm for sealant placement. Do not tool border at jointing or edges. .3 Maximum spacing of control joints to be 4800mm. PLACING CONCRETE .1 Conform to requirements of CAN/CSA-A.23.1 and the following: .2 Immediately before placing concrete, clean forms and reinforcement of foreign matter. .3 During hot weather conditions, do not use concrete mixed more than 1 hour after introduction of mixing water or 1-1/2 hours during other periods. .4 Allow 24 hours minimum after placing concrete in columns, piers or walls before placing concrete in beams or slabs supported thereon. .5 Ensure waterproof membranes are not damaged during placing of concrete over them. .6 Remove concrete spilled onto forms around hoisting equipment before depositing concrete in these areas. PROTECTION .1 General i. .2 Conform to the requirements of CAN/CSA-A.23.1 and the following to protect freshly deposited concrete from freezing, premature drying and extremes of temperature. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for the hydration of the cement and to achieve the specified strength of the concrete. Cold Weather Concreting i. Between the 15th of October of any year and the 15th of April of the following year, provide on hand and ready for use all equipment necessary for adequate cold weather protection and curing before concrete placement is begun. ii. When fresh concrete is to be cast against existing concrete, prevent the loss of heat by extending the protection for the fresh concrete at least 600 mm over the existing. iii. Insulate, or enclose within the protective housing, tie rods, reinforcement or metal which projects from the concrete being protected. iv. Construct enclosures tight and safe for wind and snow loadings. v. Maintain housing, enclosures and supplementary heat in place for entire period of protection, except that sections may be temporarily removed as required to permit placing additional forms or concrete provided the uncovered concrete is Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 7 of 8 not permitted to freeze. Make up time lost from the required period of protection at the required temperature before protection is discontinued and removed. .3 3.4 3.5 Dispose heating units to avoid heating concrete locally or drying it excessively. Avoid high temperature and dry heating within enclosures. vii. Take particular care to maintain edges and corners of concrete at the required temperature owing to their greater vulnerability to freezing. Protection of Completed Work i. At all times during the work, protect exposed concrete, exposed masonry and other exposed members from staining or becoming coated with concrete leakage due to continuing concreting operations. Members which become coated may be classed as defective work by the Consultant. ii. Protect exposed members from staining due to rusting of reinforcement projecting beyond construction joints. iii. The application of de-icing salts on completed work is not permitted. iv. During the curing period, take suitable measures to protect the surface of the concrete from pitting and loss of fines due to rain. OPENINGS THROUGH COMPLETED MEMBERS .1 Do not cut openings through completed members without the Consultant's approval. .2 Where the location of openings is approved, mark their position on each side of members to be perforated. In the case of slabs over 75 mm thick, cut two-thirds of the thickness by drilling from the top and remaining one-third by drilling from the bottom. Drill walls similarly from each side. .3 Where the location of openings is approved, locate the reinforcing by x-ray, cover meter or other positive means and adjust the location of the opening so that no reinforcement is cut unless specifically approved otherwise in writing by the Consultant. .4 Maintain the axis of the hole at right angles to the surface of the member. MAKING GOOD .1 3.6 vi. Where directed by the Consultant, make good temporary openings left in concrete construction around pipes, ducts and the like using a mortar of the same proportions as the surrounding work. Reinforce mortar with mesh or the like where openings exceed 75 mm. Roughen existing surfaces to receive mortar or apply suitable bonding agent such that mortar will be securely bonded to existing concrete. TREATMENT OF FORMED SURFACES NOT DESIGNATED AS ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE .1 General Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 .2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 Page 8 of 8 i. After stripping for forms, the bared surface of concrete will be inspected by the Consultant. Do not proceed with repairs or surface treatment to concrete prior to the Consultant's inspection. ii. After the Consultant's inspection, remove or cut back 25 mm, bolts, ties, nails or other metal not specifically required for construction purposes. iii. Where no serious defects are revealed by the Consultant's inspection, cut out areas of moderate honeycombing to sound concrete. Saturate the affected areas with water but leave surface dry (no standing water) and fill with cement mortar of the same general composition as that used in the concrete. iv. Where serious defects are found, such as large voids or extensive honeycombing, repair the defect as directed by the Consultant. v. Where surfaces are to be, damp-proofed, waterproofed or similarly finished, remove fins, ridges or bulges which would interfere with the application of the final finishes. vi. Remove traces of form lining compound from concrete surfaces which may affect the bonding of following surface application. Surfaces Exposed to View i. In addition to the above requirements, go over the surface, remove ties, nails, timber, inserts, minor imperfections, leaving the surface clean. ii. Where major defects are revealed, repair as the Consultant directs. iii. Where in the Consultant's opinion defects are minor, repair as follows or as the Consultant may otherwise direct. Cut out affected areas, saturate cut-out areas, voids, pit holes and form tie holes with water and fill with a cement mortar containing an approved type of latex bonding agent. Affected areas should be saturated but surface dry. Mortar mix and application shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturers of the bonding agent. iv. After the mortar stiffens, wipe the whole surface clean such that no material remains on the surface, except that within the voids and such that finished surface is clean and smooth. Cure the patched areas by keeping moist for at least 7 days. v. Where directed by the Consultant, power wash concrete surfaces to remove surface imperfections remaining after the treatment noted above has been carried out. END OF SECTION 03300 Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Project No. 0701 SECTION 03353 SANDBLASTING Page 03353 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Protection 1.3.1 Provide all necessary protection to building and materials which are not scheduled to receive sandblasting. Provide portable enclosures as required to contain sand drifting. 1.4 Submittals 1.4.1 Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating the proposed methods of protecting adjacent building elements. 1.4.2 Samples: Submit 300 x 300 mm samples of each type of sandblasting on each colour of concrete for approval by Consultant prior to starting work. 1.5 Quality Assurance 1.5.1 Perform Work of this Section by a company that has adequate equipment, skilled tradesmen, and a minimum of five years proven experience in abrasive blast cleaning on projects of a similar size and nature. Submit to Consultant substantiating information as proof of compliance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Abrasives 2.1.1 Silica sand free from deleterious substances such as fine clay particles. Project No. 0701 SECTION 03353 SANDBLASTING Page 03353 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Review of Construction 3.1.1 Review of construction to ensure work does not proceed in error. 3.2 Sandblasting 3.2.1 Allow for three degrees of sandblasting for precast concrete elements as defined below: 3.2.2 .1 Light sandblast: Breaks surface to expose mainly fine aggregates and takes sheen off precast face removing enough matrix (cement mix) to yield uniform appearance. Depth of exposure to be approximately 1.0 mm. Perform finish just prior to being loaded on truck for delivery to project site. .2 Medium sandblast: Expose both fine and coarse aggregate. Depth of exposure to be approximately 1.0 mm to 2.0 mm. Perform finish day after casting and then touch up prior to loading on truck for delivery to project site. .3 Heavy sandblast: Expose coarse aggregate and give a lot more relief in panel finish. Depth of exposure to be approximately 3.0 mm to 5.0 mm. Perform finish day after casting and then touch up prior to loading on truck for delivery to project site. Allow for three degrees of sandblasting for cast-in-place concrete elements as defined below: .1 Light sandblast: Breaks surface to expose mainly fine aggregates and takes sheen off precast face removing enough matrix (cement mix) to yield uniform appearance. Depth of exposure to be approximately 1.0 mm. .2 Medium sandblast: Expose both fine and coarse aggregate. Depth of exposure to be approximately 1.0 mm to 2.0 mm. .3 Heavy sandblast: Expose coarse aggregate and give a lot more relief in panel finish. Depth of exposure to be approximately 3.0 mm to 5.0 mm. 3.2.3 Schedule the sandblasting work with the Contractor. 3.2.4 Sandblast concrete benches, stairs and existing concrete as indicated on drawings to remove all dirt, stains and debris. 3.3 Cleaning 3.3.1 Remove all protection, dirt, abrasive, and stains, and leave in clean condition. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.1.2 Refer to Contract Drawings A-003 General Notes. 1.1.3 Refer to Contract Drawing GP-S-001 Structural General Notes, including items 010000 General, 010001 Design Notes, 040000 Concrete 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Referenced Standards 1.3.1 CSA-A23.1-04/A23.2-04 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete 1.3.2 CSA-A165 Series-04 CSA Standards on Concrete Masonry Units 1.3.3 CSA A179-04 Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry 1.3.4 CAN3-S304.1-04 Masonry Design for Buildings (Limit States Design) 1.3.5 CAN3-A370-04 Connectors for Masonry 1.3.6 CAN3-A371-04 Masonry Construction for Buildings 1.3.7 ASTM C270-05a Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 1.4 Standard Of Work And Tolerances 1.4.1 Conform to CSA-S304 "Masonry Design for Buildings". Lay masonry to CSA-A371 including Appendix ‘H’. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 2 1.5 Submittals 1.5.1 Test Reports: Before delivery of masonry, submit to Consultant, test reports of an independent inspection laboratory, verifying that masonry proposed conforms to these Specifications. Similarly submit results of mortar tests. 1.6 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 1.6.1 Supplement Clause 5.16 of CSA-A371 as follows: .1 Ensure that materials are delivered to job site in dry condition. .2 Keep materials dry until use. .3 Store under waterproof cover on pallets or plank platforms held off ground by means of plank or timber skids. 1.7 Cold Weather and Protection Requirements 1.7.1 Conform to CSA-A371. In particular take notice of clause 5.16.1.2 "Protection When Work is not in Progress". 1.7.2 In extremely hot weather perform the following: .1 Plan in advance for hot weather construction. .2 Remove plastic wrap from cubes of masonry upon arrival at site, to allow air circulation. .3 Cover masonry piles with plywood boards or tarps. .4 Spread only enough mortar to permit soft setting of masonry units. .5 Discard mortar not used within 2 hours. Do not retemper. .6 Use line blocks or line stretchers to string masons line. .7 Cover the walls at the end of the day, or fog (water) spray the walls after they achieve initial set to compensate for evaporation. .8 Do not over mix mortar materials. .9 Do not dip masonry in a bucket of water. .10 Do not use nails or line pins to string masons line due to possible joint damage and personal injury. .11 Do not tap or move the masonry unit once it has been set. .12 Do not spread more than 900 mm of mortar for placement of stone. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 3 .13 Store sand, masonry materials and mixing equipment in shaded areas. .14 Store masonry materials off the ground on skids. .15 Make certain that sand is moist. Dampen the sand pile if needed at the end of each day to maintain uniform sand moisture for the duration of wall construction. .16 Construct wind breaks protecting materials and construction areas. .17 Cool all equipment and presoak wooden mortar boards. 1.8 Temporary Bracing 1.8.1 Provide adequate temporary bracing to masonry walls until joists, floor and roof decks are installed and can develop adequate diaphragm action to brace walls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 Water: Verify that water used contains no salts to cause efflorescence. 2.1.2 Asphalt Emulsion: In conformance with CAN/CGSB-37.2. 2.1.3 Deflection Space Filler: 75 x 6 mm thick preformed, polyurethane foam; “25V” by Emseal Joint Systems Ltd. or other approved manufacturer. For filler at fire rated or zero hour fire (smoke) separations refer to Section 07860. 2.1.4 Reinforcement .1 Joint reinforcement (exterior cavity wall construction): 4.76 mm hot dipped galvanized heavy duty welded steel rods, truss design with adjustable box pintles by Blok-Lok Limited, Hohmann & Barnard Inc., or Wire-Bond. .2 Joint reinforcement (interior walls): 3.66 mm, standard galvanized welded steel rods, truss design by Blok-Lok Limited or Hohmann & Barnard Inc. .3 Vertical reinforcement (jambs of fire shutters, etc.): in accordance with Section 03200. .4 Cavity Wall Bonding Ties (Steel stud backup): 1.61 mm thick steel, galvanized with 4.76 mm diameter adjustable cavity wall bonding tie, Fero "Slotted Stud Tie (Type 1)" complete with V-ties, and insulation retainers or the equivalent by BlokLok Limited. Hot dipped galvanized non-conventional bonding ties conforming to OBC are required. Design to meet criteria of CSA 370-94. .5 Cavity Wall Bonding Ties (Concrete block backup): 1.61 mm thick steel, galvanized with 4.76 mm diameter adjustable cavity wall bonding tie, Fero "Slotted Block Tie (Type 1)" complete with corrugated section, V-ties, and insulation retainers or the equivalent by Blok-Lok Limited. Hot dipped galvanized Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 4 non-conventional bonding ties conforming to OBC are required. Design to meet criteria of CSA 370-94. 2.1.5 Reinforcing Steel Bars: Canadian Produced billet, rail, or axle steel, with a yield strength of 50 Ksi, conforming to CSA G30.8, G30.12 and G30.13. 2.1.6 Lateral Support Anchors .1 .2 2.1.7 .1 At concrete, 37 mm x 5 mm steel dovetail anchor, galvanized with 50 mm at each bend 90 degrees, and stress relieved. Embed anchors a minimum of 50 mm into masonry. .2 At intersecting and abutting walls, 37 mm x 5 mm steel, 600 mm long, galvanized, with 50 mm at each end bent 90 degrees, and stress relieved, or with 9 mm diameter by 100 mm maximum pins through straps in lieu of bent ends. .3 For connecting masonry to steel structure, use Flexible anchor, galvanized 5 mm diameter, steel, bent into equilateral triangular shape, with apex fastened to support, two sides terminating in 25 mm inward bent hooks, and extending a minimum of 100 mm into masonry, "Flex-O-Lok" by Blok-Lok Limited or Hohmann & Barnard Inc. Coordinate with Section 05100 to ensure compatibility. .4 For attachment of ties to concrete use "Pos-i-Tie" fasteners. .5 Provide 5.20 mm wire joint reinforcing every second course at columns which have masonry fireproofing to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction. Horizontal .1 Masonry walls extending to the underside of building structure: One piece 12 ga. hot dipped galvanized steel lateral clip supports as supplied by NCA/Acrow Richmond, Rexdale, Ontario to suit block width. For attachment of clip supports, use power accentuated or self drill fasteners. .2 Masonry walls which do not extend to the underside of building structure: 100 x 100 x 6 mm steel plate with 12 x 25 mm steel bar welded to the centre of one side of plate. Size bar length to engage wall by 50 mm. Secure plate assembly at 1200 mm o.c. and in such a way that the bars will fit into sash grooves in masonry. Stone Units .1 2.1.8 Vertical Stone: Refer to Section 04400 Building Stone. Concrete Masonry Units Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY .1 Lightweight Concrete Block: Use for all walls, except those in contact with earth, and those exposed to the weather. Block shall be Richvale "Ultralite", Permacon "Superlite" or equivalent by Boehmers or other manufacturer producing block of less than 1700 kg/m3, modular, to meet CSA-A165 Series, Facet H/15/D/M. For the purpose of fire resistance rating, lightweight block shall conform to the requirements of L2 as specified in the NBC. .2 Normalweight Concrete Block: Use for walls in contact with earth, walls exposed to the weather, and for any other locations shown on Drawings. Block shall be modular, to meet CSA3-A165 Series, Facet H/15/A/M. .3 Special Shapes: Provide special sizes and shapes required including but not limited to, plain ends, halves, jambs, sash, lintel, bullnose, and other shapes. Special shapes shall be manufactured to shape, not cut. Use solid units at jambs of overhead doors and at top of interior walls. Use bullnosed units for all external corners. .4 Fire Ratings: Provide lightweight, architectural, and polished concrete blocks having void to solid ratios and aggregate as required to achieve required fire ratings for width of fire rated walls shown. Provide solid filled blocks at tops of all fire rated block partitions to support fire stop. .5 Appearance: Notwithstanding the appearance requirements of the above mentioned CSA Standards, block shall be free from all surface indentations, surface cracks and other defects detrimental to the appearance of the finished surface. Block having visual defects shall be rejected for exposed areas but may be used for concealed or unfinished areas. 2.1.9 Bolts and Anchors: To CAN3-A370. 2.1.10 Natural Mortar .1 Generally: Use materials only as specified in CSA A179 and ASTM C207. Ensure that water and aggregate used in mortar, other than in walls buried in earth, will not cause efflorescence. .2 Mixes: Mix mortars as specified in CSA A179 using the Proportion Specification. Add bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .3 Mortar Types .4 2.1.11 Page 04200 - 5 .1 For load-bearing walls: mortar type "S". .2 For all other masonry walls, use regular Type "N" mortar. Ready Mixed Mortar: Ready mixed mortars supplied by BB Mega Mix, premixed mortars by Jiffy Mortar Systems or approved equivalent. Grout: Conforming to CSA A179 Table 3. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 6 2.1.12 Colour Pigment: As manufactured by Elementis Pigments or Interstar Pigments. Make allowance for full loading of 2 kgs. per bag of 1-1-6. Colour as selected by Consultant. 2.1.13 Neoprene Control Joints: Closed Cell Neoprene Sponge by Hohmann & Barnard Inc or approved equivalent. 2.1.14 Soft Joint Seal: Emseal "Soft Joint Seal" as manufactured by Emseal Joint Systems Ltd., for use under shelf angles at exterior masonry walls. 2.1.15 Precast Concrete: In accordance with Section 02785 and 03400. 2.1.16 Mortar Net Drainage System: High density polyethylene, MN 10-1 manufactured by Mortar Net USA Ltd., or Mortar Break distributed by Building Resource Construction Products Representatives, to suit 25mm wide air space in typ wall assembly. 2.1.17 Weephole / Vent Material: “Goodco” vent by Williams Products Inc., or approved alternate. Submit sample for review. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Coordination 3.1.1 Coordinate the work of Section 07200 with this Section to ensure monolithic air/vapour barrier and thermal envelope is achieved. 3.2 Laying Masonry 3.2.1 General .1 Make joints concave tooled of uniform size. Fill solidly with mortar in both bed and vertical joints, and including block webs. Do not butter corners of units or allow mortar scrapings in joints, slush joints, furrow bed joints excessively or shift and tap units after mortar has initially set. .2 Lay masonry using running bond unless detailed otherwise. .3 For hollow masonry units, cover end areas and bearing areas of face cells fully with mortar. .4 When work is resumed on walls previously laid, and which are either partially or totally set, remove loose mortar and mortar from top and adjoining surfaces. Remove mortar completely when masonry is removed and replaced with new. .5 Form tooled concave joints wherever exposed to view, whether behind cabinets, fitments and wall accessories or not. When mortar has become "thumb-print hard" form joints by a tool having a long bearing surface to avoid uneven depressions. Close all cracks and crevices. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 7 .6 Horizontal joints in all block walls shall receive a heavy raking, while vertical joints shall receive very light raking, to achieve strong horizontal line effect desired. .7 Rake out joints at junction of interior and exterior walls with columns at interior with exterior walls, at intersections of walls and partitions where joint reinforcement is installed. These joints will be caulked by Section 07900. .8 No mortar shall protrude from joints on wall surfaces to which air/vapour barrier and insulation will be applied. .9 Lay face work from face side. .10 Lay masonry level, true to line, square, plumb, and as detailed. .11 Distribute masonry units of varying colours and textures to avoid spotty appearance over wall surfaces exposed to view. Do not use units which contrast too greatly with overall range. .12 Stop off horizontal runs of walls by racking back a half-unit in each horizontal course. Do not tooth. .13 Use chipped and blemished units only where concealed. Do not use defective or broken units. Do not lay concrete units that will appear smooth or slick where exposed to view, whether painted or not. .14 Where a steel anchor is set in block cell, fill the anchor cell with cement grout. Provide metal lath under the particular masonry unit to contain mortar fill. .15 Brace walls and piers continuously during construction until structure provides support. Do not brace walls with shims. .16 Extend walls to construction above, except where otherwise noted on drawings. Cut and fit as necessary. .17 In cavity walls, keep all cavity spaces free of mortar and debris by placing a wood strip on the ties. Retain strip on a wire line and pull up level and clean off toppings prior to placing next course of ties. .18 Weephole spacing: Provide free draining weepholes at 600 mm o.c. in bottom of vertical joints of stone courses in cavity walls. 3.2.2 Precast Concrete: In accordance with Section 02785 and 03400. 3.2.3 Lintels and Bond Beams .1 Build in steel and precast concrete lintels supplied to this Section. Set and level lintels on a bed of mortar. Note the following: Project No. 0701-BS 3.2.4 SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 8 .1 When exterior steel lintels bear on block jambs, place a compressible material at the ends of the lintel and place a sealant, not mortar, in the joint in the front of the lintel. .2 When exterior steel lintels are supported by the building frame, instead of the adjacent block, locate expansion joints so the block above the opening (supported by the building frame) is separated from the block adjacent to the opening (supported by the building foundation). .2 Unless noted otherwise as steel, for all openings in masonry walls, provide lightweight block or concrete block unit lintels of at least 15 MPa compressive strength. The unit lintel shall be filled with 20 MPa concrete and shall bear a minimum of 200 mm each end. Each unit shall be reinforced in accordance with Lintel Schedule on structural drawings. .3 Provide concrete block bond beams filled with 20 MPa concrete and one 10m bar at each floor for attachment of elevator rails unless other structural supports acceptable to the elevator trade are provided. .4 Support masonry units of reinforced block lintels built in place. Provide a level platform, true to the proper elevation and of sufficient strength to support the load without visible deflection. Maintain supports in place for a minimum of 7 days or for a period sufficient to permit the mortar to cure and gain sufficient strength to safely support all loads imposed. .5 Lay masonry units will full mortar coverage on all abutting edges with joints shoved tight. Where masonry construction is continued above the lintel, place the first course of masonry units on the lintel in a full mortar bed. .6 Hollow Metal Frame Installation and Other Built-In Work .7 Verify with those performing work specified in other Sections that air vapour barrier, through-wall and dampproof flashings, waterstops, sheet metal air/vapour barrier flashings, accessories, access panels, frame anchors, guards, sills, and such items specified in other Sections are available for building in before work commences. Cooperate in the setting and aligning of built-in work and provide for later installation of items which are included in the work of other Sections to avoid cutting, fitting, and patching. .8 Build masonry around metal frames including elevator entrances. Ensure that anchors are well secured and that frames are true and plumb. Completely fill frames with mortar. Maintain protective frame covering and ensure that no mortar is left on frame face. .9 Where the front and rear elevator hoistway walls are constructed of masonry, erect the masonry after the elevator frames have been installed. Rod Reinforcing and Grout: At walls where rod reinforcing is required ensure that the vertical rods are accurately located and conform to locations indicated on structural details. Grout fill block voids around rod reinforcing. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 9 3.2.5 Cope, cut, and split concrete masonry units with power-driven abrasive discs. Cut units wherever electrical outlets, grilles, ducts, conduits or pipes occur. Allow 3 mm clearance around items which are incorporated in or pass through walls. 3.2.6 Lay hollow concrete masonry units so that effective shells rest and align one over the other. 3.2.7 Build chases, do not cut them. 3.3 Masonry Anchorage and Support 3.3.1 Anchor masonry construction to ensure its stability and to withstand loads imposed by intended use and by natural elements. Embed bolts and anchors solidly in mortar or grout to develop maximum resistance to design forces. 3.3.2 Supply anchors to Section 05100 where required to be welded to structural steel. 3.3.3 Unless indicated or specified otherwise, anchors shall be spaced at the maximum vertical and horizontal spacing specified in CSA A370. 3.3.4 Provide lateral supports for masonry walls and partitions as shown on Drawings, specified and required by Jurisdictional Authorities, perpendicular to wall faces and either horizontally or vertically to wall panel edges. 3.3.5 Where lateral support at the top of a wall is required anchors or clip angles shall be installed at a spacing not exceeding 10 times the nominal wall thickness in accordance with CSA A370, unless otherwise specified. 3.3.6 Where lateral support at the side of a wall is required anchors or clip angles shall be installed at a spacing not exceeding 4 times the wall thickness, unless otherwise noted. 3.3.7 Fill cells of block units at parapet walls with grout in accordance with CAN3-A371, "Appendix G1". 3.3.8 Where masonry is attached to structural studs secure in accordance with anchor manufacturer's instructions. 3.3.9 Provide 5.20 mm wire joint reinforcing every second course at columns which have masonry fireproofing to the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction. 3.4 Mortar Net Drainage System 3.4.1 Install mortar net drainage system complete with mortar net inserts at cavity wall weep holes. Follow manufacturer’s directions. 3.5 Deflection Space 3.5.1 Maintain a 25 mm deflection space unless otherwise noted on Structural Drawings, between the structure and the top of all interior non-load-bearing walls and partitions. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 10 3.5.2 Fill deflection space in unrated walls with specified fill compressed to 25% of original thickness. Coordinate with installation of lateral supports, where they occur. Fill for fire walls is specified in Section 07860. 3.5.3 Fill all deflection spaces completely to provide an absolute seal between each side of the wall or partition. 3.6 Grouting Beneath Bearing Plates 3.6.1 Completely fill voids beneath steel base and bearing plates (bearing on masonry) with an approved non-shrink grout having a compressive strength at 28 days of at least 35 MPa. Where grout is exposed to view or weather, use non-ferrous expanding grout. 3.7 Shrinkage and Expansion Control Joints 3.7.1 Provide control joints in masonry walls, veneers and partitions. See BIA Technical Note 18A and NCMA Tek Notes 3 and 53. 3.7.2 Allow for settlement of slab-on-grade. See geotechnical report for magnitude of anticipated settlement. Provide vertical control joints in masonry partitions to allow for uneven settlement. Do not rigidly connect partitions to structure or other elements of the building which will not settle. 3.7.3 Incorporate vertical shrinkage control joints in walls of which concrete masonry units are a part. 3.7.4 Provide control joints at junctions of walls and columns, at intersections of unit concrete masonry load-bearing walls, and wherever shown on Drawings, and otherwise in walls with no openings, at a maximum spacing of 6 m o.c. Carry joints full height of walls. 3.7.5 Provide horizontal expansion control joints between shelf angles and stone for exterior walls. Make expansion allowance below angles for caulking and backup rod as specified in Section 07900. Install "Soft Joint Seal" under angles. 3.7.6 Provide complete vertical separation through walls incorporating control joints. Make control joints 9.5 mm wide, rake back 19 mm at junctures with concrete, and leave joints free and clear for caulking, as specified in Section 07900. 3.7.7 Use sash block units at each side of control joint. Cut as required, install joint filler full height to a snug fit. Leave a depth of 12 mm for caulking as specified in Section 07900. 3.8 Joint Reinforcement 3.8.1 Place reinforcement in horizontal masonry joints at 400 mm o.c., and at 200 mm o.c. in areas 750 mm above and below openings. Where changes in wall thickness occur, extend reinforcement 450 mm beyond at each side. 3.8.2 Do not run joint reinforcement through control joints. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 11 3.8.3 Install prefabricated corner sections in reinforced joints at corner and prefabricated tee sections at reinforced joints where partitions intersect other partitions or walls unless lateral support is being provided. Rake vertical joint at intersections for caulking as specified in Section 07900. 3.9 Pointing and Cleaning 3.9.1 Point all holes in mortar joints except weepholes, and in concrete masonry unit faces. 3.9.2 Cut out defective mortar joints and repoint. Remove defect mortar min 25mm beyond damaged portion. Repoint to provide a dense, concaved profile. 3.9.3 Wash down and brush stone walls to remove mortar and stains. Use 5% solution of muriatic acid only when preceded and followed by a complete drenching of clean water, and only when use of detergents or other cleaning methods are insufficient. Proceed only with Consultant's approval. 3.9.4 Do not use muriatic acid for cleaning of stone or light coloured concrete block. 3.9.5 Clean concrete masonry units with brushes and as otherwise recommended by the supplier to remove mortar and stains. 3.9.6 Do not use wire brushes for cleaning. 3.9.7 Should specified cleaning methods be insufficient, proceed with other methods only with approval of Consultant. 3.9.8 Protect adjacent materials and work from damage while cleaning. 3.10 Fire Separations 3.10.1 Walls which provide required fire separations shall be constructed of masonry units which are approved by Jurisdictional Authorities for material thickness, and rating. 3.10.2 Unless otherwise approved by Jurisdictional Authorities, in no case shall unplastered fire separation walls of solid construction be reduced in any part to a thickness less than the listed actual dimensions for the separation ratings indicated. 3.11 Air Leakage Control 3.11.1 Make the interior surfaces of exterior walls airtight, although concealed behind convectors, gypsum board, panelling or suspended ceilings. Ensure that backup masonry walls are well laid with full mortar joints. 3.12 Precast Concrete 3.12.1 Precast concrete will be supplied by Section 03400. Install precast concrete sills, bases, bands and wall caps. Set in full mortar bed including pins. Where indicated rake back joints 19 mm to receive caulking by Section 07900, otherwise provide totally open joints to receive caulking and bedding rope. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 04200 MASONRY Page 04200 - 12 3.13 Field Quality Control 3.13.1 Engage an inspection and testing company chosen by the Consultant and paid for from Cash Allowance, to conduct strength of mortar tests in accordance with CSA-A179 and CAN3-S304-M84. * * * END OF SECTION Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 PART 1: 1.1 GENERAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .1 Provide all material and labour required for the completion of the Contract. Breakdown of Work by Section is for guidance only and is not necessarily complete. .2 Work Furnished and Installed: i. .3 .4 1.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 1 of 11 Structural steel work. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: i. Grouting beneath column bases and bearing assemblies on concrete members: Section 03300. ii. Grouting beneath baseplates bearing on masonry: Section 04200. iii. Miscellaneous metals: Section 05500. iv. Metal stairs, handrails, guards, balustrades and railings: Section 05510. v. Reinforcing at edges of openings in metal deck that are not larger than 450mm in roof deck and 300mm in floor deck: Section 05311. Work Furnished but not Installed: i. Anchor bolts, bearing assemblies and other structural steel connections to be cast into concrete. ii. Shelf angles and related connections to be built into concrete to receive masonry. iii. Bearing plates and related connections for metal deck to be built into masonry or concrete. iv. Loose lintels, shelf angles and plates to be built into masonry. STANDARDS, CODES AND ACTS .1 Conform with the Building Code under Ontario Building Code 2006 (O. Reg. 403/97) and any applicable acts of any authority having jurisdiction and the following: i. CAN/CSA-S16.1-01 - Limits States Design of Steel Structures; S16S1-05, Supplement #1; and replacement pages issued June 2003 and December 2003 as Update #1 and Update #2 Canadian Standards Association. ii. CAN/CSA-G164-M92 (R2003) - Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles, Canadian Standards Association. iii. EN-10210-1 EUROPEAN STANDARD FOR ELLIPTICAL HOT FINISHED STRUCTURAL TUBE. Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 .2 1.3 1.4 iv. CSA-S136-94 - Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, Canadian Standards Association. v. CSA-W47.1-03 - Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures, Canadian Standards Association. vi. CISC/CPMA 1-73a - Performance Specification for Shop Primer, Canadian Institute of Steel Construction. vii. CISC/CPMA 2-75 - A Quick-Drying Primer for use on Structural Steel, Canadian Institute of Steel Construction. viii. SSPC-SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning, The Society for Protective Coatings ix. SSPC-SP6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning, The Society for Protective Coatings x. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, The Society for Protective Coatings xi. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, Near-White Blast Cleaning, The Society for Protective Coatings xii. ASTM D6386, Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting Where there are differences between the specifications, drawings, standards, codes or acts, the most stringent shall govern. TOLERANCES .1 Conform to erection tolerances specified in CAN/CSA-S16.1 Clause 28.7. .2 Interfacing tolerances may not be compatible with the above. Review and coordinate interfacing tolerances so that the various elements come together properly. QUALIFICATIONS .1 1.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 2 of 11 Be certified under the requirements of Division 1, or Division 2.1 of CSA Standard W47.1. DESIGN .1 .2 General i. Design connections, joists, bridging, trusses, castings and the like in accordance with the requirements of CSA S16.1 for the loads shown or implied. ii. Design calculations shall be carried out by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario. Connections i. Use types of shop or field connection shown, or in absence of such indication, use most appropriate type of connection. Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 1.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 3 of 11 ii. Design of connections shall include not only those between columns, beams, girders, trusses and braces, but also between such members as spandrel angles and beams, hangers, stiffeners, etc., and their supporting members (be they steel or concrete). iii. Design connections to safely withstand the combined effects of shear, moment and torque at applicable design stresses. iv. Do not weld galvanized members without the Consultant’s approval. v. Design bracing member connections for positive adjustability. vi. Design connections that are exposed to weather so that moisture, dirt and the like cannot gain entry to the interior of hollow built-up members. vii. Design and detail connections so as not to interfere with architectural clearance lines or finishes. viii. Where connections between beams and columns and the like result in loss of bearing to the metal deck, design and provide support as required. ix. Design connections that are to be cast into concrete to provide for the maximum deviation that can occur in erection and based on the following: Specified steel erection tolerances. Maximum permissible tolerances in the location of inserts cast into concrete of plus or minus 15 mm in any direction. SUBMITTALS .1 .2 .3 Connection Details, Erection Diagrams, Shop Details, Erection Procedures, Field Work Details i. Submit connection details, erection diagrams, shop details, erection procedures, and field work details for review by the Consultant. ii. Do not reproduce the structural drawings to serve as erection or setting drawings without the Consultant’s approval. Connection Design Details i. Connection design details shall be prepared before the preparation of shop details and submitted to the Consultant for review that the intent of the design is met. ii. Connection design details shall bear the signature and stamp of a qualified professional engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario iii. Connection design details shall provide details of standard and non-standard connections and other data necessary for the preparation of shop details. Connection design details shall be referenced to the design documents or the erection drawings, or both. Erection Diagrams i. Erection diagrams shall be submitted to the Consultant for review. Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 .4 .5 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 4 of 11 ii. Amongst other items show the following: General arrangement of the structure including all steel load-resisting elements essential to the integrity of the completed structure Principal dimensions of the structure Piece marks Sizes of the members Connection details. Bearing details. Holes. Finishes. Grades of steel. Size and type of bolts and bolt installation requirements Shop and field welds Elevations of column bases All necessary dimensions and details for setting anchor rods Sliding expansion joint bearing pad details, including materials, size and thickness of pads, setting out dimensions and load capacity. Required clearances and other details to receive correlative items Any other information necessary for the assembly of the structure iii. Show necessary dimensions and details for setting structural steel bearings, anchorages, assemblies and the like where they interface with other building components. iv. Co-ordinate with shop drawings of cast-in-place concrete, masonry, miscellaneous metal work, structural steel castings, metal deck and other interfacing work. Shop Details i. Shop details shall be prepared before fabrication and submitted to the Consultant for review. ii. Shop details shall provide complete information for the fabrication of various members and components of the structure, including the required material and product standards; the location, type, and size of all mechanical fasteners; bolt installation requirements; and welds. Erection Procedures i. Erection procedures shall be prepared before erection and submitted to the Consultant for review. ii. Erection procedures shall outline the construction methods, erection sequence, temporary bracing requirements, and other engineering details necessary for shipping, erecting, and maintaining the stability of the steel frame. iii. Drawings and sketches that identify the location of permanent and temporary load-resisting elements essential to the integrity of the partially completed structure shall supplement erection procedures. iv. Submit details of method proposed to apply and verify the magnitude of tension to bracing members within the specified tolerances. v. Submit procedures proposed when erection is carried out at temperatures greatly differing from 20 degrees C. Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 .6 .7 Fieldwork Details i. Fieldwork details shall be submitted for review by the Consultant whenever modifications to the approved structural details are required. ii. Fieldwork details shall provide complete information for modifying fabricated members in the shop or on the job site. All operations required to modify the member shall be shown on the fieldwork details. Substitution i. .8 2.1 Mark on 2 complete sets of final drawings any changes, additions or deletions that occur during the construction as a result of the Contractor's work, change orders or for any other reason. Mill Test Reports i. PART 2: Furnish the Inspection Company with a copy of erection diagrams, shop details, erection procedures, and fieldwork details bearing the Consultant's reviewed stamp. As-Built Drawings i. .10 If the Contractor wishes to make substitutions for steel materials or sizes indicated, submit proposals with the tender with necessary calculations for review of the Consultant. Drawings for Inspection Company i. .9 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 5 of 11 Submit copies of mill test reports properly correlated to the materials available to the Consultant. PRODUCTS MATERIALS .1 Rolled Wide Flange Sections: Conform to CSA-G40.21-M92 350W, unless otherwise noted. .2 Rolled channels and angles: Conform to CSA-G40.21-M92 300W, unless otherwise noted. .3 Steel plate, bars and rods: Conform to CSA-G40.21-M92 300W, unless otherwise noted. .4 Hollow Structural Sections: Conform to CSA-G40.21-M92 Grade 350W, Class C. .5 Bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM A325 M-00, galvanized when used with galvanized material. .6 Shop paint primer: Type 1 - Water borne: Low VOCs, and not to be manufactured or formulated with aromatic solvents, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexvalent chromium and their compounds. Devguard 4020 by ICI Devoe Coatings or approved equivalent. Contractor to verify compatibility of primer with finished paint including intumescent paint where applicable. Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 .7 Primer for steel to receive Cafco Intumescent coating: [Devguard 4160 structural primer by ICI Devoe Coatings][Rustguard 4150-7100 Red Low Voc Shopcoat Primer by ICI Devoe Coatings][Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6 by Sherwin-Williams ] or approved equivalent .8 Reinforced Inorganic Zinc Primer - Catha-coat 302H by ICI Devoe Coatings or approved Equivalent .9 Alkyl Silicate Inorganic Zinc Coating - Catha-coat 304 by ICI Devoe Coatings or approved equivalent. PART 3: 3.1 EXECUTION WORKMANSHIP AND FABRICATION .1 Conform to CAN/CSA-S16.1-94 and the following: .2 Provide holes to 15mm in diameter indicted at any time before shop drawings are reviewed, as required to permit the attachment of other materials. .3 Plates and shelf angles supporting masonry shall be continuous and extend full length of masonry openings. At splices, grind welds smooth where exposed to view. .4 Openings .5 3.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 6 of 11 i. Conform to requirements shown for location, size, reinforcing and cutting of openings through structural members. ii. Obtain written permission of Consultant prior to field cutting or altering of structural members not shown on the drawings. Galvanized Steel i. Detail and fabricate steel such that it will not trap the galvanizing material. ii. Detailed so that welding of galvanized material is not required. iii. Provided with vent holes as required. iv. Cleaned of all weld slag prior to galvanizing. v. Upon completion of erection, touched up with zinc rich primer at all locations where galvanizing is damaged. PROTECTION .1 Steel ST-1 i. This steel type applies to all structural steel concealed from view in the finished building and not exposed to weather or high humidity environments including: • ii. Bike Storage shower vestibule bulkhead bracing No cleaning or painting is required for this steel type. Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 .2 Steel ST-2 i. This steel type applies to all structural steel concealed from view in the finished building and not exposed to weather or high humidity environments including : • .3 Bike Storage Mezzanine floor beams and hangers. ii. Clean structural steel in accordance with SSPC SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning iii. Within one hour following cleaning, apply one coat of paint conforming to CISC/CPMA 1-73a Steel ST-3 i. This steel type applies to all structural steel which is to be encased in spray applied fire proofing or concrete including: • .4 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 7 of 11 Bike Storage Mezzanine floor beams ii. Clean structural steel in accordance with SSPC SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning to remove loose mill scale, rust, and other detrimental foreign matter. iii. No painting is required for this steel type. Steel ST-4 i. ii. This steel type applies to all structural steel which is exposed to weather or moisture in the finished building but is not designated as “architectural” such as steel within the cavity of cavity walls, and not protected by a vapour barrier including: • lintels • shelf angles • stair landing framing including columns • Bike Storage mezzanine floor framing • plates, hangers, braces etc. outside the building envelope • connection materials and inserts associated with the above. Fully galvanize, in accordance with CSA G164 to a minimum zinc coating of 600 2 g/m . .5 Except for steel which is to be left uncoated, upon completion of erection, apply primer to welds, bolts and at locations where original primer is damaged. Primer to match the primer of the base steel. For galvanized steel, touch up with zinc rich coating. .6 Protect all steel from damage during storage, transportation and erection. .7 For steel designated as “architectural” sand areas where the coating has been damaged and “feather” into the surrounding field prior to touching up. .8 Protect weep holes at base of closed column sections that have base plates, but no cap plates. Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 3.3 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 8 of 11 .9 During cold weather, protect members from damage due to water freezing in confined areas. .10 Provide drain holes in closed sections to prevent water build-up during erection. ERECTION .1 .2 .3 General i. Conform to requirements of CAN/CSA-S16.1 and the following: ii. Maintain temporary bracing until completion of entire structure including floor and roof decks, slabs, *masonry walls and other elements which are part of the wind resisting system. iii. Carry out erection operations, including installation of any temporary guying and shoring required, without loading portions of the existing structure already constructed in excess of its safe load carrying capacity. iv. During erection, forces or reactions in the steel frame members and their connections may exceed those on which the design is based. v. Determine the magnitude of such forces and reactions and take such measures as are necessary to ensure that the safety and stability of the structure is maintained until the entire structure, including floor and roof slabs is complete. vi. Splices, other than those shown, shall not be permitted in members without the Consultant's approval. If approval is given to permit welded splices, they shall be non-destructively tested at no extra cost to the Owner. vii. Nuts on ordinary bolts ASTM A307 shall be prevented from working loose by use of lock washers, lock nuts, jam nuts, thread burring or other approved methods. viii. Report to the Consultant where members cannot be erected within the specified tolerances without modification or special procedures. Take corrective measures to the Consultant's approval. Bearing on Concrete or masonry i. Set steel bases and bearing assemblies true and level at the proper elevation so that upon grouting, they will have full bearing. ii. Unless a specific method is shown, leveling devices or steel shimming may be used to support bases prior to grouting. Subsequent to grouting, loosen the leveling devices so that all loads pass only through the bases, or remove the steel shims so that the resulting voids can be fully grouted. Lintels i. .4 Unless a reinforced block or concrete lintel is noted, provide loose steel lintels, as shown, over openings and recesses in masonry walls or partitions including those for mechanical or electrical services. New Steel Work to the Existing Building Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 3.4 i. Make site measurements as required to verify dimensions of existing work before proceeding with the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for extra costs incurred due to proceeding without verifying site dimensions. ii. Adequately shore the existing structure until the permanent structure shown is installed, to ensure that no movements or damage occurs. EXPOSED STEEL .1 General i. .2 .3 .4 .5 3.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 9 of 11 The following applies to all steel which is left exposed to view in the completed building that is within 3 m of a floor Fabrication i. All exposed edges of plates shall be universal mill or guided flame cut. Exposed cut edges of beam flanges shall be guided flame cut. Cut surfaces shall be equal in smoothness to a mill finish. ii. Where bolted connections are shown, ensure that connections are neatly arranged with tight joints. iii. Remove mill marks, identification and surface imperfections by grinding smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Welding i. Continuously weld joints exposed to view. ii. Grind smooth all welds that are within the reach of the public. Galvanizing i. Ensure that the galvanizing process leaves a smooth and uniform surface. ii. During galvanizing, use procedures to ensure that members do not deform excessively. Do not use marking paint, crayons or other marking materials on exposed surfaces. ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STEEL .1 General i. .2 Architecturally exposed steel is all steel which is left exposed to view in the completed building. In addition to the requirements of this Section the requirements of the AISC specification for Architecturally Exposed Steel shall apply, except as varied herein. Tolerances i. The "as fabricated and erected" straightness tolerances of architecturally exposed steel members shall not exceed ½ of the standard camber and sweep Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 10 of 11 tolerances specified in CSA-G40.21, excepting that tolerances between structural steel members and window frames shall not exceed plus 3 mm or minus 0. .3 .4 .5 Fabrication i. Perform fabrication with special care and necessary straightening to maintain the condition of the material as described herein. ii. Show clearly the required fabrication tolerances on shop drawings. Show the required tolerances for setting embedded items on erection drawings. iii. Make copes, mitres and butt cuts in surfaces exposed to view within the closest possible tolerances consistent with structural shop equipment and practice. Plan erection sequence so that these tolerances can be maintained. iv. Where the fit-up of adjacent members is such that permissible tolerances specified above may result in any unsightly joint, take special care to obtain a visual plane on the exposed surfaces. If both surfaces are exposed, detail joints in such a way as to minimize these unavoidable variations. v. All exposed edges of plates shall be universal mill or guided flame cut. Exposed cut edges of beam flanges shall be guided flame cut. Cut surfaces shall be equal in smoothness to a mill finish. vi. Where bolted connections are shown, ensure that connections are neatly arranged with tight joints. vii. Remove mill marks, identification and surface imperfections by grinding smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Welding i. Except as otherwise shown on the drawings, all shop and field assembly shall be done by welding. Welders shall be qualified as hereinbefore specified. ii. Continuously weld joints exposed to view. iii. Form and weld all joints exposed to weather to exclude water by the use of "seal" welds. iv. Exposed welds, except f filler welds and concealed welds where clearances or fit of other items may so necessitate, shall be ground smooth and otherwise finished flush and even with adjacent surfaces. Grinding is not required for well formed fillet welds. v. Grind bevel welds smooth, forming neat, well-made corners. vi. Grind smooth any welds on structural steel members in the finished building that are within the reach of the public. Painting i. After inspection and before leaving the shop, clean all steel work exposed in the finished work by grit-blasting of all mill scale, rust, weld slag or flux deposit, oil, dirt and other foreign matter, to a "Commercial Bright" finish. Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Nathan Phillips Square Revitalization – Bike Storage Re-Issued for Tender 2014 May 23 .6 .7 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 Page 11 of 11 ii. Remove mill marks, identification and surface imperfections by grinding smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. iii. Immediately after cleaning, apply a shop coat paint to all steel work, except as follows, to dry surfaces by spray, to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. Allow to dry in dust free areas. iv. Do not paint metal items that are to be encased in concrete and surfaces that are to have concrete placed against them. v. Apply 1 additional shop coat of paint as specified to parts of shop coated steel surfaces that will be inaccessible after erection. vi. Clean surfaces within 50 mm of any field weld location of materials that would prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes while welding is being done. vii. After erection and immediately after grinding welds, etc. touch up and paint with 1 coat of same paint as shop coat, all damaged and abraded spots, including any unpainted areas. Completely remove anti-spatter coating, if used before field touch-up painting. Galvanizing i. Ensure that the galvanizing process leaves a smooth and uniform surface. ii. During galvanizing, use procedures to ensure that members do not deform excessively. Protection i. Prevent staining of architecturally exposed steel by concrete, mortar, plaster, oils, paints or other foreign substances. ii. Do not use marking paint, crayons or other marking materials on exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 05120 Blackwell Bowick Partnership Limited 060449 Project No. 0701 - BS SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 05500 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Referenced Standards 1.3.1 ASTM A143-01 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement 1.3.2 ASTM A167-99 (2004) Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip 1.3.3 ASTM A307-00 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength 1.3.4 ASTM A325M-03 Standard Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints (Metric) 1.3.5 ASTM A380-99 (2005) Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems 1.3.6 ASTM A563M-04 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric) 1.3.7 ASTM A780-01 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings 1.3.8 CAN/CSA-S16.1-01 Limit States Design of Steel Structures 1.3.9 CSA W47.1-03 Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures Project No. 0701 - BS SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 05500 - 2 1.3.10 CSA W55.3-1965 (R1998) Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used In Buildings 1.3.11 CSA W59-03 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) 1.3.12 CSA-G40.20-04/G40.21-04 General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/ Structural Quality Steel 1.3.13 CSA-G164-M92 (R1998) Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles 1.3.14 ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531-88 Metal Bar Grating 1.4 Quality Assurance 1.4.1 Qualifications of Subcontractor: Execute work of this Section using a firm thoroughly conversant with governing laws, bylaws, and regulations. Use workmen skilled in work of this Section. 1.4.2 Welding .1 Welding of structural components shall be done only by fabricators certified by CSA Welding Qualification Codes, CSA W47 or W55.3 as applicable, for welding of steel and who shall perform welding to meet specified requirements of W59.1, as may apply. .2 Weld all stainless steel by the Argon Arc process. Grind smooth and polish joints, crevice free, and flush without seams. .3 Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible. Provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals. Make welds continuous at joints where entry of water into building or into voids of members or assemblies is possible. Grind welds in exposed locations smooth in a manner that will not leave blemishes on exposed surfaces. Join members generally by inert metal arc welding where practicable, using materials recommended by manufacturers of metals being welded. Remove flux completely following welding, and grind and polish joints smooth and clean. .4 Where galvanized steel is to be welded, provide adequate ventilation. If adequate ventilation is not available provide supplementary air circulation. In confined spaces use a respirator. .5 Touch up all uncoated weld areas. Project No. 0701 - BS SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 05500 - 3 1.5 Shop Drawings 1.5.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01001, of all the work of this Section, including large-scale detail of members and materials, of connection and jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges, thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing, as well as all other pertinent data and information, for Consultant's review before fabrication. 1.5.2 Shop drawings of stairs, self climbing truss and other load bearing and/or force-resulting components shall bear the seal and signature of an Ontario Professional Engineer. 1.6 Mock-Up 1.6.1 Erect a sample installation of expanded metal mesh wall where designated on site, two panels high (+/- 4m) x 2 panels wide (+/- 2m), complete with supporting angles, plates, HSS posts and vertically mounted light fixture with custom light shield. Coordinate with the Work of Division 16 as required for a complete installation. 1.7 Product Delivery, Storage, and Protection 1.7.1 Maintain protection provided for work of this Section from time of installation until final finishes are applied or to final cleanup. 1.7.2 Protect prime-painted and galvanized surfaces from damage. 1.7.3 Protect exposed surfaces of prefinished metal work which does not receive site finishing with protective coatings or wrappings. Use materials recommended by finishers or manufacturers of metals, to ensure that method is sufficiently protective, easily removable, and harmless to the finish. 1.7.4 Load and store galvanized articles as follows to prevent the formation of wet storage stain: .1 Stack the articles or bundle to allow air between the galvanized surfaces during transport from the supplier. Load the material in such a manner that continuous drainage could occur. .2 Raise the articles from the ground and separate with strip spacers to provide free access of air to most parts of the surface. Incline in a manner which will give continuous drainage. Under no circumstances will galvanized steel be allowed to rest on cinders, clinkers, wet soil or decaying vegetation. .3 Handle galvanized articles in such a manner as to avoid any mechanical damage and to minimize distortion. Project No. 0701 - BS SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 05500 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 General: Metals shall be free from defects which impair strength or durability, or which are visible. Metals shall be new, of best quality, and free from rust, or waves, or buckles, clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles. 2.1.2 Metals 2.1.3 .1 Steel: For structural sections hot rolled to meet requirements of CAN3-G40.21, Grade 50W for tubes and Grade 44W for flat shapes. For sheet cold-rolled furniture steel, double annealed, mill stretched and levelled, and fully pickled. Otherwise, steel shall be hot-rolled or cold-rolled of alloy to suit needs of fabrication, use, and appearance. .2 Stainless Steel: Type 304 alloy conforming to ASTM A167, No. 4 finish. Exposed Metal in Parking Garage: .1 2.1.4 2.1.5 All exposed metal and connections shall be galvanized. Refer to item 2.3.6 Galvanized Steel. Primers and Coatings .1 Interior Steel in Dry Areas: Quick drying oil alkyd conforming to CISC/CPMA 2.75. .2 Exterior Steel, Interior Steel in Unheated Areas, Steel Embedded in Concrete: Hot dip galvanized conforming to CSA G164. .3 Cold Galvanizing Coating Touch-Up: W.R. Meadows "Galvafroid" or Kerry Industries "Z.R.C." zinc rich coating or similar manufacturer containing minimum 90% zinc by weight. Fastenings: Use nuts and bolts conforming to ASTM A307, A325, and A563 as applicable. .1 For interior work, use cadmium-plated fastenings where other protection is not specified. .2 For exterior work and interior wet areas such as but not limited to shower rooms, change rooms use 300 series stainless steel. 2.1.6 Anchors and Shims For exposed anchorage of stainless steel, use stainless steel and otherwise to match metal anchored. For non-exposed work, anchors and shims may be galvanized steel. 2.1.7 Anchors and Shims Pipe: To ASTM A53, extra strong steel pipe for bollards. Project No. 0701 - BS 2.1.8 2.1.9 Page 05500 - 5 Expanded Metal Mesh [EXMP]: .1 Expanded galvanized metal mesh in 1.5mm thick rot-rolled carbon steel, pickled and oiled. Mesh shall be 34mm short way of diamond X 76.2mm long way of diamond. Maximum panel size of 1,220mm X 3,048mm with 34% open area. Mesh to be hot-dipped galvanized. Architectural Series, APEX style 12 mesh” by AMICO Canada or approved alternative. .2 Provide custom metal mesh partitions fabricated from galvanized steel angle framing with expanded metal mesh panels as detailed on drawings. .3 Fabricate posts from tubing, welded to 65 mm x 175 mm x 6 mm thick base plate. Provide necessary extensions and braces to securely anchor partitions to structure. .4 Install mesh panels 3048 mm, long way of diamond, running vertically with angled strands facing outwards towards parking garage. .5 Secure mesh to framing as indicated on drawings. Partition support assembly for Expanded Metal Mesh: .1 2.1.10 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Provide the following support assembly for the Expanded Metal Mesh [EXMP] screen assemblies, as indicated on drawings. .1 Embedded weld plates to receive b/o vertical posts .2 89x89mm vertical HSS posts .3 Slot shoes to receive t/o vertical posts .4 89x89mm horizontal HSS braces .5 64x64mm steel angles .6 Metal clips at top and bottom each screen .2 All metal and connections shall be galvanized .3 Provide painted finish [P-3 - dark grey] for all components. Steel plate to support vertical light fixtures w/ light shield at expanded metal mesh: 1. Provide 158mm wide x 1,270mm high x 6mm thk steel plate welded to vertical support post, and metal clips. 2. All metal and connections shall be galvanized 3. Provide painted finish [P-3 - dark grey] for all components. 4. Refer to electrical dwgs and specs for fixture [FC-4] w/ light shield Project No. 0701 - BS 2.1.11 2.1.12 2.1.13 2.1.14 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 05500 - 6 Steel plate to receive door operator at expanded metal mesh: 1. Provide at door [05B] 2. Provide 152mm tall x 1,003mm wide (standard header) x 6mm thk steel plate at interior header of frame, to receive surface-mounted door operator hardware equipment 3. Provide pin connections and weld to vertical or horizontal HSS posts supporting metal mesh 4. All metal and connections shall be galvanized 5. Provide painted finish [P-3 - dark grey] for all components. 6. Coordinate with Hardware Schedule Steel plates to receive door actuator and card-reader at expanded metal mesh: .1 Provide at inside of door [05B] for actuator and outside of [05B] for actuator + card-reader .2 Provide a 152mm tall x 150mm wide x 6mm thick steel plate for a surfacemounted actuator. Provide a 152mm tall x 300mm wide x 6mm thk steel plate for a surface-mounted door actuator and surface-mounted card-reader device. 1. Provide pin connections and weld to vertical or horizontal HSS posts supporting metal mesh 2. All metal and connections shall be galvanized 3. Provide painted finish [P-3 - dark grey] for all components. 4. Coordinate with Hardware Schedule Concrete filled Steel Bollards .1 150 mm outside diameter 6mm thick concrete filled bollards, complete with 210 x 210 x 10 Steel Base plate welded, and 4 x 13mm Stainless Steel anchor bolts .2 Refer to specifications Volume 3 Reference Reports, TPA detail STD-11, [TYPE 1] bollard .3 Base plate to be mounted to concrete garage slab. .4 Provide waterproofing and sloped asphalt over base plate, complete with Rodofoam and sealant as per waterproofing drawing detail C5/BR-A-501 Angle support for hollow metal and aluminum door frames Project No. 0701 - BS 2.1.15 2.1.16 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 05500 - 7 .1 Angles required for the support and anchorage of hollow metal and aluminium door frames to masonry openings are the responsibility of the miscellaneous metals section. .2 Hot dip galvanize exterior angles, and prime paint those occurring on interior. Lintels and Shelf Angles .1 Lintels or shelf angles secured to a structural steel member are the responsibility of structural steel trade. .2 Other lintels and shelf angles are the responsibility of the miscellaneous metals section. .3 Hot dip galvanize exterior lintels and shelf angles, and prime paint those occurring on interior. .4 Refer to Structural Drawing for lintel schedule. Hot dip galvanize shelf angles and bracing for support of masonry. Provide 6 mm expansion gaps at corners and between lengths of shelf angles. Bolt angles to allow for construction inaccuracies and tolerances unless shown as welded. At corners, bolts should not exceed 250 mm from corner. Maximum thickness of shims shall not exceed 9 mm. Stainless Steel Countertops .1 Countertop (SSC): Provide Stainless Steel as indicated on Room Finishes Schedule. Laminate stainless steel sheet to exterior grade plywood with acceptable laminating adhesive. 2.1.17 Bituminous Paint: Alkali-resisting to meet specified requirements of CAN/CGSB-1.108, Type 2. 2.1.18 Lockers: “Ambassador Locker, or approved equal, Stainless Steel Coin operated, conforming to CAN/CGSB-44.40, 300 mm wide x 450 380 mm deep lockers in single tier(s) as indicated on drawings. Coin operated and master keyed. Height varies as indicated on drawings. Provide options including: Handicap Accessibility, Stainless Steel finished end panels, sloping top and fillers. 2.2 Design and Fabrication 2.2.1 Generally .1 Fabricate work of this Section with machinery and tools specifically designed for the intended manufacturing processes, and with skilled tradesmen. .2 Fit and assemble work in the shop. When this is not possible, make a trial shop assembly. Project No. 0701 - BS 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 05500 - 8 Construction .1 Fabricate work with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors, and fasteners of adequate strength to withstand intended use, and with allowable design factors imposed by Jurisdictional Authorities. .2 Ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion, and permanent deformation. Assembly .1 Accurately cut, machine, and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions between components fit together tightly, and in true planes. .2 Fasten work with concealed methods, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. .3 Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible, and cut off bolts flush with nuts. Countersink bolt heads and provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. .4 Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals, and continuous at joints where entry of water into building or into voids of members or assemblies is possible. Continuously grind and make smooth welds in exposed locations. .5 Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblies with surrounding work. .6 Plug galvanizing vent holes with pear shaped fishing weights hammered in place and filed smooth. .7 Fabricate shims of galvanized steel of sizes required. Finish Work .1 Provide holes and connections for work installed under other Sections of this Specification. .2 Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials, including holes. .3 Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles, and other similar work. Prime Painting of Steel: Clean all loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld flux, and spatter from work after fabrication. Grind smooth sharp projections. Prepare for prime painting by blast cleaning to SSPC-SP6. Apply to steel a shop prime coat of paint. Work paint into corners, and onto open areas smoothly. Deliver work to site with primer undamaged. Paint all surfaces except those to be welded in field, encased in concrete, or that are machined or galvanized. Paint surfaces that are inaccessible to finish field painting with two coats of primer. Project No. 0701 - BS 2.2.6 2.2.7 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 05500 - 9 Galvanized Steel .1 Pre-clean steel work in accordance with accepted methods to produce an acceptable surface for quality hot dip galvanizing. .2 Galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after fabrication by the hot dip process in accordance with CSA G164. Minimum coating Z275. .3 Galvanize bolts, nuts and washers and iron and steel hardware components in accordance with CSA G164. .4 Safeguard products against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A143. .5 Design features which may lead to difficulties during galvanizing shall be pointed out prior to dipping. .6 The composition of metal in the galvanizing bath shall be not less than 98.0% zinc. Mechanical Damage: Repair areas damaged by welding, flame cutting, or during handling, transport or erection (in accordance with ASTM A780) using one of the following methods whenever the damage exceeds 4.7 mm in width: .1 Cold Galvanizing Compound .1 Ensure surfaces to be reconditioned with cold galvanized zinc-rich compound are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease and corrosion products. .2 Power clean areas to be repaired to near white metal condition. To ensure that a smooth reconditioned coating can be effected, extend surface preparation into the undamaged galvanized compound. .3 Touch up using specified cold galvanizing compound. .4 Spray or brush apply paint in minimum two coats until a dry film thickness of 4 mils minimum has been achieved. Apply a finish coat of aluminum paint to provide a colour blend with the surrounding galvanizing. Verify coating thickness by measurements with a magnetic or electromagnetic gauge. .2 Treat galvanized surfaces that are cut, welded, or threaded with three coats of cold galvanizing compound immediately following damage to galvanized protection. .3 Coating shall be continuous, adherent, as smooth and evenly distributed as possible and free from any defect that is detrimental to the stated end use of the coated article. .4 Determine the integrity of the coating by visual inspection and coating thickness measurements. Project No. 0701 - BS .5 2.2.8 2.2.9 SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 05500 - 10 The galvanized coating shall be sufficiently adherent to withstand normal handling during transport and erection. Wet Storage Stain: Remove any wet storage stain if formed and discovered prior to leaving the galvanizer's plant, unless late pick up or acceptance of delivery has necessitated the material being stored in unfavourable conditions. In any event, remove wet storage stain before installation so that premature failure of the coating will not occur. Remove wet storage stain as follows: .1 Arrange the objects so that their surfaces dry rapidly. .2 Remove light deposits by means of a stiff bristle (not wire) brush. Remove heavier deposits by brushing with a 5% solution of sodium or potassium dichromate with the addition of 0.1% by volume of concentrated sulphuric acid. Apply with a stiff bristle brush and leave for about 30 seconds before thoroughly rinsing and drying. Alternatively a proprietary product such as Oakite Highlite, which is intended for this purpose may be used according to manufacturer's recommendations. Stainless Steel Work .1 The stainless steel fabricator shall take all necessary precautions to safeguard against latent surface discolouration due to disturbance of the natural protective oxide coating of the material or to contamination from other sources. The fabrication process shall include proper and adequate cleaning in accordance with the recommended practices set out in ASTM A380. .2 Workmanship shall be the best standard practice for this type of work. Do all stainless steel work in accordance with NAAMM, Code of Standard Practice for the Metal Industry, Workmanship, Class 1. .3 Do all stainless steel fabrication in clean shops, located away from areas where carbon steel is burnt, ground, or cut with abrasive wheels to ensure that carbon steel dust will not be embedded into the stainless steel. .4 Prior to fabrication of stainless steel clean tools and dies which have been used on carbon steels. .5 Ensure tools and dies used for forming and cutting stainless steel are free of nicks and other damage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Inspection of Site 3.1.1 Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction around obstructions and projections in place, or yet to be put in place to suit service locations, and inaccuracies of construction. 3.2 Installation Project No. 0701 - BS SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS Page 05500 - 11 3.2.1 Install work plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together and to surrounding work. 3.2.2 Work includes anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields, toggles, straps, sleeves, brackets, clips, shims and other items necessary for secure installation, as required to support and/or resist loads and forces, and as required by Jurisdictional Authorities. 3.2.3 Provide anchors at 600 mm o.c. for cast-in-place work unless shown otherwise. 3.2.4 Attach work to wood by screws through countersunk holes in metal. 3.2.5 Attach work to masonry with lead plugs and non-corrosion fastenings to support load with a safety factor of 3. 3.2.6 Insulate between dissimilar metals, or between metals and masonry or concrete with bituminous paint to prevent electrolysis. 3.2.7 Caulk between components installed under this work. Caulking materials as specified in Section 07900. Caulking between miscellaneous metal work and adjacent work of others is included in the work of Section 07900. 3.3 Patching and Refinishing 3.3.1 After erection, touch up prime paint and galvanized finishes damaged or removed during installation. 3.3.2 Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool-marked components and replace with new. 3.3.3 Refinish shop-applied finishes in field only with approval of Consultant. 3.3.4 Clean off dirt on surfaces resulting from installation work. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 05510 STEEL STAIRS, HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND RAILINGS Page 05510 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Referenced Standards 1.3.1 ASTM A53/A53M-06 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless 1.3.2 ASTM A143-01 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement 1.3.3 ASTM A167-99 (2004) Standard Practice for Stainless Steel and HeatResisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip 1.3.4 ASTM A307-00 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength 1.3.5 ASTM A325M-03 Standard Specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints (Metric) 1.3.6 ASTM A519-03 Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing 1.3.7 ASTM A563M-04 Standard Specification for Carbon And Alloy Steel Nuts 1.3.8 CAN/CSA-S16.1-01 Limit States Design of Steel Structures 1.3.9 CSA W47.1-03 Certification of Companies for the Fusion Welding of Steel Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 05510 STEEL STAIRS, HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND RAILINGS Page 05510 - 2 1.3.10 CSA W55.3-1965 (R1998) Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used In Buildings 1.3.11 CSA W59-03 Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) 1.3.12 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04/G40.21-04 General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steels 1.3.13 CAN/CSA-G164-M92 (R1998) Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles 1.3.14 CISC/CPMA 2-75 Canadian Institute of Steel Construction/Canadian Paint Manufacturers Association-A Quick Drying Primer for Use On Structural Steel 1.4 Quality Assurance 1.4.1 Qualifications of Subcontractor: Execute work of this Section using a firm thoroughly conversant with governing laws, bylaws, and regulations. Use workmen skilled in this work. 1.4.2 Welding .1 Welding of structural components shall be done only by fabricators certified by CSA W47.1 or W55.3 as applicable, for welding of steel, and who shall perform welding to conform to W59. .2 Perform stainless steel welding using the Argon Arc process. .3 Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible. Provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals. Make welds continuous at joints where entry of water into building or into voids of members or assemblies is possible. Grind welds in exposed locations smooth in a manner that will not leave blemishes on exposed surfaces. Join members generally by inert metal arc welding where practicable, using materials recommended by manufacturers of metals being welded. Remove flux completely following welding, and grind and polish joints smooth and clean. .4 Where galvanized steel is to be welded, provide adequate ventilation. If adequate ventilation is not available, provide supplementary air circulation. .5 Touch up all uncoated weld areas. 1.5 Design 1.5.1 Design work of this section in accordance with the Ontario Building Code. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 05510 STEEL STAIRS, HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND RAILINGS Page 05510 - 3 1.5.2 The details on the drawings show the general arrangement of components to provide the desired appearance. The fabricator shall employ a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario to design the details of the railings and stairs, and the connections to the building structure, to satisfy all the requirements of the Ontario Building Code. 1.6 Submittals 1.6.1 Shop Drawings .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01001, of all this work, including large-scale detail of members and materials, of connection and jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges, thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing, as well as all other pertinent data and information, for Consultant's review before fabrication. .2 Shop drawings for work of this section shall bear the seal and signature of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario. .3 Submit sample pieces of wire mesh and trimwork. 1.6.2 Mock-Up and Samples: Construct 1 bay mock-up of balustrade of each type as detailed on Drawings, at a location on site as directed by the Consultant. Mock-up shall be approved by the Consultant before fabrication commences. When approved, mock-up shall be left on the site until completion of work. Approved mock-up may become part of the completed work. 1.7 Product Delivery, Storage and Protection 1.7.1 Provide and maintain protection for work of this Section. 1.7.2 Protect exposed surfaces of metal work with protective coatings or wrappings. Use materials recommended by finishers or manufacturers of metals, to ensure that method is sufficiently protective, easily removable, and harmless to the finish. 1.7.3 Raise the articles from the ground and separate with strip spacers to provide free access of air to most parts of the surface. Incline in a manner which will give continuous drainage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 General .1 Metals shall be free from defects which impair strength or durability, or which are visible. Metals shall be new, of best quality, and free from rust, or waves, or buckles, clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles. .2 Select materials for surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes when exposed to view in finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces which Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 05510 STEEL STAIRS, HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND RAILINGS Page 05510 - 4 exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, "oil-canning", stains, discolorations, dents or other imperfections on finished units will not be acceptable. 2.1.2 Structural Steel: Hot rolled to meet requirements of CAN3-G40.21, Grade 300W or better. Sheet: cold-rolled furniture steel, double annealed, mill stretched and levelled, and fully pickled. Otherwise, steel shall be hot-rolled or cold-rolled of alloy to suit needs of fabrication, use, and appearance. 2.1.3 Stainless Steel Wire, Sheets and Plates: AISI Type 304, austenitic grade, '18-8' composition, No. 4 finish. For handrails use minimum 42 ksi yield strength stainless steel. 2.1.4 Primers and Coatings 2.1.5 .1 Interior Steel in Dry Areas: Quick drying oil alkyd conforming to CISC/CPMA 2.75. .2 Exterior Steel, Interior Steel in Unheated Areas, Steel Embedded in Concrete: Hot dip galvanized conforming to CSA G164, minimum Z275 coating. .3 Galvanized Coating Touch-Up: W.R. Meadows "Galvafroid" or Kerry Industries "Z.R.C." zinc rich coating or similar manufacturer containing minimum 90% zinc by weight. Fastenings: Nuts and bolts shall conform to ASTM A307, A325, and A563 as applicable. .1 For interior work: cadmium-plated fastenings where other protection is not specified. .2 For stainless steel: Type 400 stainless steel. 2.1.6 Anchors and Shims: For exposed anchorage of stainless steel, use stainless steel and otherwise to match metal anchored. For non-exposed work, anchors and shims may be galvanized steel. 2.1.7 Pipe and Tube 2.1.8 .1 Ferrous steel pipe: to ASTM A53, Type S- Seamless, Grades A and B. .2 Stainless steel pipe: ASTM A167 Type 304, austenitic grade, '18-8' composition, No. 4 finish. For handrails use minimum 42 ksi yield strength stainless steel. .3 Ferrous steel square tube: to ASTM A519, cold drawn, seamless and welded. Non-Shrinking Grout: "In-Pakt" by C.C. Chemicals, "V-3" by W.R. Meadows or "M-Bed" by Sika Canada Inc. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 05510 STEEL STAIRS, HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND RAILINGS 2.2 Design and Fabrication Requirements 2.2.1 Generally 2.2.2 Page 05510 - 5 .1 Fabricate this work with machinery and tools specifically designed for the intended manufacturing processes, and with skilled tradesmen. .2 Fit and assemble work in the shop. When this is not possible, make a trial shop assembly. .3 Materials, component sizes, gauges of metals, anchorage and fastenings shall be of adequate strength to withstand the intended use within allowable design factors, as required by the Ontario Building Code, to ensure that all work is free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion and permanent deformation. Stairs, ladders and handrails shall support applicable live loads specified in the Ontario Building Code. .4 The details on the drawings show the general arrangement of components to provide the desired appearance. The fabricator shall employ an Ontario Professional Structural Engineer to design the details of the railings and stairs, and the connections to the building structure, to satisfy all the requirements of the Ontario Building Code. .5 Ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion, and permanent deformation. Stainless Steel Work .1 Take all necessary precautions to safeguard against latent surface discolouration due to disturbance of the natural protective oxide coating of the material or to contamination from other sources. The fabrication process shall include proper and adequate cleaning. .2 Workmanship shall be the best standard practice for this type of work. .3 Do all stainless steel fabrication in clean shops, located away from areas where carbon steel is burnt, ground, or cut with abrasive wheels to ensure that carbon steel dust will not be embedded into the stainless steel. .4 Prior to fabrication of stainless steel, clean tools and dies which have been used on carbon steels. .5 Discolouration of welded surfaces will not be accepted. .6 Ensure tools and dies use for forming and cutting stainless steel are free of nicks and other damage. .7 Grind smooth and polish joints crevice free, flush, without seams, and to match base metal in all respects. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 05510 STEEL STAIRS, HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND RAILINGS 2.2.3 2.2.4 Page 05510 - 6 Assembly .1 Accurately cut, machine, and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions between components fit together tightly, and in true planes. .2 Fasten work with concealed methods, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. .3 Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible, and cut off bolts flush with nuts. Countersink bolt heads and provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. Weld pins to stair pans and landings where stone is the finished surface. .4 Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals, and continuous at joints where entry of water into building or into voids of members or assemblies is possible. Continuously grind and make smooth welds in exposed locations. .5 Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblies with surrounding work. .6 Fabricate shims of galvanized steel of sizes required. Finish Work .1 Provide holes and connections for work installed under other Sections of this Specification. .2 Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials, including holes. .3 Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles, and other similar work. 2.2.5 Prime Painting of Ferrous Steel: Clean all loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld flux, and spatter from work after fabrication. Grind smooth sharp projections. Prepare for prime painting by blast cleaning to SSPC-SP6 standard. Apply a shop prime coat of paint. Work paint into corners, and onto open areas smoothly. Deliver work to site with primer undamaged. Paint all surfaces except those to be welded in the field, or those encased in concrete. Give surfaces that are inaccessible to finish field painting two coats of primer. 2.2.6 Galvanized Steel .1 Galvanize all exterior ferrous items: Use minimum Z275 coating. .2 Pre-clean steel work in accordance with accepted methods to produce an acceptable surface for quality hot dip galvanizing. .3 Galvanize steel members, fabrications, and assemblies after fabrication by the hot dip process in accordance with CSA G164. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 05510 STEEL STAIRS, HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND RAILINGS Page 05510 - 7 .4 Galvanize bolts, nuts and washers and iron and steel hardware components in accordance with CSA G164. .5 Safeguard products against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A143. .6 Design features which may lead to difficulties during galvanizing shall be pointed out prior to dipping. 2.3 Steel Railings, Handrails, Guardrails 2.3.1 Provide steel handrails, railings, guardrails, wire mesh balustrade and clips, rod pickets, flanges and brackets to details shown. Min. wall thickness 12 ga. 2.3.2 Fabricate wood handrail brackets from stainless steel for mounting to existing concrete as indicated on drawings. 2.3.3 Provide welded wire mesh balustrade panels where indicated. Fabricate panels of wire mesh secured into channel frame. Weld framed panel to uprights, with connecting plates. 2.3.4 Form rail-to-end post connections and all changes in rail direction by mitred joints or radius bends as applicable. 2.3.5 Remove burrs from all exposed cut edges. 2.3.6 Form bends and wall returns to uniform radius, free from buckles and twists, with smooth finished surfaces, or use prefabricated bends. 2.3.7 Close exposed ends of pipe and tube by welding metal closure in place or by use of prefabricated fittings. 2.3.8 For posts set in concrete, furnish matching sleeves. 2.3.9 Work shall be one piece or in as long lengths as possible. Join pipe sections using concealed connectors. 2.3.10 Weld all field joints, grind and polish smooth to match base metal. 2.4 Stairs 2.4.1 The method of stair construction shall conform to the Consultant's drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Framing shall not restrict required width or headroom. Weld all connections where possible; where not possible, bolted connections will be permitted, but bolts shall be cut off flush with nuts and made as inconspicuous as possible. 2.4.2 Fabricate stairs to facilitate erection as building is ready to receive them. 2.4.3 Extend handrails horizontally at sides of stairs and ramps in accordance with O.B.C. PART 3 - EXECUTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 05510 STEEL STAIRS, HANDRAILS, GUARDS AND RAILINGS Page 05510 - 8 3.1 Inspection of Site 3.1.1 Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction around obstructions and projections in place, or yet to be put in place to suit service locations, and inaccuracies of construction. 3.2 Installation 3.2.1 Install work plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together and to surrounding work. 3.2.2 Work includes anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields, toggles, straps, sleeve brackets, clips, shims and other items necessary for secure installation, as required to support and/or resist loads and forces, and as required by Jurisdictional Authorities. 3.2.3 Hand to appropriate trades, items over for casting into concrete or building into structure together with setting templates. 3.2.4 Insulate between dissimilar metals, or between metals and masonry or concrete with bituminous paint to prevent electrolysis. 3.2.5 In concrete construction cast vertical pipes into sleeves set into concrete at least 150 mm. Fill with non-shrinking grout. In steel construction weld to plates, stringers or other structural member. 3.2.6 Provide temporary supports and bracing required to position stair assemblies. 3.2.7 Caulk between components installed under this work. Caulking materials as specified in Section 07900. Caulking between miscellaneous metal work and adjacent work of others is included in the work of Section 07900. 3.2.8 Wood handrails to be installed under the Work of Section 06100. 3.3 Patching and Refinishing 3.3.1 After erection, touch up prime paint, and shop applied coatings and finishes (prefinishes) damaged or removed during installation. 3.3.2 Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool-marked components and replace with new. 3.3.3 Clean off dirt on surfaces resulting from installation work. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 06100 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Referenced Standards 1.3.1 CSA-B111-1974 (R1998) Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples 1.3.2 CSA-0121-M1978 (R1998) Douglas Fir Plywood 1.3.3 CSA-0141-05 Softwood Lumber 1.3.4 CSA-0151-04 Canadian Softwood Plywood 1.3.5 CAN/CSA 080 Series-00 Wood Preservation 1.3.6 CAN/ULC-S102-M88 (R2000) Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies 1.3.7 CAN/CSA G164-M92 Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Objects 1.3.8 CAN/CSA-080.27-M89 Fire Retardant Treatment of Plywood by Pressure Processes 1.3.9 CAN/CSA 086-01 Engineering Design in Wood 1.3.10 NFPA 80-1999 Fire Doors and Windows. 1.4 Submittals 1.4.1 LEED Submittals: Submit schedules and supporting documentation in accordance with Section 01611 for approval by LEED Consultant prior to ordering of materials. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 06100 - 2 1.5 Quality Assurance 1.5.1 N.L.G.A. 1991 National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. 1.5.2 Identify lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Administration Board. 1.5.3 Plywood identification: by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA Standards. 1.5.4 Each panel of plywood required to be fire retardant treated to bear ULC label indicating Flame Spread Classification (FSC), and smoke developed. 1.6 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 1.6.1 When it is required that wood maintain dimensional stability and tolerances, to ensure accurate installation of later work, store and install it only in dry areas and when no further installation of moist materials is contemplated. 1.6.2 Accept delivery of pressed steel door frames. Be responsible for any damage to frames from time of delivery until accepted by the Consultant after installation. 1.6.3 Provide dry storage areas for rough carpentry materials. Stack lumber 150 mm clear of floor. 1.6.4 Protect fire-retardant materials against high humidity and moisture. 1.6.5 Install temporary wood protection strips at door jambs and similar locations vulnerable to damage. 1.6.6 Cover materials stored on site with tarpaulins or polyethylene sheets to prevent moisture, absorption and impairment of structural and aesthetic-properties. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 LEED Requirements .1 LEED Requirements for FSC Wood: All wood materials and assemblies are to be FSC Certified as defined in Section 01611 LEED Product Requirements. .2 LEED Requirements for Composite Wood: All composite wood products and agrifiber products (including core materials) installed within the building weather proofing system must be free of added Urea Formaldahyde as specified in Section 01359 – IAQ Management. Project No. 0701-BS 2.1.2 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 06100 - 3 Except as indicated or specified otherwise lumber shall be softwood S4S, SPF species moisture content (MC) not greater than 19% at time of installation in accordance with the following standards; .1 CSA 0141 .2 NLGA Standard grading rules for Canadian Lumber. 2.1.3 Machine stress - rated lumber is acceptable for all purposes. 2.1.4 Lumber .1 S-DRY, graded and stamped to National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. .1 Studs: spruce, pine or fir (SPF), 121c. "STUD". .2 Blocking, furring, strapping, curbs, battens, nailers, bracing, bridging, and cants: spruce, pine or fir (SPF), standard or better grade. .3 Cedar: NLGA, Select Cedar, Clear or better, Western Red Cedar, surfaced, kiln dried. 2.1.5 Pressure Applied Wood Preservative: Pressure applied CCA preservative with 6.5 kg/m³ average retention for roof woodwork and wood in contact with floor slabs or walls in areas to be waterproofed, and 4 kg/m³ elsewhere; "Outdoor Wood" by Hickson Building Products or "Green Pentox" by Osmose Wood Preserving Company, or "C50" by Timber Specialties Limited. Apply preservative in accordance with CAN3-080 Series. 2.1.6 Surface Applied Wood Preservative: Copper napthenate of 10% pentachlorophenol solution, water repellant preservative. 2.1.7 Fire Retardant Treatment of Lumber and Plywood : "Dricon" by J.A. Biewer or equivalent, conforming to CAN2-080.20 and CAN2-080.27 to provide a flame spread rating of 25 or less, in accordance with ULC test method CAN4/ULC-S102. 2.1.8 Plywood: Conforming to CSA 0121, "G1S" Douglas Fir. 2.1.9 Glue Laminated Wood: Glue laminated wood is not acceptable at Handrails. 2.1.10 Nails, Spikes, Staples and Other Connectors: to CSA B111, galvanized for exterior work, interior highly humid areas and for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere. Use spiral thread nails except where specified otherwise. 2.1.11 Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Screws and Pin Type Fasteners: Hot dip galvanized to CAN/CSA G164 for exterior work and for pressure preservative treated lumber. Stainless steel for Ipe. Elsewhere for sight exposed surfaces, prime paint. Use surface fastenings of following types, except where specified type is indicated: .1 To hollow masonry, gypsum board and panel surfaces use toggle bolts. Project No. 0701-BS .2 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 06100 - 4 To solid masonry and concrete use expansion shield with lag screw, or lead plug with wood screw. 2.2 Fabrication 2.2.1 Comply with CAN3-086 or CAN3-086.1 for all fabrication and assembly of structural components off site, or on site. 2.2.2 Design construction details for expansion and contraction of materials. 2.2.3 Machine sand surfaces exposed in the finished work. Hand sand to an even smooth surface free from scratches. 2.2.4 Pressure fire retardant treat lumber prior to final milling. Each piece shall bear the mark of Underwriters Laboratories of Canada indicating conformance to CAN4/ULC-S102. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Generally 3.1.1 Lay out work carefully and to accommodate work of others. Cut and fit accurately. Erect in position indicated on drawings. Align, level, square, plumb and secure work permanently in place. Join work only over solid backing. 3.1.2 Bore holes true to line, and to same size as bolts. Drive bolts into place for snug fit, and use plates or washers for boltheads and nut bearings. Turn up bolts and lag screws tightly when installed, and again just before being concealed by other work or at completion of work. 3.1.3 Cooperate with work of other Sections to ensure that unity of actions will ensure orderly progress to meet construction schedule. 3.1.4 Provide anchors, bolts and inserts required for attachment of the work of this Section to those performing the work of other Sections, and who are responsible for their installation. 3.1.5 Work shall include such rough hardware as nails, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, clips, hangers, connectors, and strap iron required for installation of work, and all operating hardware required on work of this Section for temporary work. 3.2 Grounds, Blocking, Strapping, Furring, Sleepers and Nailers 3.2.1 Do not regard grounds, blocking, furring, and such other fastening provisions as shown on drawings as exact or complete. Provide required provisions for fastenings, located and secured to suit site conditions and adequate for intended support. 3.2.2 Cut fastening work into lengths as long as practicable, and with square ends. Erect work plumb, in true planes, and fastened rigidly in place. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 06100 - 5 3.2.3 Rough bucks for openings jambs, heads, and sills shall be minimum 50 mm thick, and of width of casings, or as otherwise indicated. Set bucks plumb, level, and anchored securely in place. 3.2.4 For mirrors installed over concrete block without separating gypsum board layer, install wood blocking at 450 mm o.c. behind mirrors. 3.2.5 Provide wood furring and strapping for applied facings, caseworks, pilaster strips, etc. In drywall construction build in before gypsum board is applied to studs. 3.2.6 Except where steel is specifically shown, provide wood blocking and supports in metal stud partitions for fastening of items anchored to stud partitions. Provide wood blocking and supplementary supports in metal studs supporting counters, lockers, washroom accessories, and similar items. 3.2.7 Provide 16 mm thick fire retardant treated plywood fastened to metal stud framing, at mirrors in gypsum board partitions. 3.2.8 Coordinate with Section 09250, for the installation of wood blocking for fastening of wall mounted accessories and casework. 3.2.9 Provide plywood blocking to receive window blinds. 3.3 Wood Preservative 3.3.1 Use pressure impregnated material for lumber and plywood used in roofing work and for items previously specified in "Materials". Treat all bolt holes and freshly cut surfaces with a minimum of 2 coats of 10% CCA concentrate. 3.3.2 For material cut or bored after pressure treatment, treat surfaces of material with surface applied wood preservative, before installation. 3.3.3 Apply preservative by dipping, or by brush to completely saturate and maintain wet film on surface for minimum 3 minute soak on lumber and one minute soak on plywood. 3.3.4 Re-treat surfaces exposed by cutting, trimming or boring with liberal brush application of preservative before installation. 3.4 Curbs, Bases, Supports, Blocking and Parapets 3.4.1 Install plywood, and blocking at roofs as indicated on drawings, secure permanently to structure with galvanized 9 mm bolts. Locate fastenings within 300 mm from ends and uniformly spaced between. Space bolts at 1.2 m and nails at 600 mm centres except where indicated otherwise. Trim and level to accommodate cambers, falls and thickness of insulation, and to receive flashings and applied roofing. 3.5 Installation of Hollow Metal Steel Frames Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 06100 - 6 3.5.1 Set frames plumb and square in their exact location. Firmly block and brace to prevent shifting. Shim up where required to ensure proper alignment dimensions from finished floor to head of frame. Install temporary wood spreaders at mid-height. 3.5.2 Where pressed steel frames are installed in concrete walls, secure frames to concrete using lead expansion shields and anchor bolts through pipe sleeves. Perform drilling of concrete as required. Fill recessed bolt heads flush to frame face with approved metal filler and sand smooth. 3.5.3 Install fire rated door frames in accordance with Chapters 2 and 3 of NFPA 80 as specified in OBC. 3.6 Fire Retardant Treated Furring and Plywood Backing 3.6.1 Blocking and framing in ceiling spaces, partitions and bulkheads and plywood backboards supporting electrical panels, disconnects, splitters and other electrical devices shall be fire retardant treated. 3.6.2 Do not expose treated material to dampness between the time the material is treated and the time the painter's finish is applied. Carefully sand surfaces which show evidence of salt deposits to remove such evidence before finish is applied. Provide identification that these specifications have been complied with on large items, and bundles of small items. This requirement also applies to all fire retardant treated materials. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 06210 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FINISH HARDWARE Page 06210 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Work Included In This Section 1.3.1 Installation of hollow metal doors. 1.3.2 Installation of finish hardware for hollow metal doors, and aluminum doors. 1.3.3 Installation of door grilles. 1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 1.4.1 Accept delivery of doors and finish hardware. 1.4.2 Inspect doors for damage, upon delivery to the site. Hollow metal doors which cannot be readily corrected by sanding, shall be promptly returned to the manufacturer. 1.4.3 Store doors in a dry and clean location. Store in a temperature and humidity controlled area. Stack 150 mm off the floor. 1.4.4 Be responsible for any damage to doors and hardware from time of delivery until accepted by Owner after installation. 1.5 Jobsite Control and Distribution of Hardware 1.5.1 Provide locked room for the storage of hardware at the job and a person responsible for the control and distribution of hardware. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 06210 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FINISH HARDWARE Page 06210 - 2 1.6 Single Source Responsibility 1.6.1 It is the intent of this section to establish a single, competent source to be responsible for the installation of finish hardware listed in Section 08710. Faulty installation of electronic hardware shall therefore be traced back to this section, not to Division 16. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation 3.1.1 Finish Hardware .1 The installers shall obtain a copy of ANSI/DHI A115.1G-94, "Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware". It is the intent of this document to be used as a reference guide in the proper handling, storage, and installation of finishing hardware, and doors and frames. This document can be obtained through the Door and Hardware Institute. .2 Other trades installing hardware must follow all manufacturers instructions including door closer adjustment, handing of locksets as required, and degree of door swing. Advise the Consultants if door frames are not square and plumb and prevent proper door installation. .3 Mount hardware to suit door elevations. Unless otherwise directed by the Consultant, install hardware at the following mounting heights: Locksets Exit Device Push/Pull Deadlock 1015mm 1015mm 1065mm 1200mm .4 When requested, the hardware supplier will instruct the installer as to how various newer or unusual items that are required to be installed for proper performance. .5 Set, fit and adjust hardware according to manufacturer's directions. Hardware shall operate freely. After initial installation, adjust door closers for closing and latching speed and panic devices for proper latching and again following the completion of the building HVAC balancing and commissioning. Protect installed hardware from damage and paint spotting. .6 Predrill kickplates and doors before attachment of plates. Apply with waterresistant adhesive and countersunk stainless steel screws. Project No. 0701-BS 3.1.3 Page 06210 - 3 .7 Locate hardware in accordance with requirements specified in Section 08710. .8 Thresholds: Site measure openings before cutting. Set thresholds on two continuous beads of caulking conforming to Section 07900. .9 Door Closers and Holders: Install door closers in such a manner that door opening is unaffected, and that maximum swing is permitted. .10 Weatherstripping of Doors .11 3.1.2 SECTION 06210 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FINISH HARDWARE .1 Install weatherstripping effectively to tightly seal entire perimeter of doors. Secure in place with non-ferrous screws, in accurate alignment. .2 Maintain integrity of weatherseal at head of doors fitted with closers. Adapt weatherstripping as required to achieve specified performance and provide any necessary accessories. Electronic Hardware .1 Install all electronic handicap operator components, security components such as magnetic locks, door status switches, card readers, processors, transformers, and other electric devices. .2 All wiring will be supplied and installed by Electrical Division 16 including conduit, boxes and other electrical appurtenances, including connections and terminations. Be responsible for ensuring that all wiring work is done in accordance with the suppliers wiring diagrams and directions. .3 Arrange for testing and commissioning of system by the distributor of the system. Submit a copy of reports to the Consultant. .4 Note: When installing electric strikes, it is imperative that doors are perfectly aligned to enable the bolt to properly close. Also ensure that rubber silencers do not impair the proper strike action required. Adjust or remove silencers as necessary. Hollow Metal and Aluminum Swing Doors .1 Hang doors to swing easily and freely on their hinges, to remain stationary in any position, and to close tightly and evenly on frames without binding. .2 Provide 2 mm clearance at head and jambs, 3mm clearance between pairs of doors, or panels and no more than 10 mm at floor. Provide clearance for intended finish flooring. Door Grilles: Install grilles in interior doors. Screw securely in position using stainless steel screws. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 06210 INSTALLATION OF DOORS AND FINISH HARDWARE Page 06210 - 4 3.2 Adjusting and Cleaning of Finish Hardware 3.2.1 Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure proper operation and function of unit. 3.2.2 Lubricate moving parts as recommended by hardware manufacturer. Use graphite type lubricant if no other is recommended. 3.2.3 Repair or replace defective materials and units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly. Re-install items found improperly installed. 3.2.4 Prior to date of Substantial Performance, re-adjust and re-lubricate as necessary. 3.2.5 Instruct Owner's designated personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and finishes at time of final hardware adjustment. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07131 RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Page 07131 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 Toronto Parking Authority (TPA) Requirements 1.2.1 Alterations to the waterproofing system over the existing parking structure must adhere to the Toronto Parking Authority’s (TPA) specifications. Refer to Volume 3 Specifications, Reference Reports “07120 Asphalt Waterproofing Paving TPA” 1.3 LEED Requirements 1.3.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.3.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.4 Referenced Standards 1.4.1 CAN/CGSB-37.50-M89 Hot Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and Waterproofing 1.4.2 CAN/CGSB-37.51-M90 Application Rubberized Asphalt, Hot Applied, for Roofing and Waterproofing 1.4.3 CGSB-37-GP-9Ma Primer Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing. 1.4.4 Work of this Section shall be done by a franchised applicator approved by the manufacturer of the waterproof membrane. 1.5 Delivery and Storage 1.5.1 Deliver materials to the site undamaged, in original sealed containers, clearly indicating the name of the manufacturer and product. 1.5.2 Store solvent-base liquids and primer away from excessive heat and open flame. 1.5.3 Store primer at temperature above 5C. 1.6 Protection Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07131 RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Page 07131 - 2 1.6.1 Take extreme care not to damage waterproof membrane once it is applied. Cover membrane completely with protection board unless specified otherwise. Protective covering shall be approved by manufacturer of waterproof membrane. Do not allow construction traffic on membrane without first applying protection. 1.7 Extended Warranty 1.7.1 Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01001, covering the repair or replacement of defective work for a period of 4 years from the expiration of the one-year warranty stated in the General Conditions. 1.7.2 Total warranty period shall be 5 years. 1.8 Pre-Construction Meeting 1.8.1 Well in advance of field work, arrange for a project site meeting of all parties associated with work of this Section. Meeting shall include the Contractor, waterproof membrane supplier and Consultant. 1.8.2 Meeting shall review specifications for work included under this Section and determine a complete understanding of requirements and responsibilities relative to work included, storage and handling of materials, materials to be used, installation of materials, sequence and quality control, project staffing, project restrictions, and other matters affecting the construction, so as to permit compliance with the intent of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 The following is a full protection system for application at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 2.1.2 Rubberized Asphalt Membrane .1 General: "6125" by Hydrotech Membrane Corp., "790-11" by Bakor, “Tremproof 6100” by Tremco, or Carlisle “CCW-500R”. .2 Air Shafts: Use rubberized asphalt in bottoms; on walls, use Bakor "770-06", lapped into rubberized asphalt. 2.1.3 Primer: Cut back, unfilled asphalt, conforming to CGSB 37-GP-9Ma. 2.1.4 Flexible Sheet: Supplied by membrane manufacturer as part of system; standard or heavy duty membrane depending on joint condition. 2.1.5 Torchable Base Sheet Flashing: Smooth surface, SBS modified bitumen membrane reinforced with 180 gm/m2 non-woven polyester, "Sopralene Flam 180" by Soprema Inc. or the equivalent manufactured by Bakor distributed by Lexsuco Limited, or Carlisle. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07131 RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Page 07131 - 3 2.1.6 Protection Board: "Hydro-Shield" by Hydrotech Membrane Corp., "990-31" by Bakor, "Tremco 2450" by Tremco, or equivalent by W.R. Meadows. 2.1.7 Joint Rubber Sheet Covering: Elastomeric material consisting of laminated butyl and EPDM rubber, not less than 47 mil total thickness, as supplied by manufacturer of membrane material. 2.1.8 Rubber Sheet Adhesive: As recommended by the rubber sheet manufacturer. 2.1.9 Drainage Composite (Horizontal and Vertical): "Miradrain 9800" (with woven geotextile fabric on one side) by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing or approved alternative by W.R. Meadows. 2.1.10 Joint Filler: "Rodofoam PR grade" by Sternson Construction Products, "Sealtight Rescor" by W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd., or other approved manufacture. Filler thickness shall be twice the width of the opening to be filled. 2.1.11 Fabric Reinforcing: Spunbonded polyester, style 2017, by Dupont. 2.1.12 Metal Reglets: Continuous, non-corrosive metal reglets of size and profile as recommended by the membrane material manufacturer and having the opening sealed with a temporary waterproof tape. 2.1.13 Securement Bars: Continuous 3 mm x 25 mm galvanized steel bar, drilled 200 mm o.c. for screw attachment. 2.1.14 Fibre Cants: Bevelled, laminated layers of asphalt fibreboard, 75 x 75 mm. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Examination 3.1.1 Verify before starting work that conditions and surfaces are satisfactory to proceed. 3.2 Preparation 3.2.1 Clean all surfaces free of moisture, frost, contaminants, such as dust, dirt, oil, grease, loose particles, laitence, paint, form oil, or other foreign matter. Power sweep and brush, remove dirt and dust with an industrial type vacuum cleaner. Remove curing agents that may limit adhesion. 3.2.2 Ensure that indentions, rock pockets, tile holes, voids, cracks, holes, honeycombing, and other damaged surfaces have been repaired by others at least 48 hours and cured before application of membrane. 3.2.3 Supply metal reglets to other Sections for building in where required to receive membrane edges and instruct as to proper location and position. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07131 RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Page 07131 - 4 3.2.4 Surfaces to receive the waterproofing materials must be free from cavities and/or shutter marks which will damage the membrane. Grind edges and corners to a smooth, even surface. 3.2.5 Before applying deck materials, inspect the preceding work of other trades for defects detrimental to the performance of the membrane waterproofing. Report defects to the Consultant in writing for correction before work progresses. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of all conditions. 3.2.6 Ambient and surface temperatures shall be at least 10C for a minimum period of 48 hours before, during and after waterproofing application except with the written approval of the Consultant. 3.2.7 Ensure that substrates slope properly. 3.2.8 Cut out cracks 1.6 mm and over in width to 13 mm wide and 9 mm deep. Seal cracks and control joints with joint sealant. Use primer in conjunction with sealant compound. 3.3 Membrane Application - Exterior 3.3.1 Apply rubberized asphalt membrane waterproofing in accordance with the applicable clauses of CAN/CGSB 37.51. Apply two plies on horizontal surfaces and one ply on verticals. Reinforce two ply applications only. 3.3.2 Store materials in protected locations. 3.3.3 Apply primer at coverage rate recommended by manufacturer for the particular surface porosity, at the rate of 4.5 litres per 19m². Do not permit primer to collect in pools. Prevent seepage through joints. Allow to dry thoroughly. Reprime surfaces not covered by waterproofing the same day as primer. 3.3.4 Build up a 25 mm fillet of liquid membrane material at the junctions of horizontal and vertical surfaces, including columns, pipes, curbs and walls. Extend a 100 mil thickness of material, minimum 150 mm onto substrate horizontally and vertically from the fillet or greater as required to form a watertight vessel. 3.3.5 Do not exceed temperature of 205C in melting kettle; use an approved kettle. 3.3.6 Apply compound between 180C and 205C to a thickness of 3 to 4 mm to form a continuous membrane. Install joint rubber sheet in 300 mm wide strips centred over cracks, control and construction joints in the substrate, and junctions of horizontal and vertical surfaces and embedded in a 3 mm thick coating of membrane material. Carry membrane over strips as specified above extending membrane 150 mm minimum at strip edges. Fill reglets with membrane at membrane edges. 3.3.7 For two coat applications, after first coat, firmly press fabric reinforcing into hot membrane, overlapping edges minimum of 50 mm. 3.3.8 After membrane on horizontal surfaces has cured, apply second coat of membrane material to a uniform thickness of 3 to 4 mm. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07131 RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Page 07131 - 5 3.3.9 Seal membrane around vent pipes, drains and other protrusions. 3.3.10 Turn membrane up vertical surfaces at least 150 mm wherever possible, and apply a layer of SBS membrane set in hot rubberized monolithic membrane waterproofing. Apply a second coat of hot rubber over the SBS. Turn both membranes into reglets and counter flash with metal provided by Section 07400. 3.3.11 Bar completed areas from traffic until membrane has cured. 3.3.12 Cover areas to be waterproofed in uniform thickness with waterproofing membrane so as to make the areas covered completely waterproof. 3.3.13 Apply air shaft wall waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 3.4 Membrane Protection 3.4.1 While membrane is still tacky, install one layer of protective board over the entire surface of the completed membrane except where drainage board is placed immediately after membrane application. Cut and fit board as required, butt joints tightly. 3.4.2 Where membrane is to be exposed in the finished work, sprinkle Type 10 Portland cement powder in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 3.5 Drainage Board 3.5.1 Place drainage composite sheets to serve as drainage filter over waterproofing where shown. Install with built-in filter fabric up, or against backfill, in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Cut drain around penetrations. Provide a separate filter cloth to match that in drainage composite material, at cut areas and at joints as required to maintain continuity of filter system. 3.6 Field Quality Control 3.6.1 Manufacturer's technical representative to visit the site prior to waterproofing application and comment on surface preparation. Provide a written report to Consultant for review. 3.6.2 Supervise the work of other Sections where work of such other sections is associated with the membrane waterproofing system including the placement, finishing and curing of the concrete substrate, the placement and compaction of backfilling, the laying of heating cables for snow melting, the setting of pavers and the sealing of finished traffic surfaces occurring over membrane waterproofing. Bear full responsibility for damages caused to the membrane waterproofing system by these operations. 3.6.3 On completion of the membrane installation, provide temporary dike around horizontal waterproofed areas. Test fill with at least 13 mm head of water in the presence of the Consultant. Let stand for 24 hours. Examine for leaks and water escape. Drain areas and repair deficiencies. 3.7 Testing and Inspection Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07131 RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Page 07131 - 6 3.7.1 The Owner may engage the services of an inspection company approved by the Consultant to carry out inspection and testing of materials. Payment will be made from a Cash Allowance. 3.7.2 Inspection and testing for rubberized asphalt membrane waterproofing shall include the following: .1 Examination of existing conditions prior to commencement of work and reporting of inconsistencies or defects to the Consultant. .2 Verifying the standard and quantities of materials pertaining to rubberized asphalt membrane, delivered to site prior to application. Verifying moisture absorbency of deck and walls prior to membrane application. Verifying thickness of membrane. Verifying compatibility of materials. .3 Perform cut and adhesion tests. .4 Ascertaining that all work is being executed in full compliance with the Consultant's specification and requirements. .5 The Contractor shall maintain its own quality control program to ensure that its work conforms to the drawings and specifications. .6 Liquid Applied Membranes .1 Provide test cuts and a wet-mil thickness check for each 9m². .2 The Contractor shall maintain an inventory to ensure materials are installed at the specified rate. .3 Test cuts will be made across the seams. .4 Seam probes will be used. 3.8 Cleaning 3.8.1 On completion of the building, check area drains in waterproofed areas and ensure they are unclogged and are draining properly. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07180 THIN DECK COATING Page 07180 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Submittals 1.3.1 General 1.3.2 .1 Submit to the Consultant details of the waterproofing system not indicated in these documents including material specifications, thicknesses, details at joints, cracks, upstands, walls, drains, and termination points for review prior to starting work. .2 Contractor is to submit installation procedure to the Construction Manager for review prior to starting work including slab preparation requirements. Certificates: Submit certificates confirming the following: .1 The Applicator is presently a licensed Applicator of the coating system. .2 The Applicator has a minimum of three (3) years of directly applicable deck coating installation experience, or has installed a minimum of 5,000 m² of the specified deck coating system. .3 That a minimum of 7,500 m² of the system has been installed on parking structures of similar exposure and has performed satisfactorily. .4 The system will meet the warranty requirements as specified in this section. .5 Surfaces to receive waterproofing systems were acceptable and found to be satisfactory to receive the waterproofing system, as per the manufacturer's requirements and these specifications. Application of coating shall imply acceptance of surfaces. .6 Deck coating was applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. Project No. 0701-BS .7 1.3.3 SECTION 07180 THIN DECK COATING Page 07180 - 2 Completed waterproofing system conforms with system described herein. Warranty .1 Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01001, covering the repair or replacement of all defects in both workmanship and materials in the coatings, for a period of 4 years from the expiration of the one-year warranty under the General Conditions. .2 Total warranty period: 5 years. 1.3.4 Samples: Submit a 215 mm x 280 mm product sample indicating proposed finish and material thicknesses to be obtained for each specific application under the Contract with Bid. These samples will represent the quality of finish of completed installation. 1.4 Performance Requirements 1.4.1 The deck coating system shall comply with the following requirements: .1 Be totally waterproof, flexible and thermally compatible with the substrate under applicable service conditions. .2 Not allow moisture penetration including at termination details, expansion joints, drains, upturns or splices. .3 Remain skid resistant under its intended use in wet or dry conditions including snow at applicable locations. .4 Exhibit zero chloride permeability when tested in accordance with AASHTO T227 test procedure for the rapid determination of the chloride permeability of concrete. .5 Withstand active cyclical crack movements to a maximum of 1.5 mm and remain waterproof. .6 Exceed 1.0 MPa adhesion of the coating, primer, or surface patching to the concrete substrate. .7 Meet or exceed 1.0 MPa adhesion of all layers of the system to each other. .8 Not debond, crack or wear excessively. Loss of aggregate in any area will constitute failure. .9 Not support combustion. 1.5 Environmental Requirements 1.5.1 Do not install coating when ambient air temperature or substrate temperature is less than 10 degrees C. If this temperature is not reached, installation of temporary heaters ventilated to exterior is required. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07180 THIN DECK COATING Page 07180 - 3 1.5.2 Maintain air temperatures and substrate base temperature of installation area above 10 degrees C for 12 hours before, during and 72 hours after installation, or until materials have adequately cured. 1.5.3 Protect materials from moisture damage or dust contamination until adequately cured. 1.5.4 All working conditions shall meet the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act of the Province of Ontario. 1.5.5 Provide forced air circulation during period for enclosed applications. 1.5.6 During application of waterproofing system garage must be well ventilated such that odours from the waterproofing system do not disturb users of the garage or building above. 1.6 Delivery and Storage 1.6.1 Deliver and store materials at the site in their original containers or packages and clearly labelled as to manufacturer's name and quality. 1.6.2 Keep materials dry and protected from damage, weather and deterioration at all times. Store materials in warm and dry areas. 1.7 Quality Control 1.7.1 The Owner will retain the services of an inspection and testing company, approved by the Consultant and paid for by the Owner. 1.7.2 Contractor shall inform Consultant and testing agency 24 hours in advance of work to be performed under this section. 1.7.3 The inspection and testing company may take cut tests to check thickness of wearing course and waterproof membrane. Repair cut tests to the satisfaction of the Consultant. 1.7.4 The Owner will have the inspection and testing company submit reports directly to the Owner, the Consultant and the Contractor. 1.8 Protection 1.8.1 Protect adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from work of this Section. If necessary, mask or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, equipment, etc., by suitable means. Correct any damage at own expense to Consultant's satisfaction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials Project No. 0701-BS 2.1.1 SECTION 07180 THIN DECK COATING Page 07180 - 4 The following is for application at concrete islands, pads, sidewalks and curbs in existing parking garage, floors P1 (sublevel 1) through P4 (sublevel 4). Coating system shall be one of the following: .1 Vulkem 350/345/346 as manufactured by Tremco. Urethane coating with graded aggregate, liquid applied, colour to be selected. .2 Duodeck I / II Kelmar totally, Macnoughton Brooks Ltd. .3 Auto-Gard 3/2 as manufactured by Neogard Corporation. Two part polyurethane, liquid applied. Graded aggregate. Grey in colour. .4 Isoflex 7500. 2.2 Surface Patch Materials 2.2.1 Products used to patch rough surfaces shall be 100% solids epoxy and shall contain no additives or fillers. Coating material may be used to fill rough areas if approved by manufacturer. 2.2.2 No extras for surface preparation or additional coating material will be entertained after bid closing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation 3.1.1 Remove all guards, bollards, etc., as required for application of coatings to slab surfaces unless otherwise noted on drawings. Reinstall at completion. 3.1.2 Preparation of slab and vertical surfaces is to be in strict accordance with the requirements of the system manufacturer's recommendations and these Contract Documents including the following: preparation and smoothing of rough surfaces, detailing of slab cracks, joints and voids as required. 3.1.3 At ceremonial ramp strip existing asphalt and roofing membrane down to existing concrete topping. 3.1.4 Minimum standard of slab cleaning shall be shot blast or equivalent, leaving slab surfaces free of all laitance and removing a minimum of 0.20 mm of concrete surface. 3.1.5 Minimum standard of vertical surface cleaning shall be dry sandblast for all systems. 3.1.6 Clean surfaces of all grease and oil with an emulsifier where required which will not affect performance of coating. 3.1.7 Allow new concrete surfaces to air dry a minimum of 14 days after moist curing and not exhibit any condensation under plastic sheet test prior to the placement of the waterproof membrane. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07180 THIN DECK COATING Page 07180 - 5 3.1.8 Grind and/or fill all rough surfaces, vertical amplitude exceeding 40 mils (1.0 mm) to provide a smooth surface. 3.1.9 Sawcut cracks or joints straight sided and follow the extent of crack. Locations of crack sealing shall be as directed by Consultant. Do not overcut beyond actual extent of crack. Sandblast sawcut surfaces. 3.1.10 Fill sawcut cracks and joints with approved sealant materials flush with slab surface. Application to be in strict conformance to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.1.11 Install a continuous 20 mm fillet bead of compatible caulking at the base of vertical surfaces receiving coating prior to application of coating basecoat. 3.1.12 Provide double application of membrane at all vertical surfaces and at cracks and joints up to 1.6 mm wide. .1 Joints greater than 1.6 mm wide to be specially detailed. Submit details to Consultant for review. 3.1.13 Hand patch voids or depressions in concrete surfaces and re-point masonry block wall joints as required. No extras shall be entertained for this item after the award of Contract. This applies to all walls, columns and curbs. 3.1.14 Do not apply primer or first coat until the surface preparation has been reviewed by Consultant and inspected and accepted in writing by a representative of the system manufacturer. 3.1.15 Commencement of work shall imply Contractor's acceptance of the previously prepared concrete surfaces and assumption of full responsibility for the surfaces prepared to receive the primer and membrane. 3.1.16 Application procedures that result in toxic fumes or flammable solvent collecting or endangering workmen or building occupants are not permitted. 3.1.17 Repair paint and finishes damaged by Contractor to match existing. 3.1.18 Ensure that expansion joints are installed prior to coating installation. 3.2 Installation 3.2.1 System applications shall be in strict accordance with the more stringent requirements of the manufacturer's specifications and these Contract Documents. 3.2.2 Material quantities and placement procedures are to be strictly monitored. Areas to receive a typical material batch or container volume shall have their perimeters clearly marked prior to application to ensure uniform thickness of materials. 3.2.3 Finished surfaces shall be of uniform appearance, with no variations in light reflection, surface roughness, or ridges in sloped areas. Profiles shall be such that flow to drains is not impeded. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07180 THIN DECK COATING Page 07180 - 6 3.2.4 Turn system up vertical surfaces a minimum of 100 mm. Mask top of upturn to ensure a neat and straight finish to coating. Patch substrate irregularities prior to coating application. 3.2.5 Ensure environmental and site condition requirements as recommended by the membrane manufacturer and these Contract Documents are suitable for installation of work of this Section. 3.2.6 Wearcourse aggregate type, size and distribution to be in strict conformance with manufacturer's requirements. 3.3 Testing 3.3.1 Prior to application of membrane, test of moisture content of concrete mass will be made by taping down a 450 mm x 450 mm polyethylene sheet for a period of 16 hours minimum to detect evaporation from slab surface. Number of tests and locations shall be designated by the testing agency. 3.3.2 To confirm base coat thickness, Testing Agency will perform wet film thickness tests and dry-film cut tests. 3.3.3 To confirm wearcourse thickness, Testing Agency will perform wet film thickness tests and dry-film cut tests. 3.3.4 Testing shall be direct tensile test performed a minimum of 7 days after installation or as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3.5 To evaluate bonding of membrane to substrate, and/or basecoat to wearcourse, adhesion tests will be performed by the Testing Agency. Adhesion of the membrane layers to each other and to the concrete substrate shall exceed 1.0 MPa. The average of all tests must exceed 1.0 MPa, with no test less than 0.90 MPa. 3.3.6 Additional tests may be performed at the discretion of the Testing Agency to confirm insitu material thickness and bond. 3.3.7 Contractor to repair waterproofing system at test locations at no extra cost. 3.3.8 Finished system to be flood tested by Contractor at the Contractor's expense under direction of the Testing Agency, prior to Substantial Performance of the Contract. 3.3.9 Plug drains on horizontal surfaces and restrict run-off. 3.3.10 Maintain surfaces continuously wet for at least one hour. 3.3.11 Repair leaks and re-test. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07860 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 07860 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Work Specified Elsewhere 1.3.1 Firestopping and smoke seals within mechanical (i.e. inside ducts, dampers) and electrical assemblies (i.e. inside bus ducts) are specified in Divisions 15 and 16 respectively. All other firestopping and smoke seals are the responsibility of this Section. 1.4 Referenced Standards 1.4.1 CAN/ULC-S101-04 Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials 1.4.2 CAN4-S115-05 Standard Method of Fire Tests for Firestop Systems 1.4.3 ASTM E119-05a Standard Test Methods for Fire Construction and Materials 1.4.4 ASTM E814-02 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestop Stops. 1.5 Samples 1.5.1 Submit samples for Consultant's review, in accordance with Section 01001. 1.6 Shop Drawings 1.6.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01001. 1.6.2 Show proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation. Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions. Tests of Building Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07860 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 07860 - 2 1.6.3 Submit manufacturer's product data for materials and prefabricated devices, providing descriptions are sufficient for identification at job site. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. 1.7 Single Source Responsibility 1.7.1 It is the intent of this section of the specifications to establish a single, competent source to be responsible for providing firestopping and smoke sealing work for the entire project as clarified above. 1.7.2 Subcontractor shall be a specialist with accredited experience of not less than 5 years, and as recommended by firestopping/smoke seal manufacturers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 Firestopping and Smoke Seal Systems: In accordance with CAN4-S115, CAN/ULC-S101, ASTM E119, and ASTM E-814. Unless noted otherwise ‘F’ and ‘T’ ratings 2 hours. .1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN4-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended. .2 Tests shall be performed by an accredited testing agency acceptable to local Jurisdictional Authority. 2.1.2 Service Penetration Assemblies: Certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4-S115 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19. 2.1.3 Service Penetration Firestop Components: Certified by ULC in accordance with CAN4S115 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 U19.15 under the Label Service of ULC. 2.1.4 Fire resistance rating of installed firestopping assembly not to be less than the fire resistance rating of surrounding floor and wall assembly as indicated. 2.1.5 For firestopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables, use elastomeric seal; do not use cementitious or rigid seal at such locations. 2.1.6 For firestopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control use elastomeric seal; do not use a cementitious or rigid seal at such locations. 2.1.7 Primers: To manufacture's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use. 2.1.8 Water (If Applicable): Potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07860 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 07860 - 3 2.1.9 Damming and Backup Materials, Supports and Anchoring Devices: To manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.1.10 Sealants for Vertical Joints: Non-sagging. 2.1.11 Mineral Wool: As listed in tested assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation 3.1.1 Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are dry and frost free. 3.1.2 Prepare surfaces in contact with firestopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions. 3.1.3 Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation. 3.1.4 Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces. 3.2 Installation 3.2.1 Install firestopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC certification and manufacturer's instructions. 3.2.2 Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained. 3.2.3 Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing. 3.2.4 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish. 3.2.5 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion. 3.3 Inspection 3.3.1 Notify Consultant when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping materials and service penetration assemblies. 3.4 Schedule 3.4.1 Work of firestopping and smoke seals shall include but not limited to the following: .1 Top of fire resistance rated masonry and gypsum board work. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07860 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS Page 07860 - 4 .2 Intersection of fire resistance rated masonry and gypsum board work. .3 Control joints in fire resistant rated masonry and gypsum board work. .4 At edge of floor slabs at juncture with wall envelope. .5 Penetrations through fire resistant rated floor slabs, ceilings and similar members. .6 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire resistant rated separations. .7 For ‘0’ hour fire rated separations (to prevent smoke movement) pack void space at all service penetrations and other openings with either tightly packed Mineral Wool insulation, and covered with sealant. Sealant with backing rod is also acceptable. The sealant need not be rated. 3.5 Clean-Up 3.5.1 Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately. 3.5.2 Remove temporary dams after initial set of firestopping and smoke seal materials. 3.5.3 Remove firestopping from materials and surfaces not specifically required to be sealed. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 07900 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.1.2 Coordinate with Section 04200 Masonry and 04400 Building Stone. 1.1.3 Refer to section 07200 Building Insulation, AVB and Misc Flashings 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Referenced Standards 1.3.1 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87 Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing 1.3.2 Sealant and Waterproofers Institute Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.4 Quality Assurance 1.4.1 Have work performed by a recognized established caulking and sealing contractor having at least ten years experience and with skilled workers thoroughly trained and competent in the use of caulking and sealing equipment and the specified materials. 1.4.2 In order that recommendations may be made, arrange with sealant manufacturers for one of their technical representatives to visit the site, prior to application of this work, to discuss with the Contractor, in the presence of the Consultant, the procedures to be adopted and to review site conditions, and surfaces and joints to be sealed. 1.4.3 Discuss the following items: .1 Weather conditions under which work will be done. .2 Anticipated frequency and extent of joint movement. .3 Joint design. .4 Suitability of durometer hardness and other properties of material specified. Project No. 0701-BS 1.5 Submittals 1.5.1 Samples SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 07900 - 2 .1 Prepare sample joints at site of each type of caulking and sealant for each joint condition. Do not proceed with work until each sample joint has been approved by Consultant. .2 Approved joints shall represent minimum acceptable for work. .3 Submit manufacturer's name for each compound which will be used on project before commencing work. 1.5.2 Product Data: Submit product data of sealants and caulking proposed in accordance with Section 01001. 1.5.3 Extended Warranty .1 Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01001, covering the repair or replacement of defective work for a period of 4 years from the expiration of the one-year warranty, under the General Conditions. .2 Warranty shall provide for repair or replacement of damaged work resulting from leakage, gassing, wrinkling, ridging, sagging, shrinkage, running, loss of adhesion, cohesive failure, or staining of adjoining surfaces. .3 Total warranty period shall be 5 years. 1.6 Job Conditions 1.6.1 Apply materials only to completely dry surfaces, and at air and material temperatures above minimum established by manufacturer's specifications. 1.6.2 The applicator is responsible for ensuring the sealants are applied under acceptable conditions. Substrate temperatures of less than 4C require special considerations, to ensure a clean, dry substrate and proper sealant wet-out. .1 The substrate to which sealant is to be applied should be dry. This is particularly crucial where the substrate is porous and subject to water absorption. Although the joint interface may appear to be dry, the substrate below the immediate joint surface may still be moist. This moisture can migrate rapidly to the joint surface thereby contaminating any preparation. .2 Use a quick flashing solvent such as MEK or Tremco 200 Cleaner to clean the substrates. NOTE: Ensure the substrate and/or any coating on the substrate is compatible with MEK or Tremco Cleaner 200. .3 After solvent cleaning, wipe the joint interfaces dry with a second clean rag. Project No. 0701-BS .4 SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 07900 - 3 Immediately following cleaning, install the sealant and tool it. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 Generally: Labels indicating conformance to specified reference specifications will be acceptable as verification that contents meet specified requirements. Colour will be selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range. Colours shall match surface on which it occurs unless noted otherwise. 2.1.2 Sealants: Non-bleeding and capable of supporting their own weight. Caulking, sealants, cleaning solvents, fillers and primers shall be compatible with each other. .1 Interior Non-Traffic Bearing: one component elastomeric material conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.13, Class 1 or 2, depending on application. Colour as selected by the Consultant. .2 Exterior Non-Traffic Bearing, Weather Side of Construction: use one of the following: .1 "Dymeric 240", "Vulkem 922" or “Dymonic” or “Spectrem 3” by Tremco. .2 "Sikaflex 15LM” by Sika Construction. .3 "Silpruf NB" by General Electric Canada .4 "795" by Dow Corning. .5 "Sonolastic 150" by Sonneborn. .6 “Sikaflex 2C SL/NS”. .3 Traffic Bearing: Tremco "THC 900", "Vulkem 45", Sonneborn "SL1", or Sika “Sikaflex 1C SL”. .4 Note: Coordinate Sections 02785, 07900 and 08900 and ensure that only one brand of sealant shall be used on the building/component exterior to ensure consistency and integrity of exterior seals and to preclude incompatibility problems. Each of the aforementioned sections shall be closely coordinated to ensure compliance to this mandatory requirement. .5 Sanitary Caulking: Dow Corning "786" mildew resistant silicone, General Electric "1700 Sanitary Sealant", "Rhodorsil 8S", Sonneborn "Omniplus", or “Tremsil 200”. .6 Expanding Foam: Refer to section 07200 Building Insulation, AVB and Misc Flashings, item 2.2.4 Foamed in Place Insulation. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 07900 - 4 2.1.3 Sealant for Stone: refer to Section 04400 Building Stone. 2.1.4 Primer: Specifically designed for use with compounds on surfaces encountered, and as specified by the compound manufacturer, to assure adhesion of compound and to prevent staining of substrate material. 2.1.5 Sealant Backing: Extruded, polyethylene round foam rod, 25% wider than joint width, and manufactured especially for caulking purpose. Ensure that sealant backing is not cut nor punctured during installation. Use closed cell rod for horizontal traffic bearing joints, and open cell rod for vertical joints. 2.1.6 Bond Breaker: Tape of type supplied or recommended by sealant or caulking manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation 3.1.1 Remove moisture, loose mortar, dust, oil, grease, oxidation, mill scale, coatings, and all other materials affecting bond of compounds by brushing, scrubbing, scraping, or grinding, from surfaces to which caulking compounds must adhere. 3.1.2 Ensure that releasing agents, coatings, or other treatments have either not been applied to joint surfaces, or that they are entirely removed. 3.1.3 Ensure joints are suitable to accept sealant and caulking. 3.1.4 Before any work is commenced, test the materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion. 3.1.5 Do not apply material to masonry until mortar has cured. 3.1.6 Do not exceed shelf life, and pot life of the materials and installation times, as stated by the manufacturers. 3.1.7 Become familiar with the work life of the material to be used. Do not mix two part materials until required for use. 3.1.8 Mix sealants thoroughly with a mechanical mixer capable of mixing at 80-100 rpm without mixing air into the materials. Continue mixing until the material is a uniform colour and free from streaks of unmixed material. 3.1.9 Mask areas adjacent to the joints as required. Prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces. Remove masking promptly after the joint has been completed. 3.2 Application 3.2.1 Work of this Section shall include all sealing and caulking, except where specified under the work of other Sections, to make the building weather and air tight, as indicated typically on drawings, and as otherwise specified. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 07900 - 5 3.2.2 Apply materials in accordance with the recommendation of the material manufacturer, in particular, backer rod, priming and depth-to-width ratio. 3.2.3 Pack joints tightly with sealant backing, set at sealant depth. 3.2.4 Apply primer with a brush which will permit all joint surfaces to be primed. Perform priming immediately before installation of caulking or sealant. 3.2.5 Caulking and sealants shall be of gun or knife grade consistency to suit the joint condition. Use gun nozzles of the proper sized to suit the joints and the caulking and sealing material. 3.2.6 Apply with manually operated or air pressure operated guns. 3.2.7 Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints. Caulking sealants shall bond to both sides of joint but not backing material. 3.2.8 Ensure that the correct compound depth is maintained. Superficial painting with a skin bead will not be accepted. 3.2.9 Finished applications shall be a full bead free from air pockets and embedded impurities and having smooth surfaces, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and imbedded impurities. 3.2.10 After joints have been completely filled, tool them neatly to a slight concave surface. 3.2.11 Caulk joints in site painted materials after adjacent surfaces have been painted. 3.2.12 The work shall include, but not limited to the following: .1 Exterior and interior hollow metal steel door frames; interior screens (both sides of frames). .2 Exposed control joints in masonry walls; masonry wall corners; masonry-tocolumn junctures; joints in front of steel lintels bearing on exterior brick jambs, masonry to precast, precast to precast, and precast to adjacent materials. .3 Raked joints in junction of walls running at different angles, and at junction of walls to columns. .4 Joints between washroom vanities, and other counters, urinals, and adjacent surfaces (use sanitary caulking). .5 Wall to floor junctions and joints in floor, where typically indicated on drawings. .6 Joints between masonry and concrete surfaces. .7 Joints between gypsum board and masonry, or other materials. .8 Joints between louvres and other surfaces. .9 Penetrations through roofs, floors and walls other than firestopping. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 07900 SEALANTS Page 07900 - 6 .10 Joints between precast concrete bands and sills installed by masonry trade and other materials, and between precast pieces. .11 Provide joint caulking only at precast concrete. No full surface sealant is required. .12 At other locations shown on drawings. 3.3 Cleaning 3.3.1 Do not use chemicals, scrapers, or other tools which would damage surfaces of caulked or sealed materials when excess compounds or droppings are removed. Work damaged by cleaning shall be made good under work of this Section. 3.4 Repair 3.4.1 Cut out damaged caulking and sealing, re-prepare and prime joints and install new material as specified to the Consultant's satisfaction. 3.5 Protection of Completed Work 3.5.1 Provide wood planks or other approved, non-staining means of protection for the completed caulking and sealants installations where required to protect the work from mechanical, thermal, chemical and other damage by other construction operations and traffic. 3.5.2 Maintain protection securely in place until project completion. Remove protection when so directed by the Consultant. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 08 10 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES, PANELS AND SCREENS Page 08 10 00 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Referenced Standards 1.3.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 .1 ASTM A568/A568M-05 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, HotRolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements For .2 ASTM A653/A653M-05 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC): .1 CAN4-S104M-M80 (1985) Standard Method of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies .2 CAN4-S105M-M85 Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturer's Association: .1 CSDMA Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, 2009 .2 CSDMA Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Doors, 2009. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 08 10 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES, PANELS AND SCREENS Page 08 10 00 - 2 .1 NFPA 80-2007 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives .2 NFPA 252 Standard Methods of Fire Rests of Door Assemblies, 2003 Edition. 1.4 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies 1.4.1 Steel Fire Rated Doors and Frames: Labelled and listed by an organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN4 S104M and CAN4 S105M for ratings specified or indicated. 1.4.2 Install labelled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80 except where specified otherwise. 1.5 Quality Assurance 1.5.1 Unless specified otherwise, fabricate doors and frames in accordance with the Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturer's Association Standard. 1.5.2 Coordinate with Hardware Consultant as required to ensure work of this section will accept all required hardware including electric hardware plug-in’s and exit devices. 1.6 Submittals 1.6.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01001, for Consultant's review before fabrication. 1.6.2 Acoustic Rating Test: Submit results of acoustic tests in accordance with Section 01001 for Consultant's review. 1.7 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1.7.1 Brace frame units to prevent distortion in shipment, and protect finished surfaces by sturdy protective wrappings. 1.7.2 Store doors in protective wrappings in a secure dry location, to ensure that they are not damaged until hung. Install them only when work has progressed to a stage when no damage will occur to them in place. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 Steel: Commercial grade steel to ASTM A568 , Class 1, wiped coat galvanized to ASTM A653, coating designation ASTM A653, ZF75. 2.1.2 Doors and Panels Project No. 0701-BS 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 SECTION 08 10 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES, PANELS AND SCREENS Page 08 10 00 - 3 .1 Facings, rails, stiles: 1.2 mm (18 ga.) base steel thickness. .2 Interior Stiffeners: .914 mm base steel thickness. .3 Hardware Reinforcement: 3 mm base steel thickness. .4 Sound Deadening and Insulating Material: Semi-rigid fibreglass 24 kg/m³ minimum density, to fill core space. .5 Glazing Stops: 1.5 mm base steel thickness, formed, drilled and countersunk for fasteners. Frames .1 Steel: 1.5 mm (16 ga.) base thickness. .2 Hardware Reinforcement: 3 mm base steel thickness. .3 Mortar Guards: .762 mm base steel thickness. .4 Rubber Bumpers: Glynn-Johnson GJ64 or approved equivalent. Anchors .1 Frames in Masonry: Adjustable "T" strap anchors, Wire Anchors Acceptable. .2 Frames in Precast: Galvanized expansion bolts. .3 Labelled Frames: To conform to ULC/WHI requirements. .4 Frames in Gypsum Board Partitions: Steel anchor clips and floor anchors of suitable design securely welded inside each jamb. .5 Anchorage to Floor: Minimum 3 mm thick clip angles with 2 holes for expansion bolting to floor. Galvanizing .1 Interior Units: Steel sheet wipe coated with zinc-iron alloy to a total mass coating both sides of 75 g/m² to conform to ASTM A653/A653M, ZF75 coating designation. .2 Exterior Units, and Interior Units in Unheated Areas: Steel sheet coated with zinc to a total mass coating both sides of 275 g/m² to conform to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 coating designation. Mill phosphatize to provide for good paint adhesion. Acoustic Doors and Frames: As manufactured by Ambico Limited or Fleming Door Products, or approved alternate, complete with acoustic seals, automatic door bottom and door hinges. Minimum 45 STC rating required. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 08 10 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES, PANELS AND SCREENS Page 08 10 00 - 4 2.2 Fabrication - Generally 2.2.1 Fit and assemble work in the shop, where possible. Make trial assembly in shop when not possible. 2.2.2 Fabricate, reinforce and anchor component parts and assemblies to support loads that usage will impose without deflection detrimental to function, appearance or safety. For interior doors either the use of metal stiffeners with the spaces between stiffeners filled with insulation. For exterior doors the core is to be completely filled with insulation. 2.2.3 Reinforce components to resist in-use stresses imposed by finishing and security hardware. 2.2.4 Prepare frames and doors for finish hardware with mortises and reinforcement. Drill and tap to template information. Reinforce for surface-mounted hardware and for door closer brackets. Provide for concealed door closers where specified. Install mortar guards at cutouts and reinforcing plates in frame. For cylindrical locks install reinforcing units to lock manufacturer's specification. For mortise locks provide a suitable internal bracket to hold the lock case rigidly in the centre of the door. 2.2.5 Provide for anticipated expansion and contraction of frames and supports. 2.2.6 Fit elements at intersections and joints accurately together in true planes, plumb and level. 2.2.7 Weld frame and door assemblies unless honeycombing or plastic insulation is used for core. Weld continuously at joints through which air or water could penetrate from the exterior of the building to the interior. Fill joints flush to make them inconspicuous. 2.2.8 Where welding is impossible, connections may be bolted. Ream drilled holes and leave exposed edges clean and smooth. 2.2.9 Isolate from each other dissimilar metals and metal from concrete or masonry, to prevent electrolysis. 2.2.10 Ensure that exterior doors and frames are tightly fitted, and that entry of water is prevented by drip caps on head of frames of outswinging doors exposed to weather. 2.2.11 Make allowance in frames and doors to receive electrical conduits for security strikes and contactors which may be installed in doors and frames. Provide electrical conduit protection mortar boxes to receive conduit for electric strikes, locks, door closers, and hinges as detailed. 2.3 Door and Screen Frames 2.3.1 Fabricate frames to details shown on Drawings using welded construction. 2.3.2 Fabricate steel frames in minimum base steel thickness specified. Minimum frame material thickness applies only to work which does not otherwise require heavier gauges to meet specified fire-rated construction. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 08 10 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES, PANELS AND SCREENS Page 08 10 00 - 5 2.3.3 Supply standard frames to suit construction conditions and dimensions as indicated on Drawings. 2.3.4 Touch up frames in the factory where coating has been removed. 2.3.5 Where members join at corners, cut mitres and weld continuously along inside of frame throat. welding. 2.3.6 Where tubular transoms or mullions meet frame members, join by butt welding. 2.3.7 Attach two channel shipping bars at bottom of door frames to maintain square alignment. Provide removable attachment for shipping bars on frames that do not extend below finished floor, and remove them after frames are built in. 2.3.8 Incorporate structural stiffeners for frame members where required to withstand loadings. Securely anchor them at bottom and top. Where they extend above ceiling, anchor them to concrete or structural framing to suit site conditions and in such a way that load from the concrete is not transferred to the frames. 2.3.9 Install three rubber bumpers in latch side stops of each interior door frame. Locate lowest bumper 225 mm above bottom of door. 2.3.10 Backpaint exterior frames and frames to unheated areas where in contact with masonry or concrete or other dissimilar materials. 2.3.11 Fabricate glass stops for non-rated screens the same as specified for glass stops for doors. Fabricate glass stops for fire rated screens 20 mm wide and of 1.35 mm thick sheet steel. 2.3.12 Note all exterior doors designated with a 'X' prefix on the Door Schedule shall have thermally broken frames. Fill these frames with fibreglass insulation. 2.4 Doors and Panels 2.4.1 Fabricate interior and exterior doors and panels with sheet steel in specified base steel thickness. 2.4.2 Minimum panel thickness applies only to doors not otherwise requiring heavier gauges to meet specified fire-rated construction. 2.4.3 Fabricate doors with faces true and smooth, and with no dimples or welds visible. 2.4.4 Bevel edges of stiles to suit door swing. 2.4.5 Maximum space between hinged side panels and doors shall be 3 mm in their closed position. 2.4.6 Locate hardware to Canadian Steel Door & Frame Manufacturer's Association Standard, unless shown otherwise on Drawings or Door Schedule. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 08 10 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES, PANELS AND SCREENS Page 08 10 00 - 6 2.4.7 Fill solid all voids within doors and panels with insulation, or honeycomb core. For exterior doors and panels, fill voids with insulation. 2.4.8 Fabricate muntins, removable stops, and glass mouldings of minimum 1.2 mm steel. 2.4.9 Prepare doors to receive glass and grilles. Install grilles. Secure removable stops with countersunk Phillips oval head screws symmetrically spaced on stop lengths. 2.4.10 Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors to make a weathertight seal, and doors to which the tops can be seen from stair landings or other high elevations, so that they are flush with face edges. 2.5 Anchors 2.5.1 Provide frames for installation in masonry walls with the following number of anchors: 2.5.2 .1 Frames up to 2296 mm height, 3 anchors .2 Frames 2296 mm to 2438 mm, 4 anchors .3 Frames over 2438 mm, 1 anchor for each 600 mm or fraction thereof in height. Provide frames for installation in stud partitions with the following number of anchors: .1 Frames up to 2296 mm height, 4 anchors .2 Frames 2296 mm to 2438 mm, 5 anchors .3 Frames over 2438 mm, 5 anchors, plus 1 additional for each 600 mm or fraction thereof over 2438 mm. 2.5.3 Provide frames to be anchored to previously-placed concrete, masonry, or structural steel, with anchors of suitable design. Show on shop drawings. 2.5.4 Securely weld adjustable floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile, with two holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage. 2.5.5 Anchors shall have minimum gauges: "T" strap type, 1.6 mm "L" type, 1.2 mm; wire type, 3.9 mm diameter; stirrup type, 1.6 mm; stud type, 1.2 mm; jamb spreaders; 1.2 mm. 2.6 Finishing 2.6.1 Carbon Steel: Clean and smooth work at welds which has been ground. Fill if necessary, and prime all areas from which zinc has been removed. 2.6.2 Stainless Steel: Refinish exposed edges of formed sheets after fabrication or forming. Similarly refinish welds to the same finish as base metal. Direction of grain shall be horizontal. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 08 10 00 HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES, PANELS AND SCREENS Page 08 10 00 - 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation 3.1.1 Installation of the work of this Section is specified in Sections 04200, 06100 and 06210. * * * END OF SECTION NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 1 1 General .1 SECTION INCLUDES 1. The work in this section includes furnishing all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary for all swinging, sliding, folding and other doors, except items, which are specifically excluded from this section. .2 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1. Related documents, drawings, and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. .3 RELATED SECTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 06200 – Finish Carpentry 08100 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08900 – Glazed Aluminum Curtainwall Division 16 – Access Control System Division 16 – Security Products Division 16 – Electrical, Conduit, Backboxes .4 REFERENCES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. ANSI A156.1 – Butts and Hinges ANSI A156.2 – Bored Locks and Latches ANSI A156.3 – Exit Devices ANSI A156.4 – Door Controls – Door Closers ANSI A156.5 – Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products ANSI A156.6 – Architectural Door Trim ANSI A156.7 – Template Hinge Dimensions ANSI A156.8 – Door Controls – Overhead Holders ANSI A156.13 – Mortise Locks and Latches ANSI A156.15 – Closer Holder Release Devices ANSI A156.16 – Auxiliary Hardware ANSI A156.18 – Material and Finishes ANSI A156.26 – Continuous Hinges ANSI A156.31 – Electric Strike NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code ANSI-A250.4 – Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities (Re-order) ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act .5 SUBMITTALS 1. Submit copies of finish hardware schedule in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements. 2. Schedules and Product Data 1 Prior to hardware schedule submittal, the successful bidder shall review all drawings and related documents to ensure compatibility and completeness. Hardware schedule to be in NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 2 vertical format, listing each door opening, and detailed door by door, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening to function as intended. Hardware schedule shall be submitted within two (2) weeks from date the purchase order is received by the finish hardware supplier. Note any special mounting instructions or requirements within the hardware schedule. Schedules to include the following information: 1) Each opening shall reference the door number and location relating to the floor plans and door and frame schedule. 2) Handing and degree of swing of each door. 3) Door and frame sizes and materials. 4) Keying information, if available. 5) Quantity, type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. 6) Elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings. 7) Name and manufacturer of each hardware item. 8) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 9) Explanation of all abbreviations contained in schedule. 10) Mounting locations for hardware if different from standard. 11) Provide complete point to point wiring diagrams for each opening requiring electronic hardware. 12) Provide complete methods of operation for all openings containing electronic components. Operational descriptions to detail how each electrical component functions within the opening incorporating all conditions of ingress and egress. 13) Provide elevation drawings of electronic hardware and systems identifying locations of the system components with respect to their placement in the door opening. 2 Submit catalog cuts and/or product data sheets for all scheduled finish hardware. 3 Submit separate detailed keying schedule for approval indicating clearly how the Owner’s final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. 4 It is the responsibility of the hardware supplier to update and keep current the hardware schedule. All approved hardware changes shall be noted in the hardware schedule and kept current throughout the duration of the project. Update pages as necessary to the contractor for furtherance to the architect. Provide the end user with the original tendered hardware schedule and a copy of the updated hardware schedule incorporating all changes upon completion of the project. Where changes occur to electrical products and functions the hardware supplier shall be responsible to produce new elevations and methods of operation both for submittal with changes and update the hardware schedule. NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 3 3. Samples 1 Submit samples of each type of hardware in finish indicated. Samples are to remain undamaged and in working condition through submittal and review process. Items will be returned to the supplier or incorporated into this scope of work. 4. Templates 1 Upon receipt of reviewed Hardware Schedule furnish a complete set of applicable templates, together with the approved hardware schedule to the contractor. The contractor shall distribute to the related trades. 5. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1 Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete maintenance manuals to the Owner. Manuals to include the following items: 1) Tendered hardware, Issued for Construction Schedule and updated Hardware Schedule, including all approved changes. 2) Catalogue cuts and keying schedule. 3) Hardware installation, adjustment instructions and maintenance manuals. 4) Manufacturer’s written warranty information. 5) Wiring diagrams, elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings. .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Substitutions 1 All requests for approved alternates must be submitted in writing 10 working days prior to closing date. Approval of products is at the discretion of the Architect, Owner and hardware sub-consultant. 2. Supplier Qualifications 1 A recognized architectural hardware supplier who has maintained an office and has been furnishing architectural hardware for a minimum of 5 years. 2 Hardware supplier shall have in his employment at least one (1) Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) accredited in the Continuing Education Program (CEP) administered by The Door and Hardware Institute, Chantilly, VA. 3 It shall be clearly understood that within the terms of this Subcontract, the Hardware Supplier is bound not just as a supplier but also is responsible for the supply of hardware services relative to the project co-ordination, supervision and inspection. 4 Hardware Subcontractor shall meet with the Owner, Architect, Electrical Subcontractor, Security Consultant, and Access Control Subcontractor to review, coordinate and implement all details relating to the proper operation of all electronic hardware including locations of power supplies, back boxes, junction boxes and conduit details prior to start of construction. NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 5 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 4 Hardware supplier shall provide all-inclusive consultation and solutions to the Architect and related trades and shall be fully responsible for coordinating, managing, and assisting in the design of full system integration of security access control (i.e. proximity card reader, CCTV, and other electrified security hardware components not specified in the hardware schedule) and electronic hardware. .7 FIRE-RATED OPENINGS 1. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that comply with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories (cUL) or Warnock Hersey (WH) for use on types and sizes of doors indicated. .8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1. Securely package and mark items according to the reviewed hardware schedule, detailing item number and the door number, complete with necessary screws and accessories, instructions and installation templates. 2. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project site and shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor. 3. Construction keys are to be delivered to the contractor directly. Do not ship construction keys with locksets. 4. At time of hardware delivery, hardware supplier, in conjunction with the contractor, shall check in all hardware. 5. The Contractor shall set up a clean, dry & secure hardware storage room with adequate shelving to layout each item of hardware by door number and hardware schedule item number. It is the responsibility of the hardware supplier/installer to coordinate the room size with the Contractor to ensure proper layout of products. Hardware is to be shipped to site floor specific, if required. .9 WARRANTY 1. All items, except as noted below, shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and building turnover. In the event of product failure, promptly repair or replace item with no additional cost to the Owner. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Hinges: Lifetime Electrified hinges: One (1) year Mortise locksets: Seven (7) years Electrified Locksets: Two (2) years Exit Devices: Five (5) years Electric Strikes: Five (5) years Door closers: Ten (10) years Door Operators, Swinging Door: One (1) NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 5 2 Products .1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturers as listed below have been determined as the acceptable standard. .2 MATERIALS 1. Screws and Fasteners: All required screws shall be supplied as necessary for securing finish hardware in the appropriate manner. 2. Hinges: to conform to ANSI A156.1 and have the number of knuckles as specified, oilimpregnated bearings as specified with NRP (non-removable pin) feature, at all exterior or reverse bevel doors. Unless otherwise scheduled, 2 hinges for doors up to 60”(1520mm) in height supply one (1) additional hinge for every 30”(760mm) of door height or part thereof. 1 Specified Manufacturer: McKinney TA/T4A series 3. Electric Hinges: to conform to ANSI A156.1 provided with Molex standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Plug connectors shall plug directly into Molex through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices. Provide sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a mortar guard for each electric hinge specified, supply to hollow metal frame manufacturer, Division 08 11 13 prior to frame manufacture. 1 Not used in this project. 4. Continuous Stainless Steel Hinges: non-handed and of slim barrel design. Hinges are to be made of type 304 stainless steel and shall have a concealed Teflon-coated stainless steel pin with twin self-lubricated nylon bearings at each knuckle. Hinges shall be UL listed up to and including 3 hours and shall be available as power transfer units when specified. For power transfer continuous hinges provide only stainless steel concealed wire type with Molex connectors. 1 Specified Manufacturer: McKinney MCK-FM300 2 Specified Manufacturer: McKinney FM300 QC Series Electrified 5. Flush Bolts and Accessories: Manual and Automatic Flush Bolts. 1 Manual flush bolts for Hollow metal doors Manual flush bolts: shall conform to ANSI A156.16-L04251. Flush bolts are to be on Cast Brass material, with different types of finishes (confirm with manufacturer). ¾” bolt throw, ¾”backset, 12”rod length, ½” adjustable bolt head. (cUL) Listed 3 hours fire rated. Flush bolts are fitted top and bottom in the leading edge of the inactive leaf of a pair of doors. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood 555 2 Automatic Flush Bolts for Hollow metal doors (Self latching): Automatic Flush Bolts: shall conform to ANSI A156.3. Flush bolts are to be made of Brass or Stainless Steel with different types of finishes (confirm with manufacturer). Automatically engages when the inactive door closes. When the active door is opened, the inactive door stays latched at the top until the top bolt is released by pressing the plunger button on the bolt face.(cUL) Listed, with a closing force (5 lbs. maximum), bolt head rods are adjustable up to 1½”. 1) Not used in this project. NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 6 3 Dust Proof Strike Dust Proof Strike: shall conform to ANSI A156.16. - L04021 Dust proof strike is to be made of Brass. Designed for use with the bottom bolt of all flush bolts. Spring loaded plunger returns to floor or threshold level anytime flush bolt is retracted. 1) Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood 570 6. Cylinders: Permanent cylinders are to be MEDECO by City of Toronto. Temporary, keyed alike cylinders are to be provided for use during the construction phase. 7. Key Cabinet: provide a 2 tag key control system complete with locking cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 50% of the number of locks required for the project. Hardware supplier shall assist Owner in loading of the keying cabinet. 1 Specified Manufacturer: Telkee Regent T1530 8. Mortise Locksets: to ANSI 156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1 Certified. All functions shall be manufactured in a single sized case formed from 12 gauge steel minimum. The lockset shall have a field-adjustable, beveled armored front, with a 3/32” minimum thickness and shall be reversible without opening the lock body. Where scheduled provide locksets with interchangeable functions to permit field function change. The lockset shall be 2 3/4” backset with a two-piece 3/4” anti-friction mechanical latchbolt. The deadbolt shall be a full 1” throw made of stainless steel and have 2 hardened steel roller inserts. All strikes shall be non-handed with a curved lip. To insure proper alignment, all trim, shall be thru-bolted and fully interchangeable between rose and escutcheon designs and shall be the product of one manufacturer. 1 Specified Manufacturer: Corbin ML2000 LWA 626 Series (No alternate) 9. Lockset Strikes: to be non-handed and available with curved lip, full lip or ASA type strikes as required. Provide strikes with lip-length required to accommodate jamb and/or trim detail and projection. 10. Electric Strikes must conform to UL10C for fire rated frames. Designed for two (2”) frame face. Strike shall feature keeper designed with locking pin and capable of use with up to three quarter inch (¾”) throw latch bolts. Door and frame manufacturers are to coordinate exact centre line of latch bolt in frame corresponding to door. 1 Specified Manufacturer: HES 1006F LBM 2 Specified Manufacturer: HES 4500 LBM 3 Specified Manufacturer: HES 9500 LBM 4 Specified Manufacturer: HES 9600 LBM 11. All closers for both interior and exterior doors shall be the product of one manufacturer and be matched in style. Surface closers shall be adjustable to provide sizes 1 through 6 and comply with ADA. Full rack and pinion construction. Closing speed, latching speed and backcheck shall be controlled by key operated valves. Captivated valves. Delayed action feature shall be available and controlled by a separate valve. The high performance one piece closer body shall be of die cast aluminum alloy. An increase of 15% in closing power shall be provided by means of adjustment of the arm leverage at the foot connection. (Standard Arm) All arms shall be finely finished with heavy duty forged steel main arm. Two NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 7 mounting positions of the closer shall meet all requirements. Standard mountings shall provide 120° door opening and alternate mounting 180° door opening. All closers shall be suitable for standard, top jamb, parallel arm and track type applications when provided with proper brackets and arms. Closer covers shall be of high impact plastic material of flame retardant grade. Secured by machine screws. Projection of closer body from door shall not exceed 2-1/4" (56mm). Closers shall be non-handed to meet a variety of door conditions and design requirements. The spindle shaft shall be sealed hydraulically with an “O” ring. Special finish (SRI) Special Rust Inhibitor Process shall be available. All closer bodies have a 10 year limited warranty. Closers should comply with UL 10C and UBC 7-2(1997) Positive Pressure Fire Test. Closers to be Grade 1 of ANSI/BHMA A156.4. 1 Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 351 Series High traffic 2 Specified Manufacturer: Sargent 1431 Series Standard traffic. Automatic Door Operators – Operator shall be certified to ANSI 156.19, Grade 1. Units shall have adjustments for door closing force and backcheck, motor assist from 0 to 30 seconds, motor start up delay, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, door hold open delay up to 30 seconds and suitable to operate a door up to 700 lbs in weight. Operator units shall provide conventional door closer opening and closing forces unless the power operator motor is activated by an initiating device with door closer assembly having adjustable spring size, backcheck valve, sweep valve, latch valve, speed control valve, and pressure adjustment valve to control door closing. Operators shall have an automatic latch retry and automatic learn controller to calculate optimal operation based on: door weight/hold open location and closing speeds. Operator shall have automatic stack or windload compensation. Units shall have a presence detector input to prevent a closed door from opening or a door that is fully opened from closing and shall have a hold open toggle input to allow remote activation for indefinite hold open; door shall close the second time the input is activated. Operators shall have a SPDT relay for interfacing with latching or locking devices. All controlling operator switches shall be of radio-frequency design and not hard-wired, 2 Year warranty. Confirm operator suitability for use with the weight of doors it is scheduled to operate. 1. Specified Manufacturer: Besam SW200i 12. Automatic Door Operators – Standard Duty: to ANSI A117.1, ANSI A156.19 and be UL listed for automatic closing door requirements. Units shall have independent adjustment valves for back check, sweep and latching speeds. Door operator shall provide conventional door closer opening forces unless the power operator motor is activated. Opening force and speed shall be adjustable by independent electronic adjustment to ensure adequate opening control per accessibility codes. Unit shall have adjustment for closing force. Maximum door opening shall be adjustable and capable to 180 degrees, conditions permitting. The unit shall have adjustable hold opening time from 5 to 30 seconds. Door operator shall have input line rating of 120VAC at .6A and have relay contacts for interfacing product having a rating of 30VDC at 1A or 125VAC at .5A. External on/off switch to defeat powered opening when desired. Adjustable Obstruction detection on powered opening cycle shall shut motor down and allows door to close under normal spring power. 1 Specified Interior Manufacturer: Besam SW100 13. Door Pulls/Push/Kick/Armour Plates: to be .050 gauges and 1.5 inches less full width of door, or as specified. Furnish all push/kick and armour plates with ‘B4E’ beveled edges. Where door pulls and push plates are specified countersink door pull throughbolts in door for flush fit and apply push plates over top of throughbolts. Follow specific mounting instructions where push plate, door pull and deadlock applications occur. Fasteners for push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware schedule. Where NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 8 full height door pulls are specified supply units less 150mm from the top of door and 300mm from bottom of door,. Submit shop drawing of pulls for review. 1 Specified Manufacturer: Rockwood 14. Wall Mounted Door Stop: Provide convex or concave design as specified. Contractor to provide necessary wall blocking were required. 1 Specified Manufacturers: Rockwood 15. Overhead Stops / Holders: track, arm and jamb bracket shall be constructed of extruded bronze. Slide block manufactured of nylon for noise free operation and shock absorber spring shall be of heavy tempered steel. Overhead stops shall be of non-handed design. 1 Specified Manufacturers: Rixson 1 Series 16. Weatherseals and Gaskets: On exterior doors and smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide seals as required to meet UL10C. Provide only those units where silicon seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. Provide head seal as solid aluminum extrusion suitable for stop applied hardware ie P/A closers or surface overhead door stops. 1) Specified Manufacturers: Pemko Model S773 2) Door Sweeps: House nylon brush seal in extruded aluminum case. Surface applied and adjusted to suit gap at bottom of door, complete with snap cover. a) Specified Manufacturers: Pemko Model 29326 17. Thresholds: less than 4” wide, formed to accommodate change in floor elevation where indicated, fabricated to accommodate door hardware and to fit door frames. All threshold units shall comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 1 Specified Manufacturers: Pemko Model 253 Series Thresholds 18. Silencers: rubber door silencers at all hollow metal frames; two (2) per pair and three (3) per single door frame. 19. Concealed Door Position Switch. Door Position Switches shall be a concealed 3 wire unit consisting of magnet and switch. 1 2 Barrier Free Washrooms: Sargent 3287 Doors monitored by COT Security: Sentrol 1076D (By Security) 20. Power Supplies: shall furnish regulated 24VDC and shall be UL class 2 listed. LED’s shall monitor zone status (voltage/no voltage) and slide switches shall be provided to connect or disconnect the load from power; 1, 4 or 8 separate output circuit breakers shall be provided to divide the load. Power supplies shall have the internal capability of charging optional 12/24VDC sealed lead acid batteries in addition to operating the DC load. Power supplies shall be supplied complete requiring only 120VAC to the fused input and shall be supplied in an enclosure. Power supplies shall be provided with emergency release terminals that allow the release of all devices upon activation of the fire alarm system. 1 Specified Manufacturer: Securitron BPS NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 9 21. Elynx Cables: All power transfer hinges, electrified locksets, electric exit device trim and electric exit devices are to be equipped with Molex plug connectors. Door and Frame Elynx cables have been specified at a provisional length at each of these locations. It is the responsibility of the finishing hardware supplier to supply these cables, prior to door/frame manufacture, in appropriate lengths required by the various manufacturers. The hardware supplier is responsible to contact the door manufacturers to determine the cabling route and supply the correct length. Where the door manufacturer requires flying ends on Elynx cables the hardware installer will be responsible to map and pin Molex connectors. .3 FINISHES 1. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18 or traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. 2. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturers’ standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. 3 Execution .1 EXAMINATION 1. Contractor shall ensure that the building is secured and free from weather elements prior to installing interior door hardware. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free of defects. 2. It is the responsibility of the Hardware Supplier to provide a written inspection report prior to Substantial Completion. Subsequently the deficiencies will be corrected by the contractor and reported in writing. 3. After the deficiencies have been corrected, the Hardware Consultant will provide the final inspection report. Any deficiencies not performed and corrected during this final inspection and requiring additional labor or product, will be withdrawn from the contractor’s final billing. .2 INSTALLATION 1. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations. 1 “Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI.) 2 NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, “Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors.” 2. The hardware supplier is responsible to brief all related trades of the installation requirements for both the electronic and mechanical items specified. 3. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed by sub trades involved. NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 10 4. Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 5. Electronic Hardware Systems 1 Install all electronic hardware as per elevation and point to point drawings furnished under Submittals. 2 Prior to installation of electronic hardware, arrange meeting on site between supplier, installers and related trades to review materials, procedures and coordinating related work. 3 For each item of electrified hardware specified, provide standardized Molex plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Molex plug connectors shall plug directly into through-door wiring harnesses and electric locking devices. The finishing hardware installer is responsible to attach the Elynx plug connector with flying leads to the frame portion of the hinge for hook up by the security system provider. The finishing hardware supplier will brief the installer of this requirement. .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for coordinating all portions of the work under the Contract, unless the contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. 2. The hardware consultant shall attend site meetings to make certain of proper execution of the guidelines set in this document. The Contractor will do periodic inspection of door frames, prior to door and hardware installation to ensure frames have been installed plumb and true. 3. The installer will verify all frames to be plumb and true, prior to hardware installation. .4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATION 1. Prior to acceptance or occupancy, adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation and function. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application. 2. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 3. Clean operating items as necessary to restore to proper finish. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes and usage of any electronic devices. .5 PROTECTION 1. Contractor shall protect all hardware, stored on the construction site, in a covered, dry, and secure place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install all hardware at the latest possible time frame. .6 SEPARATE PRICE NATHAN PHILLIPS SQUARE REVITALIZATION BIKE STORAGE FACILITY 08 71 00 FINISHING HARDWARE JUNE 27, 2014 PAGE 11 1. Provide a separate cost to supply the following for possible inclusion at Doors: TH015, TH018, TH019 and TH030. 4 each HES 4500 LBM 630 x 2005M3. Existing locksets to be changed in function to storeroom function on site. .7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE 1. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the Contractor; do not consider it as entirely inclusive. Prior to tender closing, it is the responsibility of the hardware supplier, to bring to the attention of the Contractor any errors or omissions. Crossreference hardware schedule with architectural drawings and door schedule. Provide door or item with hardware the same as required for similar purposes. Hardware supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products as listed in the hardware heading. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 08800 MISCELLANEOUS GLASS AND GLAZING Page 08800 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Work Included in This Section 1.3.1 Work includes, but not limited to: glazing of hollow metal doors, standard wood doors, screens in hollow metal frames, and glazing around elevator shafts. 1.4 Referenced Standards 1.4.1 CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90 Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass 1.4.2 CAN/CGSB-12.3-M91 Flat, Clear Float Glass 1.4.3 CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90 Wired Safety Glass 1.4.4 NFPA 80 National Fire Protection Association, Fire Doors and Windows 1.4.5 ANSI Z97.1-1984 (R1994) Glazing Materials Used in Buildings Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. 1.4.6 Flat Glass Manufacturers Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual. 1.4.7 ULC CAN4 S104-M Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.4.8 ULC CAN4 S106-M Standard Method for Fire Tests of Window and Glass Block Assemblies. 1.5 Submittals 1.5.1 Samples: On request, submit samples of glass in accordance with Section 01001 for Consultant's approval. Project No. 0701-BS 1.5.2 SECTION 08800 MISCELLANEOUS GLASS AND GLAZING Page 08800 - 2 Extended Warranty .1 Submit a warranty for mirrors in accordance with Section 01001, covering the repair or replacement of defective work for a period of 4 years from the expiration of the one-year warranty stated in the General Conditions. .2 Warranty shall apply against defects in workmanship and materials and, against silver deterioration and loosening of fastenings. .3 Total warranty period shall be 5 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 General: Factory label every sheet of glass and keep in place until final cleaning. 2.1.2 Tempered Glass: Conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.1. 2.1.3 Float Glass: Conforming to CAN/CGSB-12.3. 2.1.4 Shims, Spacers and Setting Blocks: Neoprene with Durometer hardness of 70-90, Shore ‘A’ for setting blocks; Durometer 40-60, Shore ‘A’ for shims and spacers. Use ULC approved materials for fire rated assemblies. 2.1.5 Glazing Gaskets: Extruded neoprene or PVC channel gaskets with lock strip. 2.1.6 Glazing Tape: For unrated glazing preformed butyl with continuous spacer, Shore "A" 1015 durometer hardness paper release, black colour, 3 x 9.5 mm. For fire rated glazing tape shall be fire rated for positive pressure as supplied by Pemko Canada. 2.1.7 Safety Decals: Pressure sensitive tape by 3M in design selected by Consultant. 2.1.8 Sliding Glass Partition Panels: Operable glass partition at Reception Room [BSP-02] service counter, Modernfold Glass Wall Model FSW-G or approved alternate. Manually operated and top-supported series of individual glass panels. Opening dimensions 1,925mm wide over stepped counter area. One panel 1,150mm wide x 1,250mm tall. Second panel 775mm wide x 1,500mm tall. Top and bottom rails w/ bottom rail locking system. ½” thick tempered clear glass. Satin stainless steel clad fittings. Refer to drawing A4/BR-A-900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation 3.1.1 Take critical site dimensions to ensure that adjustments in fabrication or installation are provided for, and that clearances to other constructions have been maintained. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 08800 MISCELLANEOUS GLASS AND GLAZING Page 08800 - 3 3.1.2 Ensure that anchors and inserts installed by others are adequate to meet specified requirements, and make adaptations before installation. 3.1.3 Accurately measure openings and calculate light size based on manufacturer's installation tables, allowing for proper minimum edge engagement, rabbet width, rabbet depth, and expansion. 3.1.4 Free rabbets, stops and glass edges of dust, dirt, moisture, oil and other foreign matter detrimental to or obstructing the glazing material. 3.1.5 Follow manufacturer's recommendations for preparation. 3.2 Installation 3.2.1 Unless otherwise specified, dry glaze all interior glass using glazing tape or glazing gaskets. 3.2.2 Remove and replace glazing stops in original locations using original fasteners, securely set and undamaged. 3.2.3 For screens, use setting blocks and spacers as required to properly support the glass, centred in place in glazing space independent of the materials and to uniformly distribute its load. 3.2.4 Use a minimum of 2 setting blocks, locate at quarter points. Locate spacers at jamb edges of glass, uniformly spaced at 600 mm o.c. maximum, and 300 mm maximum from top and bottom. 3.2.5 Prior to setting glass, install channel gasket around entire perimeter of glass. Make tight butt joint at corners of lights. Place on neoprene setting blocks at sill and spacers at both jambs or sides of opening as required to centre the unit in the frame. Fit the unit into the frames and apply the stops against the gaskets. Tighten the screws or clips to obtain positive uniform pressure avoiding excessive pressure. 3.2.6 Ensure rattle-free cushioning. 3.2.7 For fire rated assemblies, Place setting blocks located at quarter points of glass with edge block no more than 150 mm from corners. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, flush with sight lines to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. Glaze vertically into labeled fire-rated metal frames or partition walls with same fire rating as glass and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. Install removable stop and secure without displacement of tape. Install so that appropriate ULC markings remain permanently visible. 3.2.8 Provide labels on glass indicating reference standard, leave until it has been inspected. Leave glass without cracks or other defects and with settings in perfect condition at completion. Remove rejected, broken or damaged glass due to defective materials or improper setting and replace with perfect materials. Units producing distorted vision shall be rejected and replaced at the reasonable discretion of the Consultant. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 08800 MISCELLANEOUS GLASS AND GLAZING Page 08800 - 4 3.2.9 Apply safety decals to one surface of glass at 200 mm o.c. at mounting height as directed. Be sure glass is completely clean before applying decal. Do not incorporate air under decals. Remove and replace any decal which is defective or not fully bonded to glass. 3.3 Cleaning 3.3.1 Remove deposits which affect appearance of units on completion of installation. 3.3.2 Clean surfaces by washing with clear water, or with water and soap or detergent, followed by a clear water rinse. 3.3.3 Clean and restore stained metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Replace if cleaning is impossible. 3.3.4 Clean glazing with methods and materials recommended by glazing material manufacturer. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09365 DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES Page 09365 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes 1.1.1 Division One, General Reqts is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 Accessibility for Ontarions with Disabilities (AODA) Act: 1.2.1 Detectable Warning Surfaces are required at all stair and ramp landings as outlined in the AODA standards. 1.3 LEED Requirements 1.3.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.3.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.4 Referenced Standards 1.4.1 ASTM C1028, Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. 1.5 Submittals 1.5.1 Samples: Submit 300 x 300 mm sample of detectable warning surfaces for Consultant's approval, in accordance with Section 01001. 1.5.2 Extended Warranty: .1 Submit a warranty of the work of this Section in accordance with Section 01300, covering the period of one (1) year beyond the expiration of the standard one year warranty included in the General Conditions. .2 Total warranty period shall be two (2) years. .3 Defective work shall include, but not be limited to loss of bond, loosening, leaking, cracking, and chipping, or other deformations. 1.5.3 Maintenance: Submit requirements for maintenance, including cleaning in accordance with Section 01300, for incorporation into Manufacturer's Data Book. 1.5.4 LEED VOC Submittals: Provide LEED submittals including Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) cut sheets or other official literature from manufacturers clearly identifying VOC contents as per Section 01611. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09365 DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES Page 09365 - 2 1.6 Delivery, Storage And Handling 1.6.1 Deliver materials in adequate crates or containers with manufacturer’s name and product description clearly marked. 1.6.2 Handle and store tiles in a manner to avoid chipping or breakage. Take precautions to protect the adhesives from freezing or from excessive heat. 1.7 Site Conditions 1.7.1 Do not install Work of this Section outside of the following environmental ranges without the Consultant's and Product manufacturer's written acceptance: .1 Ambient air and surface temperature: Minimum 400F. .2 Precipitation: None. 1.7.2 Install temporary protection and facilities to maintain the Product manufacturer's, and specified, environmental requirements for 7 Days before, during, and 7 Days after installation. 1.8 Maintenance 1.8.1 Submit extra tile amounting to 3% of gross area covered, allowing proportionately for each pattern and type specified and which are part of the same Production run as installed Products. Store maintenance Products as directed by the Consultant. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 LEED Requirements: All adhesives, sealants, paints, coatings and primers for those products shall have a VOC content that is less than the content limits defined in Section 01611. 2.1.2 Detectable Warning Tile (DWS): Refer to Schedule of Finishes for types, sizes, styles, colours and manufacturers. Locations as indicated on Room Finish Schedule. Provide DWS stainless steel domes at all exterior areas with precast concrete and poured concrete finish. Provide DWS plastic dome plates at the interior Rabbit Stair landings from Plaza down to P1 Level. 2.1.3 Fasteners: Colour matched, corrosion resistant, flat head drive anchor as recommended by tile Manufacturer. 2.1.4 Adhesive: Bonding adhesive ‘Armor-Bond’ by Engineered Plastics Inc. 2.1.5 Sealant: ‘Armor-Seal’ by Engineered Plastics Inc. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09365 DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES Page 09365 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation 3.1.1 Prepare substrate using steel aggregate blast method and vacuum substrate free of debris and dust. 3.1.2 Fill minor cracks and voids and prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.1.3 Project adjacent surfaces from damage resulting from this Work. Mask and/or cover adjacent surfaces, fixtures, and equipment as necessary. 3.1.4 Clean, prime and seal surfaces as recommended by detectable tile manufacturer. 3.2 Cast-In-Place Installation 3.2.1 Install cast-in-place tile in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and in coordination with Division 3. 3.2.2 Ensure concrete has been poured and finished true and smooth to required dimensions and slope prior to tile placement. 3.2.3 Place tile into fresh concrete and tamp to ensure that top of domes are level to adjacent concrete. Do not step on tiles. 3.2.4 Provide a 9.5 mm radius edge around tile perimeter flush to field level while concrete is still workable. 3.2.5 Do not allow walking, leaning or external forces be placed on tile. Provide two suitable weights of 25 lb each placed on each tile as necessary to ensure solid contact of underside of tile to concrete. 3.2.6 Remove protective plastic wrap from tile following concrete curing stage, using a sharp knife, tight to concrete/tile interface. Concrete bleed under plastic can be removed with a soft brass wire brush without damage to the tile surface. 3.3 Surface Applied Installation 3.3.1 Apply adhesive to backside of tile, following perimeter and internal cross pattern established by tile manufacturer. Ensure sufficient adhesive has been placed on prescribed areas to have full coverage across width of adhesive locator and shall be applied to within 6 mm continuously around perimeter edge of tile. 3.3.2 Set tile true and square to areas as detailed on drawings. 3.3.3 Working from centre of tile outwards, proceed to drill and install all fasteners in tile’s moulded recesses. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09365 DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES Page 09365 - 4 3.3.4 Drill hole while standing with both feet applying pressure around moulded recess in tile, drill through tile without hammer option until tile has been penetrated, then with hammer option to drill into concrete. Maintain foot pressure on both sides of hole while drilling to prevent concrete dust from accumulating between tile and concrete. 3.3.5 Immediately after drilling each hole, mechanically fasten tile to concrete substrate while still applying foot pressure. Ensure fastener has been placed to full depth in dome, straight, and flush to the top of dome and drive pin of fastener with mallet. 3.3.6 Apply perimeter caulking sealant recommendations and Section 07900. 3.4 Cleaning And Protection 3.4.1 Clean tiles in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.4.2 Prevent traffic over new installed detectable tiles, and protect from weather, freezing, and water immersion, for 24 hours minimum, after final installation. 3.4.3 Cover work temporarily with plywood until work has been approved by Consultant. in accordance * * * END OF SECTION with sealant manufacturer’s Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09756 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING Page 09756 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Submittals 1.3.1 Maintenance Instructions: Submit two copies of maintenance instructions to Consultant in accordance with Section 01001, for incorporation into Manufacturer's Data book. 1.4 Special Precautions 1.4.1 Immediately after using, immerse and store used wiping cloths in water and remove from site each night after operation. Take every precaution to prevent spontaneous combustion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 General: 2.1.1 For application at all Rabbit Stair Concrete Floors, including new Rabbit Stair, Storage Room and Custodial Room. 2.2 Materials 2.2.1 Floor Sealer: "Hard-Cure" by CPD, "Prothane" by Proseal, "PQ 5114" by Permaquik Corporation, L & M “Sealhard” or “Sikafloor 3S” by Sika Canada Inc. Use for areas with the abbreviation "Conc/Sealed"on the Room Schedule. Apply these products in the later stages of construction as a sealer only, not as a curing-sealing compound. Unless noted otherwise all sealers to be clear. 2.2.2 Polished Concrete Floor Sealer: Magnesium fluorosilicate concrete hardener and dustproofer; 'Lapidolith' by BASF Building Systems or approved alternative. 2.2.3 Cleaner, Thinners and Accessories: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer, to suit each specific condition encountered on this project. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09756 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING Page 09756 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Examination 3.1.1 Before commencing with the work examine floors to be sealed, and verify compatibility between curing sealing agent if one was used to seal floors and final concrete sealer applied under work of this Section. Sandblast, acid etch, lightly grind, whichever is required to prepare floors to ensure bonding if curing-sealing agent has been used to cure concrete. 3.2 Floor Sealer Application 3.2.1 Commence sealing as soon as concrete surfaces have cured for the minimum period recommended by the sealant manufacturer, and after tests indicate moisture and chemical conditions are satisfactory for application. 3.2.2 Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use wheelabrator method. For silane sealer prepare concrete by minimum 20 MPa water blast. Clean concrete of any dirt, dust, oil, grease, stains, paint, laitence, or other contamination detrimental the bond of sealer and final appearance. 3.2.3 Apply sealer in dust-free conditions suitable for achieving good results. Apply sealer in 2 coats in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. In the case of urethane sealer, cut first coat 25% with thinner. Apply sealer to present uniformly-coloured surfaces, free from runs, bubbles, brush marks, crawls, dirt or dust particles, or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 3.3 Polished Floor Sealer Application 3.3.1 Apply minimum three coatings of sealer to entire surface in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Diluted ratio as recommended by manufacturer. 3.3.2 After first application, allow floor to dry until no longer visibly wet. If crystals develop during second application, flush surface liberally with clean water. At same time, rapidly brush floor with a stiff bristle broom. Mop up excess water and allow surface to dry. 3.3.3 As last application is drying, wait for uniform appearance of white crystals. Flood floor with water and lightly buff floor with a commercial floor buffer and non-aggressive pad to bring up required sheen. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Page 09900 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.2 Toronto Parking Authority Requirements 1.2.1 All areas within Toronto Parking Authority 4-storey underground Parking Garage (Carpark 36) requiring Painting and Finish shall conform to TPA Outline Specifications appended in Volume 3, Reports & Schedules. 1.2.2 Refer to Allowances for “Painting & Finishing Allowance related to Toronto Parking Authority (TPA). This refers to all areas affected by new construction related to this project, on P1 through P4 Parking Floor Levels. This includes but is not limited to: new traffic lines and directional arrows; new Mechanical & Electrical services; interior of Rabbit Stair from Plaza Level down to P1 Parking Level. 1.3 LEED Requirements 1.3.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.3.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.4 Referenced Standards 1.4.1 CAN/CGSB-85.100-M93 Painting 1.4.2 SSPC-SP6 Steel Structures Painting Council, Commercial Blast Cleaning Standard 1.5 Submittals 1.5.1 Samples .1 Submit 2 sample chips of every colour required in accordance with Section 01001. Include a complete list of paint and finish materials to be used, showing the name of the manufacturer, the catalogue number, grade and quality of the materials proposed for use. .2 Colours shall match those specified in the Material and Colour Schedule. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Page 09900 - 2 .3 Apply samples of finishes in a testing area in the building in the presence of the Consultant. Apply samples with the correct material, number of coats, colour, texture and degree of gloss required. Refinish if required, until approval of the Consultant is obtained. Location of testing area shall be as approved by the Consultant. .4 Leave test areas undisturbed until completion of the work. Approved work in the test area shall serve as a standard for similar work throughout the project. Work which does not match the approved finishes shall be corrected and refinished at no expense to the Owner. 1.5.2 List of Materials: Submit a list of materials proposed for use on the work, for review at least thirty (30) days before the materials are required. The list shall bear the manufacturer's official certification that the materials listed thereon are the best quality made by the company. 1.5.3 Extra Materials: Supply Owner with one clearly identified sealed 3.78 litre can of each colour and type of paint, stain, and varnish for this work for future maintenance. Take such materials to designated storage area in the building. 1.6 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1.6.1 Storage and Safety Precautions: Store containers of paint, varnish, thinner, and other volatile materials in well-ventilated designated room under lock and key, where they will not be exposed to excessive heat or direct rays of the sun. Keep containers tightly closed when not in actual use. Remove used cloths from building every night, and when not in use. Take precautions against spontaneous combustion by burning, drenching in water, or placing in air-tight covered metal containers. Provide CO2 fire extinguisher of 9 kg. capacity in this room while area is used for paint storage. 1.6.2 Protection: Protect the work of other trades from damage. Post signs at freshly-painted surfaces immediately following their completion. Any soiling of concrete pavement attributable to this section due to spillage, mixing of material, or any other cause whatsoever, to be entirely reinstated under this Section at no expense to the Owner. 1.7 Job Conditions 1.7.1 Environmental Conditions and Temperatures: Do not paint or finish in dusty, or moist air conditions, unclean or improperly ventilated areas. Maintain at least 10 degrees C ambient and substrate temperatures and humidity conditions within acceptable limits as recommended by paint manufacturer during application and drying period. 1.7.2 On exterior work, paint shall not be applied during rainy, foggy or very humid weather nor in direct sunlight. Paint shall be applied in temperatures between 10 deg. C and 30 deg. C. Varnishes lacquers and enamels shall be applied at a temperature of about 20 deg. C but in no case shall the temperature be less than 15 deg. C, nor more than 30 deg. F. 1.7.3 Protection Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Page 09900 - 3 .1 Provide metal pans or adequate tarpaulins to protect floors in areas assigned for the storage and mixing of paints. .2 Use sufficient drop cloths and protective coverings for the full protection of floors, furnishings, and work not being painted. Protect mechanical, electrical, and special equipment hardware, all other components of the building which do not require painting from paint spotting and other soiling during the painting process. .3 Leave above areas clean and free from evidence of occupancy upon completion of painting. .4 Protect paint materials from fire and freezing. .5 Keep waste rags in metal drums containing water, and remove from building at end of each working shift. 1.7.4 Lighting: Provide a minimum of 761 lux (75 footcandles) lighting on surfaces to be painted. 1.7.5 Epoxy Paint: In occupied buildings do not apply epoxy paint during business hours (7:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m.). Give Owner 48 hours notice in writing before application work begins. Cease operations a minimum of 3 hours before business day begins. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 Paint .1 Highest grade, first line quality product of the manufacturer. Painting and finishing materials shall comply with or exceed CAN2-85-100 for Premium Grade Work and comply with the specified generic formula guide in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Refer to Material and Colour Schedule for colours. Additional colours will be issued at a later date after closing of tenders. Make allowance for 25% of paint to be deep accent colours, 25% pale accents and remainder 2 base colours for interior painting and all deep colours for exterior painting. The following manufacturers are acceptable: .1 Benjamin Moore Paints .2 ICI Paints Canada .3 Pratt and Lambert Inc. .4 PPG Canada Inc. .5 Sherwin-Williams Company of Canada Limited Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING .6 Para Paints. .7 International Protective Coatings. .8 Sico Inc. Page 09900 - 4 .3 The Consultant reserves the right to refuse any paint or finishing material if in his opinion it is incapable of matching specified colours or is not suitable or adequate for the use which it is proposed. .4 One brand of paint shall be used for each formula. .5 Benjamin Moore paint shall be used for all Toronto Parking Authority Parking Garage (Carpark 36) areas as outlined in TPA Outline Specifications appended in Volume 3, Reports & Schedules. 2.1.2 Stain: Pigmented type conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.145-M90, Solvent-Based, pigmented stain. 2.1.3 Polyurethane Varnish: Interior grade, oil modified conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.175-M89. 2.1.4 Galvanized Metal Primer: Alkyd/Calcium plumate, #52 Galvaprime by Para Paints Limited, Galvanized Metal Primer #150-00 by Benjamin Moore and Company Ltd., Galvanized Iron Primer (Rustmaster) #52-29 by Glidden Co. Canada Ltd. or equivalent by Valspar. 2.1.5 Luminescent Paint: Two-part, 100% solids epoxy paint, glow in the dark system applied to 25 mils thick. ‘Niteglow NG-100' with ‘Primer 114' by Wooster or approved alternative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Inspection 3.1.1 Verify all surfaces with electric moisture meter and do not proceed if reading is higher than 12-15, without written permission from Consultant. 3.1.2 Proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production of a first-class job. 3.1.3 Remove dust, grease, rust, and extraneous matter from all surfaces, except that rust occurring on items specified to be primed under other Sections shall be removed and work reprimed under those Sections. 3.2 Preparation 3.2.1 Concrete and Masonry .1 Test surfaces for alkalinity with pink litmus paper or other standard industry method. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Page 09900 - 5 .2 Where extreme alkalinity occurs, wash surface with 4% solution tetrapotassium pyrophosphate where latex base paint is to be used, and with zinc sulphate solution where other paint bases are to be used. .3 Etch normal concrete surface to receive alkyd paint with commercial muriatic acid solution (1 part to 20 parts water by volume). Follow with complete rinsing with clean water. .4 Rub down surfaces of different textures and remove mortar spots and sharp edges with a scraper. Patch where required. Fill masonry and concrete surfaces with block filler to fill all holes and pores. 3.2.2 Gypsum and Cement Board: Inspect to ensure properly filled joints, sand smooth. Fill small nicks or holes with patching compound and sand smooth. 3.2.3 Unprimed Ferrous Metal Surfaces: clean with power tools to SSPC-SP3 specifications before application of the primer coat. 3.2.4 Galvanized and Pre Primed Surfaces 3.2.5 3.2.6 .1 New Metal With Wipe Coated Galvanizing: Thoroughly clean to remove all grease, oil, dirt and all other contaminants which may be present on the surface. Mineral Spirits or Xylol are acceptable solvents to use for this purpose - that is, to remove grease, oil, dirt and similar contaminants. Remove scale by wirebrushing. .2 Weathered Metal and Wipe Coated Galvanizing: For old and weathered galvanized, wipe coat galvanized surfaces and preprimed metal, thorough surface preparation is essential - to ensure that all contaminants have been removed from the surface and pretreat as for New Metal. .3 Spangled Type Galvanizing: Treat with vinyl wash primer to provide proper bond for paint finish. Woodwork .1 For woodwork not called for to be factory finished, but to be painted on site, inspect casework and millwork to assure surfaces are smooth, free from machine marks, and that nailheads have been countersunk. Seal all knots and sapwood in surfaces to receive paint with a sealer compatible with finish specified. .2 Sand smooth all woodwork which is to be finished and clean surfaces free of dust before applying first coat. In the case of painted woodwork, fill nail and screw holes, splits and scratches with non-shrinking filler after first coat is dry. When these occur on a surface to receive a transparent finish, use putty tinted to match local grain condition. Between coats, sand lightly with #120 grit sandpaper and remove dust. Hardware: Remove finish hardware, switch plates and accessories, removable trim, grilles, etc; mask any that are not removable. Re-install these when paint is thoroughly dry and Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Page 09900 - 6 clean them. Do not clean hardware with solvent. Prime-painted hardware items shall be painted to match the surface on which they are installed. 3.2.7 Preprimed Pumps, Motors, and Similar Equipment: Prior to painting preprimed pumps, motors, and similar equipment, remove paint protective coating such as silicone, to ensure good paint adhesion. 3.2.8 Mask and cover all surrounding surfaces to provide neat, clean, true juncture lines, and to keep paint from adjacent surfaces. Protect floor finishes from splashings. 3.2.9 Mask labels and specification plates occurring on equipment to be painted and ULC labels on doors and frames. 3.2.10 Re-seal all cut edges of wood doors, if the material was cut subsequent to initial sealing. Seal or prime the tops and bottoms of wood doors. 3.2.11 Existing Surfaces Preparation: To CAN/CGSB-85.100-93, CPCA Manual Chapter 3 and as follows: .1 .2 .3 .4 Gypsum Wallboard .1 Remove dirt, dust, sand and other foreign matter. Limit methods to CS-1 Hand cleaning methods in accordance with requirements of CPCA. .2 Repair holes, cracks or undulations in the wallboard. Inspect and make necessary repairs after the first coat of paint is applied. Steel - Recoat: To CGSB-85-GP-15M-Apr-1978, and as follows: .1 Severely deteriorated: Completely remove existing coating. .2 Moderately damaged areas: Spot clean and patch priming prior to new finishing. At exterior, all touch up to be with zinc rich paint. .3 Generally: Clean surface of contaminants. Test patch new primer and/or finish when changing the generic type of coating or existing coating system cannot be identified. Steel and Copper (Interior) .1 Provide surfaces after cleaning that are free of oxidation, oil, grease, soil, salts, drawing and cutting compounds and other foreign matter. .2 Use hand cleaning system as described for interior concrete. .3 Use solvent-cleaning as required. .4 Test patch new primer and/or finish when changing the generic type of coating or existing coating system cannot be identified. Interior Concrete – Sound Paint Surfaces Project No. 0701-BS .5 .6 SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Page 09900 - 7 .1 Wash area to be painted with water; use a mild detergent solution if necessary and rinse thoroughly until all detergent has been removed, and allow to dry. .2 Use hand cleaning system exclusively. .3 Acceptable hand-tools are scrapers, wire brushes, sandpaper, steel wool, and dusters. Wood .1 Mildew removal: Scrub the affected areas with a solution of: 1 L household bleach, 3 L water and 1 Tbsp of household detergent. Thoroughly rinse the scrubbed areas with plenty of clean water and allow the surface to dry completely before proceeding with any further preparation for painting. .2 Seal knots and resinous areas with a clear vinyl sealer conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.26. Do not seal the knots or resinous areas of wood substrates which are being finished with clear finishes, transparent and semi-transparent stains. .3 After the first prime coat has been applied, fill all joints, cracks, knot holes and nail holes with a suitable filling material. Spot prime the filled areas. Where stains are used, match the colour of the filler to the stain. Apply filler compatible with substrate to holes and cracks. 3.3 Workmanship 3.3.1 Apply work using skilled tradesmen working under direction of a capable foreman, and according to manufacturer's specifications; in a workmanlike manner; with suitable clean equipment in good condition; in dust-free and under adequate illumination and suitable conditions for production of best results; evenly, uniform in sheen, colour and texture, free from brush marks, sags, crawls, runs, or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance; and in a manner to prevent spattering or spilling over finished surfaces. 3.3.2 Mix paint on site and use unadulterated, except where specified otherwise in manufacturer's directions. 3.3.3 Use same brand of paint for primer, intermediate, and finish coats. 3.3.4 Do not apply succeeding coats until preceding coat is dry and hard. 3.3.5 Lighten preceding coats 25% white (tint white coats) from the colour called for in the Colour and Material Schedule. 3.3.6 It is generally intended that material be applied by brush or roller. Spray painting will be permitted in areas where advantageous, but Consultant shall be consulted and shall approve Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Page 09900 - 8 each area before spray painting commences. Consultant may at any time prohibit the use of spray painting for such reasons during application as carelessness, poor masking, or protective measures, paint fogs drifting into prepainted surfaces or other finishes, disturbance to other trades, or failure to obtain a dense, even, opaque finish. 3.3.7 Sand lightly between coats with #120 grit sandpaper. 3.3.8 Do not apply last coat of varnish on stained wood surfaces until all gloss varnish applications have been inspected and approved by the Consultant. 3.3.9 Finish exposed edges of doors to match face of door. Seal hidden edges of wood core doors with two coats of gloss varnish or two coats of paint. Paint exposed raw edges of plywood doors to match faces. Fill all open end grain of wood doors and plywood with filler after first coat application. 3.4 Application 3.4.1 Follow manufacturer's preparation and application instructions. 3.4.2 Paint all exposed surfaces where specifically noted on Room, Material and Finish Schedule. 3.4.3 Unless specifically noted, do not paint stainless steel, chrome, baked enamel, plastic laminate, glass, tile, porcelain enamel, ceramic surfaces, equipment name or specification plates, fire resistance labels, washroom fixtures, manhole and catch basin covers, floors or sprinkler heads. Make good paint finish on items where painted surfaces have become marred or defaced. 3.4.4 Any sprinkler heads rendered inoperable by painting and/or new construction will require replacement at Contractor's expense. 3.4.5 Examine the Drawings and Specifications for the work of other sections regarding the provisions for prime and finish coats. Paint or finish all materials installed throughout the project which are required to be painted and which are left unfinished or unpainted by other sections. The only exception to this requirement is where the Drawings, specifications or schedules state positively and explicitly that a surface is not to be finish painted. 3.4.6 In areas where painting is not called for, painting is not required, with the following exceptions, which require paint: plywood backboards, all other exposed wood, all exposed ferrous metals (even if galvanized), and mechanical and electrical services, equipment and hangers (including exterior rooftop mechanical and electrical units) and interior of coat closets. Colours selected by Consultant. 3.4.7 Paint interior of all pipe and duct spaces, visible through grilles, black matte finish. Paint interior of lighting coves and valances including interior of angles supporting louvres, white. 3.4.8 Paint glazing rebates and stops of hollow-metal sections before glass is installed. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Page 09900 - 9 3.4.9 Paint convectors, grilles, conduit, pipes, ducts, hangers, brackets, panels, access panels, exposed steel, concrete inserts, fire hose cabinets, bus ducts, and other articles on or near finished surface shall to match the colour of the surface on which the article appears, except where noted otherwise on Schedules. 3.4.10 Paint piping, conduits, ductwork and other unfinished equipment in boiler room, mechanical rooms, and electrical rooms. In other unfinished areas leave equipment, piping, conduits, hangers, etc., in original finish and touch up scratches and marks. 3.4.11 Identification paint schedule as follows: .1 Fire protection system: red, alkyd enamel. .2 Systems posing safety hazards such as gas piping: yellow, alkyd enamel. .3 Safe systems: green, alkyd enamel. 3.4.12 Do not paint circuit breakers, switches, and receptacles, or similar electrical components. 3.4.13 Paint surfaces where mirrors will be directly applied to prevent moisture bleed through wall. 3.4.14 For finished interior wood that is to be painted, apply one coat of approved best grade white interior trim primer, reduced with thinners in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions, to ALL surfaces of wood as soon as material is delivered and before it is built in. Use brushes for applying material to interior wood. 3.4.15 Repaint the entire plane of areas showing incomplete coverage. 3.4.16 Do not paint over ULC labels on doors and frames and over identification labels on mechanical and electrical equipment. 3.4.17 "Cut in" at corners and or wall ceiling junctions. 3.5 Traffic Lines and Barrier Free Symbols 3.5.1 Apply 100 mm wide traffic line paint in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Make edges of line sharp, well defined and free of splatters. Include handicapped symbols in parking stalls designated for the disabled. Line painting and stall marking shall match existing. 3.5.2 Have traffic lines work performed by an experienced company which specializes in this type of work. 3.5.3 On concrete parking slabs on grade to have sealer finish, apply line painting prior to Garage sealer application. 3.5.4 Walkway and Directional arrows: Provide 3M adhesive-backed directional arrows on driving lanes. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Page 09900 - 10 3.5.5 All Toronto Parking Authority Parking Garage (Carpark 36) areas requiring traffic lines and walkway and directional arrows shall conform to TPA Outline Specifications appended in Volume 3, Reports & Schedules. 3.6 Formulae 3.6.1 The following Formulae are intended to provide completely opaque surfaces. If surfaces are not completely opaque and uniform, apply additional coats at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.6.2 Consult Consultant before painting any surface not included in the formulae as listed. 3.6.3 Unless noted otherwise use the following sheens: 3.6.4 .1 Painted doors, frames, trim - semi-gloss. .2 Gypsum board for ceilings and walls - eggshell. .3 Janitors rooms, kitchens, garbage rooms, basement corridors, and basement washrooms - semi-gloss. .4 For masonry - semi-gloss. Formula "A" FOR: APPLY: 3.6.5 Formula “B” FOR: APPLY: Note: 3.6.6 100 mm wide parking and traffic lines and handicapped symbols. Two coats of Ibis Products Limited Traffic Paint or approved alternative, to CGSB 1-GP-74. Painted masonry or concrete. One coat of masonry block filler. (Apply by brush at package consistency. Verify moisture content before application). One coat of primer Two coats of alkyd enamel eggshell. Colour of paint for columns at vehicle driving areas shall be black from 150 mm above paving surface to a height of 750 mm. Paint above this line with 500 mm wide yellow stripe. Formula “C” FOR: APPLY: Note: Exposed gypsum board ceilings, bulkheads and areas not subjected to dirt marking. One coat of sealer-primer. Two coats of acrylic latex enamel eggshell. Painting of exposed gypsum board ceilings and exposed gypsum board walls in Shower Areas and adjoining areas is specified in Section 09810 - High Build Glazed Coating. Project No. 0701-BS FOR: APPLY: 3.6.7 APPLY: Note: Note: Painted concrete floors. One coat recommended primer. Two coats of "Epoxal 100 Solvent Free" epoxy coating manufactured by Niagara Protective Coatings, minimum 20 mils per coat. Painted wood. One coat primer. Two coats interior alkyd enamel. Formula "H" FOR: APPLY: 3.6.12 Ferrous metal surfaces. If not shop primed: One coat of rust inhibitive enamel primer. For galvanized surfaces use galvanized metal primer. If shop primed: Touch-up only with same paint as that applied in the shop. Two coats of alkyd enamel. Use exterior grade for exterior work and interior grade for interior work. Prime caulking compound as required. Undercoating is not required where surfaces are wipe-coated galvanized. Formula "G" FOR: APPLY: 3.6.11 Gypsum board to receive vinyl or other wall coverings or sprayed texture coating. One coat of alkyd sealer as recommended by manufacturer to suit the application of wall covering. Formula “F” FOR: APPLY: 3.6.10 Gypsum board surfaces subjected to dirt marks, and areas that receive scrubbing. One coat of primer. Two coats of alkyd enamel eggshell. Formula “E” FOR: APPLY: 3.6.9 Page 09900 - 11 Formula “D” FOR: 3.6.8 SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Insulation on hot water tank, and exposed insulated hot and cold water plumbing lines throughout the building. One coat of sealer. (Apply by brush at package consistency). One coat of acrylic latex enamel. Formula "I" FOR: Interior of all pipe spaces and ducts visible through grilles, and all surfaces visible through louvres occurring in ceilings. Project No. 0701-BS APPLY: Note: 3.6.13 SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND FINISHING Page 09900 - 12 One coat of acrylic latex paint, colour matte black, unless indicated otherwise. Prepare surfaces as required by applying proper primers on the surface to which paint is applied. For surfaces above ceilings, paint surfaces after all services have been installed and prior to ceiling installation. Formula "J" FOR: APPLY: Note: Roof-mounted equipment, pipes, conduit, ducts and other miscellaneous items. If unprimed, apply one coat of rust inhibitive alkyd enamel primer. Two coats of exterior grade alkyd enamel. If prefinished, repaint in colour selected by Consultant. * * * END OF SECTION Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 10430 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE Page 10430 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 General Requirements 1.1.1 Division One, General Requirements is part of this Section and shall apply as if repeated here. 1.1.2 Refer to Cash Allowances. 1.2 LEED Requirements 1.2.1 This project is required to achieve a minimum rating of LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0 Gold. Refer to Section 01352. Where submittals are required they must be complete as specified in the LEED reference guide. 1.2.2 The LEED requirements listed in Sections 01355, 01359, 01611, and 02370 apply to all Sections and Work for this Project, whether specifically indicated or not. .1 Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits will be used as one criterion to evaluate requests for substitutions or alternates. 1.3 Work Included in This Section 1.3.1 Refer to Signage Schedule for complete scope of Work. Work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: .1 Bicycle Storage Facility .2 Stair signage. .3 Traffic signs. .4 Parking area (Reserved) signs. .5 Handicapped signs. .6 Fire route signs. 1.4 Submittals 1.4.1 Shop Drawings: Submit for Consultant's review in accordance with Section 01001 before fabrication. Indicate all component parts and fixings, materials, thicknesses, size, locations, adjacent construction, anchorage, finish and installation details. 1.4.2 Maintenance Instructions: Submit maintenance instructions in accordance with Section 01001 for incorporation into manufacturer's data book. 1.4.3 Samples: Submit the following samples in accordance with Section 01001 for Consultant's review. Samples shall be representative of specified colours: Project No. 0701-BS .1 SECTION 10430 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE Page 10430 - 2 Polyvinylidene (baked) coating on 200 mm long aluminum extrusion. 1.5 Design Criteria 1.5.1 Design exterior posts, panels and fasteners to support a wind load of 0.9 kN/m². 1.6 Submittals 1.6.1 Submit the following with the Bid: .1 Sketch detail of proposed signs. .2 Photographs or clear catalogue cuts of the signs. 1.7 Coordination 1.7.1 Coordinate work of other sections to receive signs. For instance, the top 200 mm of footings shall be formed with circular fibre forms, and shall be stripped after concrete has cured (not left in place). 1.7.2 Examine and be responsible for clearing potential interference of services before undertaking the excavation work. 1.8 Extended Warranty 1.8.1 Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01001, covering the repair and replacement of defective work for a period of 2 years from the expiration of the 1 year warranty included in the Contract as defined in the General Conditions. 1.8.2 Defects shall include, without being limited to: .1 Loosening of units. .2 Fading or discolouration of units. 1.8.3 Upon written notice from the Owner, promptly repair and or replace defective units. 1.8.4 Total warranty period: 3 years. 1.9 Extra Materials For Maintenance 1.9.1 Submit the following extra posts for Owner's future maintenance: .1 2 - stop sign posts .2 2 - fire route sign posts .3 1 - handicapped sign post. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 10430 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE Page 10430 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials 2.1.1 Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304 with No. 4 finish. 2.1.2 Aluminum Extrusions: AA 6063-T5 alloy and temper in nominal 3 mm thickness. 2.1.3 Aluminum Plate: AA 1100-H14 alloy and temper in nominal 3 mm thickness. 2.1.4 Pipe Posts: Hot dipped galvanized, conforming to ASTM A53. 2.1.5 Fastenings: 300 or 400 series stainless steel. 2.1.6 Anchor Bolts: Hot dipped galvanized steel, including nuts and washers. 2.1.7 Polyvinylidene Coating for Aluminum: "Kynar" based baked non-metallic coating by PPG Industries or Valspar, in specified colours. Finishes shall be satin matte, maximum gloss 15 smooth, free of scratches, gouges, air bubbles, and free of foreign matter or other imperfections. 2.1.8 Urethane Coating for Steel: 2-component exterior grade flat polyurethane suitable for galvanized metals, as manufactured by Valspar, Glidden, PPG or Benjamin Moore. 2.1.9 Bituminous Coating: Conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.108-M89. 2.2 Fabrication Requirements 2.2.1 Verify all dimensions on the site before preparing drawings or proceeding with shop work. Fit and shop assemble insofar as possible the various sections of the work and deliver to the project site in the largest practical sections. 2.2.2 Fabricate the work true to dimensions and square. Accurately fit members with hairline joints, and join using adequate fastening. 2.2.3 Fabricate finished work free from distortion and defects detrimental to appearance and performance. 2.2.4 Welding of steel and aluminum shall be undertaken only by a fabricator fully approved by the Canadian Welding Bureau to the requirements of CSA W47, CSA W55.3, and CSA W47.2 as may be applicable. File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush. Do not leave grinding, marks. Construct internal and external corners with sharp lines. Make all welds continuous. 2.2.5 Design and fabricate sign and supports to withstand loads which will be applied to it including vandalism and to accommodate expansion and contraction due to thermal change and deflection of structure. 2.2.6 Fabricate metal work complete with all components required for anchoring in a safe and secure manner. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 10430 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE Page 10430 - 4 2.2.7 Countersink exposed fastening, where such are approved in writing, and make as inconspicuous as possible with bolts cut off flush with nuts. Construct fastenings of the same material and finish as the base material on which they occur. 2.2.8 Insulate contact surfaces to prevent electrolysis due to metal to metal contact or contact between metal and masonry or concrete. Use bituminous paint, butyl tape, building paper or other approved means. 2.3 Description of Components - Directional Signs 2.3.1 Sign Panels and Finish .1 .2 2.3.2 Of specified aluminum extruded/moulded in one piece, with integral returns and a 3 mm radius on all edges and corners, and in the following types: .1 Removable panels: two sided, removable in sections to allow sign changes as required. .2 Fixed panels: one sided. Pre-finish exposed parts of aluminum panels with baked coating. Colour of aluminum shall match building exterior panels. Lettering (Logos and Graphics) .1 Computer cut, surface applied Scotchlike white reflective vinyl Series #580 by 3M, protected with a clear matte polyurethane coating containing ultraviolet inhibitors. Use Helvetica medium typeface for letters. .2 All work shall be executed in such a manner that all edges and corners are true, clean, correctly spaced, and photographically precise. All lettering must accurately reproduce the letterform. .3 Text justified left and directional arrows justified right unless otherwise indicated. All text in a single line unless otherwise indicated, with text and symbols level and spaced for visual balance. 2.4 Description of Components - Traffic Signs 2.4.1 Panels for Signs: Galvanized sheet steel in 1.5 mm thickness conforming to Standard 2001 of the Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (OPSS). 2.4.2 Symbols: Conforming to the Ministry of Transportation of Ontario, Traffic Management and Engineering Office, and as supplied by MTO approved suppliers as listed in this Section. Material shall be protected reflective proprietary plastic which is ultraviolet resistant, and which will not fade, chip, crack, corrode or rust. 2.4.3 Sign Posts, Frames and Finish: Same as specified for handicapped signs. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 10430 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE Page 10430 - 5 2.5 Description of Components - Handicapped Signs 2.5.1 Sign Panels: Galvanized sheet steel in 1.5 mm thickness conforming to Standard 2001 of the Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (OPSS). Sign to incorporate City of Toronto By-Law requirements. 2.5.2 Lettering and Painting: As indicated on Detail Sheets. Use screen printed flat and finished with baked enamel, non-reflective grade. 2.5.3 Sign Posts: Single post type, using hot dipped galvanized pipe in 75 mm diameter set in pipe sleeve in concrete footing. Provide welded and ground post caps. 2.5.4 Post Finish: Prefinish exposed parts of posts with urethane coating in colour to match sign background colour. 2.6 Description of Components - Fire Route Signs 2.6.1 Signs: Conforming to City of Toronto By-Laws, of specific types as shown on Detail Sheets. Source signs from City approved suppliers. 2.6.2 Sign Posts: Same as specified for handicapped signs. 2.6.3 Post Finish: Same as specified for handicapped signs. 2.7 Description of Components - Parking Area (Reserved) Signs 2.7.1 Sign Panels and Finish: Aluminum plate as specified, prefinished in fluoropolymer coating in colour to match building exterior panels. 2.7.2 Lettering (Logos and Graphics): Same as specified for directional signs. 2.7.3 Sign Posts: Hot dipped galvanized pipe in 50 mm diameter set in pipe sleeve in concrete footing. Provide welded and ground post caps. 2.7.4 Post Finish: Prefinish exposed parts of posts with baked coating in colour to match sign background colour. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation 3.1.1 Excavate, provide concrete base and footings, and backfill in accordance with Sections 02200 and 03300. 3.1.2 Install sign work in the correct locations and positions, plumb, level, structurally sound, securely fastened, free from defects detrimental to finished appearance and to the approval of the Consultant. Project No. 0701-BS SECTION 10430 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE Page 10430 - 6 3.1.3 Install the work of this section using skilled tradesmen and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. Apply 2 coats of bituminous paint on surfaces of aluminum in contact with concrete. Allow to dry and cure prior to aluminum installation in concrete. 3.1.4 Perform drilling of steel and/or concrete necessary to fasten the work of this section. 3.1.5 Install wall hung signs with galvanized stove bolts with heads field painted to match sign. Install in expansion sleeves. 3.1.6 Touch up disturbed coating in the field. * * * END OF SECTION